Перевод: с греческого на все языки

со всех языков на греческий

in a single day

  • 1 ἡμέρα

    ἡμέρα, [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. [full] ἡμέρη IG12(5).1 ([place name] Ios), [dialect] Dor. [full] ἀμέρα ib.5(1).213.43,al., 1390.109, 1432.25, Test.Epict.4.12, Michel995A 32, etc., [dialect] Locr. [full] ἀμάρα IG9(1).334.42 (aspirated perh. only in [dialect] Att. and West [dialect] Ion., cf.
    A

    ἐπάμερος Pi.

    , etc.,

    αὐθημερόν IG7.235.18

     ([place name] Oropus), etc.; usu. unaspirated in early [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG12.49.6, al.; aspirated in codd. even in dialects: original ἀμέρα prob. took aspirate from ἑσπέρα): ἡ:— day, less freq. than ἦμαρ in Hom.,

    ἡ. ἥδε κακὸν φέρει Il.8.541

    , 13.828; τίς νύ μοι ἡ. ἥδε; Od.24.514; νύκτες τε καὶ ἡ. 14.93; μῆνές τε καὶ ἡ. ib. 293;

    νοῦσοι ἐφ' ἡμέρῃ αἳ δ' ἐπὶ νυκτί Hes.Op. 102

    ; ἡ σήμερον ἡ., v. σήμερον· ἅμα ἡμέρᾳ or ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ at daybreak, X.An.6.3.6, Aeschin.3.76;

    ἅμ' ἡμέρῃ διαφωσκούσῃ Hdt.3.86

    ; ἡ. διέλαμψεν, ἐξέλαμψεν, ὑπέφαινε, Ar.Pl. 744, Pax 304, X.Cyr.4.5.14; τῆς ἡ. ὀψέ late in the day, Id.HG2.1.23.
    2 sts. like [dialect] Ep. ἦμαρ, with Adjs. to describe a state or time of life, ἐπίπονος ἁ. a life of misery, S.Tr. 654 (lyr.); λυπρὰν ἄγειν ἡ. E. Hec. 364; ἐχθρὰ ἡ. Id.Ph. 540; παλαιὰ ἁ. old age, S.Aj. 623 (but θεία ἡ. Id.Fr. 950 is dub. l.); τερμία ἁ. Id.Ant. 1330 (lyr.); αἱ μακραὶ ἁμέραι length of days, Id.OC 1216(lyr.); νέα ἁ. youth, E. Ion 720(lyr.); so τῇ πρώτῃ ἡ. Arist.Rh. 1389a24; ἐπὶ τῇ τελευταίᾳ ἡ. at the close of life, ib. 1389b33, cf. S.OT 1529; ζοὴν βλέπουσιν ἡ. look life-like, Herod.4.68.
    3 poet. for time,

    ἡ. κλίνει τε κἀνάγει πάλιν ἅπαντα τἀνθρώπεια S.Aj. 131

    ;

    ἐς τόδ' ἡμέρας Id.OC 1138

    : pl., ἐν ἡμέραις τινός in the days of.., LXX 1 Ch.4.41, etc.; ἡ. ἀρχαῖαι ib.Ps.142(143).5.
    4 birthday, D.L.4.41.
    5 a fixed day, τακτὴ ἡ. Act.Ap.12.21; ῥητὴ ἡ. Luc.Alex.19;

    ἡ. ἔστησαν ἀρχαιρεσιῶν D.H.6.48

    , cf. Act.Ap.17.31;

    ἡ. Κυρίου LXXJl.2.1

    , cf. 2 Ep.Pet.3.12, etc.;

    ἡ. κρίσεως Ev.Matt.10.15

    : so abs., ὑπὸ ἀνθρωπίνης ἡμέρας a human tribunal, 1 Ep.Cor.4.3;

    ἡμέραι καὶ ἀγῶνες Jahresh.23

    Beibl.93 (Pamphyl.).
    6 in pl., age, προβεβηκὼς ἐν ταῖς ἡ. Ev.Luc.1.7, cf. LXXGe.47.8, etc.
    II abs. usages,
    1 gen., τριῶν ἡμερέων within three days, Hdt.2.115, cf. Th.7.3; ἡμερῶν ὀλίγων within a few days, Id.4.26, etc.; ἄλλης ἡ. another day, S.El. 698; τῆς αὐτῆς ἡ. Isoc.4.87;

    μιᾶς ἀμέρας IG5(1).213.43

     (Sparta, V B.C.); ἡμέρας by day, opp. νυκτός, S.Fr.65;

    οὔθ' ἡμέρας οὔτε νυκτός Pl.Phdr. 240c

    ; τοὺς.. τῆς ἡ. ἄρτους δ ¯ daily, UPZ 47.21 (ii B.C.); δὶς τῆς ἡμέρης ἑκάστης twice every day, Hdt.2.37; δίς τῆς ἡ. Pl.Com.207; πεντάκις τῆς ἡ. Men.326; κατεσθίω.. τῆς ἡ. πένθ' ἡμιμέδιμνα five every day, Pherecr.1.
    3 acc., πᾶσαν ἡ. any day, i.e. soon, Hdt.1.111, 7.203; τὴν μὲν αὐτίχ' ἡ. S.OC 433; ὅλην τὴν ἡ. Eup.233; τρίτην ἡ. ἥκων two days after one's arrival, Th.8.23;

    οὐδεμίαν ἡ. ὑπεύθυνος εἶναί φημι D.18.112

    ; πέντε ἡμέρας during five days, Th.8.103; τὰς ἡ. in the daytime, X.Cyr.1.3.12; τὴν ἡ. daily, LXXEx. 29.38.
    III with Preps., μίαν ἀν' ἁμέραν on one day, Pi.O.9.85; ἀνὰ πᾶσαν ἡ. every day, Hdt.7.198; ἀφ' ἡμέρας τῆς νῦν from this day, S.OT 351; but ἀφ' ἡμέρας γίνεσθαι ἐν τῷ Μουσείῳ from early in the day, Plb.8.25.11: δι' ἡμέρης, [dialect] Att. - ρας, the whole day long, Hdt.1.97, 2.173, Pherecr.64, Ar.Ra. 260(lyr.); διὰ τρίτης ἡ. every other day, Hdt. 2.37; διὰ πολλῶν ἡ. at a distance of many days, Th.2.29;

    δι' ἡμερῶν τινων Thphr.HP4.3.6

    ; εἰσ ἡμέραν yearly, LXXJd.17.10; ἐν ἡμέρῃ in a single day, Hdt.1.126, cf. Men.Pk. 377;

    ἐνἡ. μιᾷ S.OT 615

    ; τῇδ' ἐν ἡ. Id.OC 1612; ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡ. Ev.Jo.14.20; ἐν ἑστέραισιν ἡ. A.Ag. 1666; ἐν ὀκτὼ ἡ. Lys.20.10; but ἐν τρισὶν ἡ. within three days, Ev.Jo.2.19; ἐξ ἡμέρας by day, οὔτε νυκτὸς οὔτ' ἐξ ἡ. S.El. 780; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας day after day, Henioch.5.13, LXXGe.39.10, 2 Ep.Pet.2.8 (but

    ἐξ ἡμερῶν εἰς ἡμέρας LXX 2 Ch.21.15

    ); ἐπ' ἡμέρην ἔχειν, ἐφ' -ραν χρῆσθαι, sufficient for the day, Hdt.1.32, Th.4.69;

    τὸ γὰρ βρότειον σπέρμ' ἐφ' ἡ. φρονεῖ A. Fr. 399

    ;

    τῆς ἐφ' ἡ. βορᾶς E.El. 429

    ; but τοὐφ' ἡμέραν day by day, Id.Cyc. 336: c. dat., ἐπ' ἡμέρῃ ἑκάστῃ (v.l. -ρης -της ) every day, Hdt.5.117;

    ὁ ἥλιος νέος ἐφ' ἡμέρῃ Heraclit.6

    ; καθ' ἡμέραν by day, A.Ch. 818 (lyr.); καθ' ἡ. τὴν νῦν to-day, S.OC3, Aj. 801; but καθ' ἡ. commonly means day by day, IG12.84.40, etc.; καθ' ἡ. ἀεί [S.]Fr.1120.4: with Art.,

    τὸν καθ' ἡ. βίον Id.OC 1364

    ;

    ἡ καθ' ἡ. ἀναγκαία τροφή Th.1.2

    ;

    τὰ καθ' ἡ. ἐπιτηδεύματα Id.2.37

    ;

    τὸ καθ' ἡ. ἀδεές Id.3.37

    , etc.; τὸ καθ' ἡ. every day, Ar.Eq. 1126 (lyr.), etc.; also

    τὰ καθ' ἑκάστην τὴν ἡ. ἐπιτηδεύματα Isoc.4.78

    ; μετ' ἡμέρην in broad daylight, opp. νυκτός, Hdt.2.150, cf. Ar.Pl. 930; opp. νύκτωρ, Aeschin.3.77; μεθ' ἡμέρας some days after, LXXJd.15.1; ἡμέρα παρ' ἡμέραν γιγνομένη day following on day, Antipho 5.72; but παρ' ἡμέραν every other day, Dsc.3.137, Luc.DDeor.24.2;

    παρ' ἡ. ἄρχειν Plu.Fab.15

    ;

    καθ' ἡμέραν εἰώθειν ὀργίζεσθαι, νῦν παρ' ἡμέραν, εἶτα παρὰ δύο, εἶτα παρὰ τρεῖς Arr.Epict.2.18.13

    ; πρὸ ἡμέρας before day-break, Diph.22; but πρὸ ἀμερᾶν δέκα ἤ κα μέλλωντι ἀναγινώσκεν GDI5040.42 ([place name] Crete);

    πρὸ ἡμερῶν ἑπτὰ εἰδυῶν Ὀκτωμβρίων SIG646.2

     (Thisbe, ii B.C.); γίγνεται, ἔστι πρὸς ἡμέραν, towards day, near day, X.HG2.4.6, Lys.1.14; also, for the day, daily, Charito 4.2.
    IV as pr. n., the goddess of day, Hes.Th. 124.
    2 v. ἥμερος 11.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἡμέρα

  • 2 Σάββατον

    Σάββᾰτ-ον, τό, the Hebrew Sabbath, i.e. Rest (
    A

    δηλοῖ δὲ ἀνάπαυσιν.. τὸ ὄνομα J.AJ1.1.1

    ), LXX Ex. 16.23, al., Ev.Marc.6.2,al.: freq. in pl. of the single day, PCair.Zen.762.6 (iii B.C.), LXX 4 Ki. 4.23;

    ὀψὲ σαββάτων Ev.Matt.28.1

    ; ἡ ἡμέρα τῶν ς. LXX Nu.15.32, Ev.Luc.4.16, al. (but ἡ ἡμ. τοῦ ς. ib.13.14): heterocl. dat. pl. σάββασι ([etym.] ν) LXX 1 Ma.2.38, J.BJ1.7.3, al., Ev.Marc.2.23, al., freq. with v.l. σαββάτοις; but σάββασι is certain in AP5.159 (Mel.).
    2 period of seven days, week, εἰς μίαν σαββάτων toward the first day of the week, Ev.Matt.28.1;

    κατὰ μίαν σαββάτου 1 Ep.Cor.16.2

    ;

    πρώτῃ σαββάτου Ev.Marc.16.9

    ; τῇ μιᾷ τῶν ς. ib.2, Ev.Jo.20.1; δὶς τοῦ ς. Ev.Luc.18.12.
    3 [full] Σαβάτ, the 11th month of the Hebr. year, nearly = February, LXX 1 Ma.16.14.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > Σάββατον

  • 3 ἕκαστος

    -η,-ον + R 80-74-94-24-84=356 Gn 10,5; 11,7; 13,11; 34,25; 37,19
    each Gn 10,5
    εἷς ἕκαστος each one 4 Mc 4,26; καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν every single day Ex 5,8 Cf. MURAOKA 1990b, 19-20

    Lust (λαγνεία) > ἕκαστος

  • 4 ἕκαστος

    ἕκαστος, η, ον,
    A each, opp. the whole body, Il.2.805, etc.: sg. with pl. Verb, ἔβαν οἶκόνδε ἕκαστος they went home each to his own house, 1.606 ;

    δεδμήμεσθα ἕκαστος 5.878

    , cf. Hdt.3.158 ; so in [dialect] Att., Ar.Pl. 785, Pl.Prt. 327e, etc. ;

    ὅτι ἕκαστος ἐπίστασθε ἀγαθόν X.Smp.3.3

     : sg. in apposition with pl. Noun or Pron., which expresses the whole,

    Τρῶας δὲ τρόμος αἰνὸς ὑπήλυθε γυῖα ἕκαστον Il.7.215

     ;

    ὔμμι..ἑκάστῳ 15.109

     ;

    αἱ δὲ γυναῖκες..θαύμαζον..ἑκάστη 18.496

    , etc. ;

    Περσίδες δ'.. ἑκάστα..λείπεται A.Pers. 135

     (lyr.) ; αἱ ἄλλαι πᾶσαι [ τέχναι]

    τὸ αὑτῆς ἑκάστη ἔργον ἐργάζεται Pl.R. 346d

    , cf. Grg. 503e ; ὅστις ἕκαστος every one which.. (nisi leg. ὥς τις), Hes.Th. 459.
    2 the Art. is sts. added to the Subst. (so regularly in earlier [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG12.22.14, al., exc. ἑκάστου μηνός ib.6.125) with which ἕκαστος agrees, in which case ἕκαστος is commonly put first, καθ' ἑ. τὴν ἡμέραν every single day, Isoc.12.211, etc. ;

    περὶ ἑ. τῆς τέχνης Pl.Phdr. 274e

     : also following the Subst.,

    κατὰ τὸν οξπλίτην ἕκαστον Th.5.49

     ;

    κατὰ τὴν ἡμέραν ἑκάστην Id.6.63

    , al.
    II in pl., all and each severally, Il.1.550, al., A. Supp. 932, etc. ; οἷστισιν ἑκάστοις to whichsoever severally, Pl.Lg. 799a.
    2 each of two or more groups or parties, Od.9.164, Hdt. 1.169, A.Pr. 491, Th.6.77, etc.
    III strengthd. by the addition of other Prons., εἷς ἕ. (v. εἷς) ;

    εἷς τις ἕ. S.Ant. 262

     ; ἕκαστός τις each one, Pi.N.4.92, Th.3.45, etc. ;

    ταῦτα ἕκαστα Hdt.5.13

    , etc. ;

    αὔθ' ἕκαστα

     all in exact detail,

    A.Pr. 950

    .
    2 with Preps., esp.

    κατά, καθ' ἕκαστον

     singly, by itself,

    Pl.Tht. 188a

    , al. ;

    καθ' ἕ. καὶ σύμπαντα Id.Sph. 259b

     ; τὸ καθ' ἕ., τὰ καθ' ἕκαστα, particulars, Arist.Ph. 189a6, EN 1143b4, al. ; παρ' ἕκαστον, παρ' ἕκαστα, in every case, Plb.4.82.5,3.57.4, etc. ;

    παρ' ἕκαστον καὶ ἔργον καὶ λόγον διδάσκοντες Pl.Prt. 325d

     ; παρ' ἕκαστον λέγων constantly interjecting, Men.Epit.48.
    3

    ὡς ἕκαστοι

     each by himself,

    Hdt.6.79

    , Th.1.15, etc.: in sg.,

    τῶν δὲ ὡς ἑκάστῳ θύειν θέλει Hdt.1.132

    , cf. Pi.P.9.98 ;

    οὐχ ὡς ἕ. ἀλλὰπάντες Arist.Pol. 1292a12

    , cf. 1283b34.
    IV later, = ἑκάτερος, D.H.3.2 codd. (

    ϝέκαστος Leg.Gort.1.9

    , al., Schwyzer 409.4 ([place name] Elis), IG9(1).334.9 ([place name] Locris). Apptly. connected with ἑκάς by Dam.Pr. 423.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἕκαστος

  • 5 εἷς

    εἷς, μία, ἕν, gen. ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός a numerical term, ‘one’ (Hom.+)
    ① a single pers. or thing, with focus on quantitative aspect, one
    ⓐ in contrast to more than one
    α. adj. μίλιον ἕν Mt 5:41; cp. 20:12; 25:15, 24; Ac 21:7; 28:13; 2 Pt 3:8. Opp. πάντες Ro 5:12 (εἷς ἄνθρωπος as Hippocr., Ep. 11, 2 [IX p. 326]; SHanson, Unity of the Church in the NT, ’46, 65–73 [lit.]). Opp. the nation J 11:50; 18:14 (cp. Oenom. in Eus., PE 5, 25, 5 μεῖον εἶναι ἕνα ἀντι πάντων πεσεῖν τὸν βασιλέα=it is a lesser evil when one, instead of all the citizens, falls, namely, the king).
    β. noun, Lk 23:16 (17) v.l. w. partitive gen. (Diod S 1, 91, 5 αὐτῶν εἷς; Jos., Vi. 204; Just., A I, 1, 1 al.) Mt 5:19; 6:29; 18:6; Mk 9:42; Lk 12:27; 15:21 v.l.; 17:2, 22; 23:39; J 19:34 or w. ἐκ (Maximus Tyr. 1, 6 ab ἐκ πολλῶν εἷς; Lucian, Somn. 9; Jos., Bell. 7, 47) Mt 18:12; 22:35; 26:21; Mk 14:18; J 1:40; 6:8; Ac 11:28 al. ὁ εἷς τῶν δώδεκα one of the twelve Mk 14:10 is a peculiar expr. (cp. BGU 1145, 25 [18 B.C.] ὁ εἷς αὐτῶν Ταυρῖνος; UPZ 161, 50; 54; PTebt 138; 357, 10).
    ⓑ in contrast to the parts, of which a whole is made up (Theophr. in Apollon. Paradox. 16 τὰ πολλὰ ἓν γίγνεσθαι; Stephan. Byz. s.v. Ὠκεανός: γίγνεται ἐκ δύο εἰς ἕν; Just., D. 103, 5 ἐξ ἀμφοτέρων … ἓν ὄνομα). ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν Mt 19:5; Mk 10:8; 1 Cor 6:16 (all three Gen 2:24). οἱ πολλοὶ ἓν σῶμά ἐσμεν we, though many, form one body Ro 12:5; cp. 1 Cor 12:12, 20; Eph 2:15. πάντες εἷς ἐστε you are all one Gal 3:28. ἕν εἰσιν 1 Cor 3:8; cp. J 10:30; 17:11, 21–23 (cp. 1QS 5, 2; Just., D. 42, 3 ἓν ὄντες πρᾶγμα). Also εἰς τὸ ἕν 1J 5:8 (Appian, Iber. 66 §280 ἐς ἕν=together, as a unity). εἰς ἕν J 11:52 (cp. 1QS 5, 7). ὁ ποιήσας τὰ ἀμφότερα ἕν who has united the two divisions Eph 2:14.—MAppold, The Oneness Motif (John) ’76.
    ⓒ w. negative foll. εἷς … οὐ (μή), stronger than οὐδείς (Aristoph., Eccl. 153, Thesm. 549; X., An. 5, 6, 12; Demosth. 30, 33 ἡ γυνὴ μίαν ἡμέραν οὐκ ἐχήρευσεν; Dionys. Hal., Comp. Verb. 18) ἓν ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐ πεσεῖται not one of them will fall Mt 10:29 (Lucian, Herm. 28 ἓν ἐξ ἁπάντων); cp. 5:18; Mk 8:14; Lk 11:46; 12:6. The neg. rarely comes first Mt 5:36.
    ② a single entity, with focus on uniformity or quality, one
    ⓐ one and the same (Pind., N. 6, 1 ἓν ἀνδρῶν, ἓν θεῶν γένος• ἐκ μιᾶς δὲ πνέομεν ἀμφότεροι; Dio Chrys. 19 [36], 6; Maximus Tyr. 19, 4a; cp. OGI 383, 59 [I B.C., the ruler’s statue is to be made of the type of stone used for statues of the gods]; Gen 11:1; 40:5; Lev 22:28; Wsd 7:6; Ar. 13, 5 μία φύσις τῶν θεῶν) ἐν ἑνὶ οἴκῳ in one and the same house Lk 12:52 (Diod S 14, 43, 1 ἐν ἑνὶ τόπω). Expressing unanimity ἐν ἑνὶ στόματι w. one voice Ro 15:6; τοῦ ἑνὸς ἄρτου one and the same loaf 1 Cor 10:17; εἷς ὁ θεός one and the same God (Amphitheos of Heracleia: 431 Fgm. 1b Jac. Διόνυσος κ. Σαβάζιος εἷς ἐστι θεός; difft. Ath. 10, 2 ἑνὸς ὄντος τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ τοῦ υἱοῦ) Ro 3:30; cp. 9:10; 1 Cor 6:16f; 12:9, 13. εἷς κύριος, μία πίστις, ἓν βάπτισμα• εἷς θεός κτλ. (cp. the three genders of εἷς consecutively in Simonides 97 Diehl2 ἓν πέλαγος, μία ναῦς, εἷς τάφος [of shipwrecked pers.]; Just., D. 63, 5 μιᾷ ψυχῇ … συναγωγῇ … ἐκκλησίᾳ) Eph 4:5f (NJklA 35, 1915, 224ff. The repetition of εἷς is like Herm. Wr. 11, 11; Epict. 3, 24, 10ff).—Rv 9:13; 18:8; Ac 17:26. ἐν ἑνὶ πνεύματι, μιᾷ ψυχῇ Phil 1:27; cp. Ac 4:32 (cp. Aristot., EN 9, 8, 2; Plut., Mor. 478c). τὸ ἓν φρονεῖν be of one mind Phil 2:2. συνάγειν εἰς ἕν unite, bring together (Pla., Phileb. 23e; Dionys. Hal. 2, 45, 3 συνάξειν εἰς ἓν τὰ ἔθνη; POxy 1411, 3 τῶν δημοσίων εἰς ἓν συναχθέντων; TestJob 28:5 τὰ χρήματα ἐὰν συναχθῇ εἰς ἓν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό ‘if all [our] valuables were brought together at one place’; Jos., Bell. 3, 518) J 11:52. τὸ ἓν καὶ τὸ αὐτό one and the same 1 Cor 12:11 (cp. Diod S 11, 47, 3; 17, 104, 6; Epict. 1, 11, 28; 1, 19, 15; Just., D. 123, 1 ἑνὸς καὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ … νόμου); cp. ἓν καὶ αὐτό τινι 11:5.—εἰς ἕνα τόπον in a place by itself (Jos., Ant. 6, 125) J 20:7.
    ⓑ (a) single, only one (Diod S 16, 11, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 44 §180 εἷς ἀνήρ; Maximus Tyr. 11, 6c μαντεῖον ἕν al.; Just., D. 141, 3 τῆν μίαν τοῦ Δαυεὶδ … παράπτωσιν) λόγον ἕνα Mt 21:24 (GrBar 5:1); Gal 5:14. ἕνα ἄρτον Mk 8:14. εἷς ἄρτος 1 Cor 10:17a (εἷς ἄ. is also the symbol of the unity of the Pythagorean fellowship: Diog. L. 8, 35; here Diog. L. adds that οἱ βάρβαροι hold the same view ἔτι καὶ νῦν). πῆχυν ἕνα Mt 6:27 (s. πῆχυς); ἓν μέλος 1 Cor 12:26; ἓν ἔργον J 7:21 (here, following ἕν, καί adds an indication of the greatness of the accomplishment, as Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 133 §555 ἓν ἐκ τῶν Καίσαρος ἔργων προὔθηκα …, καί). εἷς ἐστιν ὁ ἀγαθός Mt 19:17; ποιῆσαι ἕνα προσήλυτον 23:15; ἕνα εἶχεν υἱὸν ἀγαπητόν he had an only son, whom he loved dearly Mk 12:6 (εἷς υἱ. as Phalaris, Ep. 18). ὁ δὲ θεὸς εἷς ἐστιν Gal 3:20; cp. Mk 12:32; 1 Cor 8:4, 6 (v.l. adds to God the Father and Jesus Christ ἓν πνεῦμα ἅγιον κτλ. Cp. also Maximus Tyr. 11, 5a θεὸς εἷς … κ. πατήρ, κ. θεοὶ πολλοί and as early as Xenophanes, Fgm. 19 Diehl3 εἷς θεὸς ἔν τε θεοῖσι κ. ἀνθρωποῖσι μέγιστος [= Fgm. 23 Diels]); Js 2:19; PtK 3 p. 15, 20 (Herm. Wr. 11, 11; 14 εἷς ὁ θεός; POxy 1382, 20 εἷς Ζεὺς Σάραπις; Sb 159, 1 εἷς θεὸς ὁ βοηθῶν ὑμῶν; Philo, Spec. Leg. 1, 67; Jos., Ant. 5, 97 θεός τε εἷς; 8, 343, C. Ap. 2, 193; SibOr 4, 30 and Fgm. 1, 7; Ath. 6, 1 μονάς ἐστιν ὁ θεός, τοῦτʼ ἔστιν εἷς; 6, 4 ὁ θεὸς εἷς; s. EPeterson, Εἷς Θεός 1926; D. Monotheismus als polit. Problem ’35; additional reff. Horst, Ps.-Phoc. p. 151f). εἷς ἐστιν ὑμῶν ὁ διδάσκαλος Mt 23:8; cp. vs. 9. μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἀνήρ a husband married only once (numerous sepulchral ins celebrate the virtue of a surviving spouse by noting that he or she was married only once, thereby suggesting the virtue of extraordinary fidelity, e.g. CIL VI, 3604; 723; 12405; 14404; cp. Horace, Odes 3, 14, 4; Propertius 4, 11, 36; Valerius Maximus 4, 3, 3; and s. esp. CIL VI, 1527, 31670, 37053=ILS 8393 [text and Eng. tr.: EWistrand, The So-Called Laudatio Thuriae, ’76]; s. GWilliams, JRS 48, ’58 16–29. For the use of μία in ref. to a woman: Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 346 D.: ὑπὲρ μιᾶς γυναικός=for only one woman; μία γυνή quite freq.: Diod S 17, 72, 6; cp. 1, 80, 3, where the phrase γαμοῦσι μίαν simply means that the priests married only once, not that they lead a strictly moral life, a concept for which Greeks never use the expression μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἀνήρ or anything like it; Hippostratus [III B.C.]: 568 Fgm. 1 Jac.; Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 95 §402; Ath. 33, 2 ἐφʼ ἑνὶ γάμῳ: Ath. terms a second marriage εὐπρεπής μοιχεία veiled adultery) 1 Ti 3:2, 12; Tit 1:6; others render husband of one wife (e.g. RSV in later printings; REB). Correspondingly ἑνὸς ἀνδρὸς γυνή (cp. the exemplary conduct of Hannah [Anna] Lk 2:36; Paus. 7, 25, 13 the priestess of the earth goddess must be a woman who, before she became a priestess, was not πλέον ἢ ἑνὸς ἀνδρὸς ἐς πεῖραν ἀφιγμένη) 1 Ti 5:9.—Abs. 1 Cor 9:24; 2 Cor 5:14. μεσίτης ἑνός an intermediary for one alone Gal 3:20; cp. Js 4:12. οὐδὲ εἷς not even a single (X., Mem. 1, 6, 2, Cyr. 1, 3, 10 et al.; Sir 42:20; 49:14 v.l.; 1 Macc 11:70) Mt 27:14; Ac 4:32. Freq. at the end of a sentence or clause (ref. fr. comedy in ESchwartz, NGG 1908, p. 534, 3. Also Hermocles [IV–III B.C.] p. 174, 17 Coll. Alex.; Dio Chrys. 21 [38], 23; Ael. Aristid. 28, 156 K.=49 p. 542 D.; 53 p. 617 D.; Epict. 2, 18, 26, Enchir. 1, 3; Philonides in Stob. 3, 35, 6 ed. Hense III p. 688; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 59, 5 [39 A.D.]; Bel 18 Theod.; 1 Macc 7:46) Ro 3:10; οὐδὲ ἕν foll. by ἐὰν μή J 3:27. This is a good reason for placing the period after οὐδὲ ἕν J 1:3 (s. GBergh van Eysinga, PM 13, 1909, 143–50. EHennecke, Congr. d’ Hist. du Christ. I 1928, 207–19; Md’Asbeck, ibid. 220–28; REisler, Revue de Philol. 3 sér. 4, 1930, 350–71; BVawter, CBQ 25, ’63, 401–6; KAland, ZNW 59, ’68, 174–209; Metzger 195f; γίνομαι 2a), but the lack of inner punctuation in the older mss. validates consideration of alternative punctuation. οὐκ ἔστιν ἕως ἑνός there is not even one Ro 3:12 (Ps 13:3; Just., D. 103, 2 οὐδὲ μέχρις ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου ‘not a single person’). μία εἴσοδος the only entrance Hs 9, 12, 6.—ἕν only one thing: ἔτι ἕν σοι λείπει you still lack only one thing (Jos., Bell. 4, 257) Lk 18:22. ἕν σε ὑστερεῖ you lack only one thing Mk 10:21; cp. Lk 10:42. ἓν οἶδα at least this one thing I know J 9:25. ἓν δὲ τοῦτο this one thing (Porphyr., Vi. Plot. 19; Just., D. 115, 6 ἓν δὲ μικρὸν ὁτιοῦν) 2 Pt 3:8.—ἓν δέ is a short interjectional sentence (like Xenophon Eph. 1, 5, 3 τοσοῦτο δέ•) just one thing! Phil 3:13 (AFridrichsen, ConNeot 9, ’44, 31f).—Gal 5:14 commercial imagery εἷς λόγος (just) one entry, one heading (cp. BGU 831, 13).
    ⓒ alone (οὐδεὶς) … εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ θεός Mk 2:7 (in the parallel Lk 5:21 μόνος ὁ θεός, cp. Herm Wr. 11, 11 εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ θεός … εἰ μὴ μόνῳ τῷ θεῷ); 10:18; 12:29 (Dt 6:4); Mt 23:10; Lk 18:19.—EBishop, ET 49, ’38, 363–66.
    ③ an unspecified entity, some/one=τὶς, whereby εἷς can mean exactly the same thing as the indef. art. (Aristoph. et al. [Av. 1292 εἷς κάπηλος]; Περὶ ὕψους 33, 4 p. 62, 18 V. [the rdg. of cod. Paris], εἷς ἕτερος w. μή ‘for no other reason’; Strabo 5, 3, 2, 230c ἐπηγγείλατο ἕνα ἀγῶνα ἱππικόν; Syntipas p. 29, 3 μία γαλῆ; Appian, Liby. 117 §554 νυκτὸς μιᾶς=one night; Marc. Diac. 27, 5 ἐν μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ=on a certain day; SIG 1170, 15 [160 A.D.] μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ; UPZ 162 I, 27 [117 B.C.]; PAmh 30, 28 [II B.C.] Κονδύλου ἑνὸς τῶν ἁλιείων; BGU 1044, 6; Gen 21:15; Jdth 14:6; 1 Esdr 3:5. B-D-F §247, 2; Mlt. 96f; Rob. 674f; Mlt-Turner 195f; EBruhn, RhM 49, 1894, 168–71; JWackernagel, Syntax II2 1928, 151; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 104–6).
    ⓐ someone, anyone Mt 18:24; 19:16; Mk 10:17; εἷς ὀνόματι Κλεοπᾶς Lk 24:18. Oft. w. partitive gen. foll. (Alexis 220, 5; Diod S 20, 107, 5 εἷς τῶν φίλων; Epict. 4, 2, 9; Dio Chrys. 71 [21], 15 εἷς τῶν Σπαρτῶν; TestJob 26:6 μίαν τῶν … γυναικῶν; Jos., Ant. 9, 106) ἕνα τῶν προφητῶν (some) one of the prophets Mt 16:14 (a diminishing term? s. Reader, Polemo p. 257). ἕνα τ. συνδούλων 18:28. ἐν μιᾷ τ. πόλεων Lk 5:12. ἐν μιᾷ τ. ἡμερῶν on one of the days vs. 17; cp. 15:19, 26; 22:47.
    ⓑ as indef. art. (s. at 3 above beg.) εἷς γραμματεύς a scribe Mt 8:19. συκῆν μίαν a fig tree Mt 21:19; cp. 26:69; Mk 12:42. παιδάριον ἕν J 6:9 v.l.; ἑνὸς ἀετοῦ Rv 8:13; cp. 18:21; 19:17; ἄρχων εἷς ἐλθών Mt 9:18. εἷς στέφανος ApcPt 3:10; ἓν σῶμα AcPlCor 2:26.
    ⓒ used w. τὶς (Pla., Thu., et al.; Jdth 2:13) εἷς τις νεανίσκος a certain young man Mk 14:51 v.l. W. partitive gen. foll. (Trypho Alex. [I B.C.] in Athen. 3, 78a ἕνα τινὰ τ. Τιτάνων; Aesop, Fab. 300 H./30 P. and H-H.; Hierocles 27, 484; IG XII/5, 445, 12 [III B.C.] ἕνα τινὰ αὐτῶν; Ael. Aristid. 29, 14 K.=40 p. 755D.: εἷς τις τ. χορευτῶν) εἷς τις τῶν παρεστηκότων a certain one of the bystanders vs. 47 (on the v.l. without τις s. PDickerson, JBL 116, ’97, 302); also εἷς τις ἐξ αὐτῶν (Jos., Vi. 290) Lk 22:50; J 11:49.
    ④ marker of someth. that is first, the first
    ⓐ perh. Hebraistic (cp. Num 1:1 ἐν μιᾷ τοῦ μηνὸς τ. δευτέρου; 2 Esdr 10:17; Esth 1:1a; Jos., Ant. 1, 29.—But s. also Lydus, Mens. 3, 4 W. τὴν κεφαλὴν τ. χρόνου οἱ Πυθαγόρειοι οὐχὶ πρώτην ἀλλὰ μίαν ὠνόμασαν; Callim., Fgm. 550 P. [482 Schneider] πρὸ μιῆς ὥρης=before the first hour of the day) is its use w. expressions denoting time instead of the ordinal number εἰς μίαν σαββάτων on the first day of the week Mt 28:1; cp. Lk 24:1; Mk 16:2; J 20:1, 19; Ac 20:7; also κατὰ μίαν σαββάτου 1 Cor 16:2 (cp. Just., D. 41, 4 τῇ μίᾳ τῶν σαββάτων ἡμέρᾳ; 27, 5 [here w. πρό and μετά resp., in accordance with Latin usage]).
    ⓑ not Semitic (Hdt. 4, 161 μία, ἄλλη, τρίτη; Ael. Aristid. 36, 40 K.=48 p. 453 D.: ἕν, δεύτερον, τρίτον, τέταρτον; JosAs 2:17) εἷς καὶ δεύτερος a first and second Tit 3:10 (cp. Alciphron, Ep. 1, 9, 2; Galen XII 746 K.: ὕδωρ ὄμβριον ἔγχριε μέχρι μιᾶς καὶ δευτέρας ἡμέρας; Maximus Tyr. 28, 2h μίαδευτέρα; EpArist 143; Jos., Ant. 11, 150; 16, 350 πεσόντος ἑνός καὶ δευτέρου). S. also ἡ οὐαὶ ἡ μία Rv 9:12.—ἓν τριάκοντα Mk 4:8, 20 is prob. to be considered an Aramaism thirtyfold (B-D-F §248, 3; EKautzsch, Gramm. d. bibl. Aram. 1884 §66, 2; JHudson, ET 53, ’41/42, 266f).
    ⑤ special combinations:
    ⓐ εἷς … εἷς (Hom. et al. εἷς μὲν … εἷς δέ: X., Cyr. 1, 2, 4; Aristot., Rhet. 2, 20, 1393a; pap in Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 50, 11 and 13 [III B.C.] ἓν μὲν … ἓν δέ; II/2, 372 V, 14 [II A.D.] ὁ εἷς … ὁ εἷς; POxy 1153, 14 [I A.D.] ἓν μὲν … καὶ ἕν; 2 Km 12:1; Sir 34:23f εἷς … καὶ εἷς; Esth 10:3g δύο, ἕνα τῷ λαῷ … καὶ ἕνα τ. ἔθνεσιν; TestJob 51:3 μιᾶς ὑποσειμιούσης τῇ μιᾷ) (the) one … the other Mt 20:21; 24:40f; 27:38; J 20:12; Gal 4:22; B 7:6f. εἷς τὸν ἕνα one another (=ἀλλήλους) 1 Th 5:11 (cp. Theocr. 22, 65 εἷς ἑνί; TestJob 27:3 εἷς τόν ἕνα κατέρραξαν ‘threw each other to the ground’).
    ⓑ εἷς … εἷς … εἷς one … another … a third Mt 17:4 (cp. 1 Km 10:3; 13:17, 18).
    ⓒ εἷς ἕκαστος every single, strengthening ἕκαστος, adj. Eph 4:16. Mostly subst.; s. ἕκαστος b.
    ⓓ ὁ εἷς … ὁ ἕτερος the one … the other (Aristot., De Rep. Ath. 37, 1; Hyperid. 5, 14f; UPZ 161, 39; 43; 46 [119 B.C.]; PGen 48, 6ff μίαν μὲν … τὴν δὲ ἑτέραν; BGU 194, 15f; Esth 5:1a; TestAbr A 11 p. 88, 29 [Stone p. 24]; Just. D. 49, 2 al.) Mt 6:24; Lk 7:41; 16:13; 17:34f; 18:10 al.; also ὁ εἷς … ὁ ἄλλος Rv 17:10.
    ⓔ distrib. (1 Ch 24:6 εἷς εἷς; AscIs 3:27 εἷς καὶ εἷς καὶ εἷς ἐν τόποις καὶ τόποις) καθʼ ἕνα, καθʼ ἕν (Hdt., Pla. et al.; 1 Esdr 1:31; 4 Macc 15:12, 14; Jos., Bell. 4, 240, Ant. 12, 191; Ath. 25, 3 καθʼ ἕνα καὶ κατὰ ἔθνη) ITr 12:2; καθʼ ἕνα πάντες all, one by one 1 Cor 14:31 (cp. Ps.-Xenophon, Cyn. 6, 14). ὑμεῖς οἱ καθʼ ἕνα ἕκαστος each one of you Eph 5:33. καθʼ ἕν one after the other (hence τὸ καθʼ ἕν ‘a detailed list’: PLille 11, 8 [III B.C.]; PTebt 47, 34; 332, 16) J 21:25. Also καθʼ ἓν ἕκαστον (X., Cyr. 1, 6, 22, Ages. 7, 1; EpArist 143) Ac 21:19. ἓν καθʼ ἕν (Aesop, Fab. 274 P.; PLeid II, X 1, 22) each one Rv 4:8. In this pass. the second ἕν could be an undeclined nom. as in εἷς κατὰ εἷς (cp. Lucian, Sol. 9; 3 Macc 5:34. Other exx. in W-S. §26, 9; 11 and Wetstein I 627) one after the other Mk 14:19; J 8:9. τὸ καθʼ εἷς opp. οἱ πολλοί individually Ro 12:5; but κατὰ ἕνα = ἕκαστον Hs 9, 3, 5; 9, 6, 3 (B-D-F §305). ἀνὰ εἷς ἕκαστος each one Rv 21:21.
    ⓕ ἀπὸ μιᾶς s. ἀπό 6 (as idiom w. noun to be supplied Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 46, 15 [338 A.D.] μίαν ἐκ μιᾶς, i.e. ἡμέραν=day after day).—B. 937; 1007f. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εἷς

  • 6 ὥρα

    ὥρα, ας, ἡ (Hom. [ὥρη]+; ins, pap, LXX; PsSol 18:10; TestSol, TestAbr, TestJob, Test12Patr, JosAs, ParJer, GrBar; ApcEsdr 3:4 p. 27, 9 Tdf.; ApcSed, ApcMos, EpArist, Philo, Joseph.; Ar. 15:10; Just.; Tat. 20, 2).
    ① an undefined period of time in a day, time of day ὀψὲ ἤδη οὔσης τῆς ὥρας since it was already late in the day or since the hour was (already) late Mk 11:11 v.l.; cp. MPol 7:1b (s. ὀψέ 1 and 2; Demosth. 21, 84; Polyb. 3, 83, 7 ὀψὲ τῆς ὥρας). ὀψίας οὔσης τῆς ὥρας Mk 11:11 (ὄψιος 1). ὥρα πολλή late hour (Polyb. 5, 8, 3; Dionys. Hal. 2, 54; TestAbr A 14 p. 94, 24 [Stone p. 36]; Jos., Ant. 8, 118) 6:35ab. ἡ ὥρα ἤδη παρῆλθεν Mt 14:15 (παρέρχομαι 2).—Mt 24:42 v.l., 44; Lk 12:39, 40; Rv 3:3; D 16:1. W. ἡμέρα day and time of day, hour (ApcEsdr 3:4 p. 27, 9 Tdf.) Mt 24:36, 50; 25:13; Mk 13:32; Lk 12:46.
    ② a period of time as division of a day, hour
    ⓐ beside year, month, and day Rv 9:15; the twelfth part of a day (=period of daylight) οὐχὶ δώδεκα ὧραί εἰσιν τῆς ἡμέρας; J 11:9 (TestAbr B 7 p. 111, 24 [Stone p. 70]). μίαν ὥραν ἐποίησαν Mt 20:12 (s. ποιέω 6); cp. Lk 22:59; Ac 5:7; 19:34 (ἐπὶ ὥρας δύο CBurchard, ZNW 61, ’70, 167f; TestBenj 3:7, Judah 3, 4); MPol 7:3. συνεψήφισα τὰς ὥρας I counted the hours Hv 3, 1, 4. One ὥρα in this world corresponds to a ὥρα thirty days in length in the place of punishment Hs 6, 4, 4. μίαν ὥραν (not even) one hour Mt 26:40; Mk 14:37. Such passages help us to understand how ὥρα can acquire the sense
    ⓑ a short period of time μιᾷ ὥρᾳ (cp. TestJob 7:12; ApcMos 25 [both ἐν]) in a single hour=in an extraordinarily short time Rv 18:10, 17, 19. μίαν ὥραν for a very short time 17:12. Likew. πρὸς ὥραν for a while, for a moment J 5:35; 2 Cor 7:8; Gal 2:5 (s. on this pass. KLake, Gal 2:3–5: Exp. 7th ser., 1, 1906, 236–45; CWatkins, Der Kampf des Pls um Galatien 1913; BBacon, JBL 42, 1923, 69–80); Phlm 15; MPol 11:2. πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας 1 Th 2:17.
    ⓒ as a temporal indicator, reckoned from the beginning of the day (6 hours or 6 A.M., our time) or the night (18 hours or 6 P.M.) (Plut. et al.; Appian, Mithrid. 19 §72 ἑβδόμης ὥρας=at the 7th hour or 1 P.M.; SIG 671A, 9 [162/160 B.C.] ὥρας δευτέρας; 736, 109 [92 B.C.] ἀπὸ τετάρτας ὥρας ἕως ἑβδόμας; Jos., Vi. 279 ἕκτη ὥ.; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 1 II, 21 [246 B.C.] περὶ ὀγδόην ὥραν; PTebt 15, 2 [II B.C.]; Sb 5252, 20 [I A.D.] ἀφʼ ὥρας ὀγδόης; EpArist 303 μέχρι μὲν ὥρας ἐνάτης) ἕως ὥρας δευτέρας until the second hour (=8 A.M.) Hs 9, 11, 7. ὥρα τρίτη nine o’clock (A.M.) Mk 15:25 (Goodsp., Probs. 68f); Ac 2:15 (τῆς ἡμέρας); περὶ τρίτην ὥραν about nine o’clock (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 45 §182 περὶ τρίτην ὥραν ἡμέρας) Mt 20:3; ἀπὸ τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νύκτος by nine o’clock at night (= 21 hours, or simply tonight) Ac 23:23 (TestAbr A 5 p. 82, 11 [Stone p. 12] περὶ ὥραν τρίτην τῆς νυκτός; cp. ibid. B 6 p. 109, 27 [St. p. 66]; Jos., Bell. 6, 68; 79 ἀπὸ ἐνάτης ὥ. τῆς νυκτὸς εἰς ἑβδόμην τῆς ἡμέρας). ἀπὸ ὥρας ε´ (=πέμπτης) ἕως δεκάτης from eleven o’clock in the morning until four in the afternoon (= 16 hours) Ac 19:9 v.l. περὶ ὥραν πέμπτην (PTebt 15, 2 [114 B.C.]; POxy 1114, 24 περὶ ὥ. τρίτην) at eleven o’clock (A.M.) Hv 3, 1, 2. ὥρα ἕκτη twelve o’clock noon Mt 20:5; 27:45a; Mk 15:33a; Lk 23:44a; J 4:6 (ὥρα ὡς ἕκτη about noon; TestJos 8:1 ὥρα ὡσεὶ ἕκτη; ParJer 1:11 ἕκτην ὥραν τῆς νυκτός); 19:14 (ὥρα ὡς ἕκτη); Ac 10:9. ἐχθὲς ὥραν ἑβδόμην yesterday at one o’clock in the afternoon (= 13 hours) J 4:52b (on the use of the acc. to express a point of time s. Hdb. ad loc.; Soph., Lex. I 44; B-D-F §161, 3; Rob. 470). ὥρᾳ ὀγδόῃ at two o’clock in the afternoon (= 14 hours) MPol 21. ὥρα ἐνάτη three in the afternoon (= 15 hours) Mt 20:5; 27:45f; Mk 15:33b, 34; Lk 23:44b; Ac 3:1 (ἐπὶ τὴν ὥραν τῆς προσευχῆς τὴν ἐνάτην); 10:3 (ὡσεὶ περὶ ὥ. ἐνάτην τῆς ἡμέρας); ὥρας θ´ AcPl Ha 11, 3; περὶ ὥραν ἐνάτην GJs 2:4; GPt 6:22 (TestAbr B 12 p. 117, 2 [Stone p. 82] κατὰ τὴν ἐνάτην ὥραν). ὥρα ὡς δεκάτη about four in the afternoon (= 16 hours) J 1:39. ἑνδεκάτη ὥρα five o’clock in the afternoon (= 17 hours) Mt 20:(6, without ὥρα), 9. ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας μέχρι ταύτης τῆς ὥρας ἤμην τὴν ἐνάτην προσευχόμενος four days ago, reckoned from (=at) this very hour, I was praying at three o’clock in the afternoon (= 15 hours) Ac 10:30 (echoing vs. 3, but inelegantly phrased; s. comm. on the textual problems). ἐπύθετο τὴν ὥραν ἐν ᾗ … he inquired at what time … J 4:52a; cp. vs. 53 (cp. Ael. Arist. 50, 56 K.=26 p. 519 D.: … τὴν ὥραν αἰσθάνομαι … ἐκείνην, ἐν ᾗ … ; 47, 56 K.=23 p. 459 D.: ἀφυπνιζόμην κ. εὗρον ἐκείνην τὴν ὥραν οὖσαν, ᾗπερ …). ᾗ ἡμέρᾳ καὶ ὥρᾳ ἐμαρτύρησεν ὁ Πολύκαρπος the very day and hour that … EpilMosq 4.—Less definite are the indications of time in such expressions as ἄχρι τῆς ἄρτι ὥρας up to the present moment 1 Cor 4:11. πᾶσαν ὥραν hour after hour, every hour, constantly (Ex 18:22; Lev 16:2; JosAs 15:7; Ar. [Milne 76, 34]; cp. TestJob 10:1 πάσας ὥρας) 15:30. Also καθʼ ὥραν (Strabo 15, 1, 55; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 3, 69) 2 Cl 12:1. αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ at that very time, at once, instantly (oft. pap, e.g. POxy 235, 7 [I A.D.]; Da 3:6, 15; TestAbr B 12 p. 116, 27 [Stone p. 80]; GrBar 14:1; 15:1; ApcMos 20) Lk 2:38; 24:33; Ac 16:18; 22:13.
    ③ a point of time as an occasion for an event, time (BGU 1816, 12 [I B.C.] πρὸ ὥρας=before the right time) ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ Mt 8:13; 10:19; 18:1 (v.l. ἡμέρᾳ); 26:55; Mk 13:11; Lk 7:21; Ac 16:33; Rv 11:13; MPol 7:2a; GJs 20:2 (only pap). Likew. ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ Lk 10:21; 12:12; 13:31; 20:19 (on both expressions s. JJeremias, ZNW 42, ’49, 214–17). ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης from that time on, at once Mt 9:22; 15:28; 17:18; J 19:27. ὥρα ἐν ᾗ J 5:28. ὥρα ὅτε 4:21, 23; 5:25; 16:25 (cp. ApcMos 17 περὶ ὥραν ὅταν). ὥρα ἵνα 16:2, 32. W. gen. of thing, the time for which has come (Diod S 13, 94, 1; Ael. Aristid. 51, 1 K.=27 p. 534 D.; PGM 1, 221 ἀνάγκης; JosAs 3:3 μεσημβρίας … καὶ ἀρίστου; ApcMos 42 [of Eve’s request] ἐν τῇ ὥρᾳ τῆς τελευτῆς αὐτῆς; Jos., Ant. 7, 326 ὥ. ἀρίστου; SibOr 4, 56) ἡ ὥρα τοῦ θυμιάματος Lk 1:10; τοῦ δείπνου 14:17, cp. MPol 7:1a; τοῦ πειρασμοῦ Rv 3:10; τῆς κρίσεως 14:7; τῆς δοξολογίας αὐτοῦ GJs 13:1; τοῦ ἀσπασμοῦ 24:1; ἡ ὥρα αὐτῶν the time for them J 16:4; w. the gen. (of the Passover) to be supplied Lk 22:14. Also w. inf. (Hom. et al.; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 20, 1; Aelian, VH 1, 21) ἡ ὥρα θερίσαι the time to reap Rv 14:15 (cp. Theopomp. [IV B.C.]: 115 Fgm. 31 Jac. θερινὴ ὥ.; Paus. 2, 35, 4 ὥ. θέρους). Also acc. w. inf. (Gen 29:7) ὥρα (ἐστιν) ὑμᾶς ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι Ro 13:11.—W. gen. of pers. the time of or for someone to do or to suffer someth. (cp. Philo, Leg. ad Gai. 168 σὸς νῦν ὁ καιρός ἐστιν, ἐπέγειρε σαυτόν) of a woman who is to give birth (cp. GrBar 3:5 ἐν τῇ ὥρᾳ τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν) ἡ ὥρα αὐτῆς J 16:21 (v.l. ἡμέρα, s. ἡμέρα 3, beg.).—Lk 22:53. Esp. of Jesus, of whose ὥρα J speaks, as the time of his death (Diod S 15, 87, 6: the dying Epaminondas says ὥρα ἐστὶ τελευτᾶν. Cp. MPol 8:1 τοῦ ἐξιέναι) and of the glorification which is inextricably bound up w. it ἡ ὥρα αὐτοῦ J 7:30; 8:20; 13:1 (foll. by ἵνα); cp. ἡ ὥρα μου 2:4 (s. Hdb. ad loc.). ἡ ὥρα ἵνα δοξασθῇ 12:23. ἡ ὥρα αὕτη 12:27ab. Also abs. ἐλήλυθεν ἡ ὥρα 17:1 (AGeorge, ‘L’heure’ de J 17, RB 61, ’54, 392–97); cp. Mt 26:45; Mk 14:35, 41.—ἐσχάτη ὥρα the last hour in the present age of the world’s existence 1J 2:18ab.—CCowling, Mark’s Use of ὥρα, Australian Biblical Review 5, ’56, 153–60. EBickermann, Chronology of the Ancient World 2 ’80, 13–16.—B. 954 and esp. 1001. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὥρα

  • 7 κατά

    κατά (Hom.+) prep. (s. the lit. s.v. ἀνά beg., also LfgrE s.v. κατά 1346; with the gen. 74 times in NT; w. acc. 391 times in NT).
    A. w. the gen.
    ⓐ of location that is relatively lower, down from someth. (Hom. et al.; LXX; Ath. 1, 4 κ. κόρρης προπηλακίζειν=to smack on one side of the head) ὁρμᾶν κ. τοῦ κρημνοῦ rush down (from) the bank (cp. Polyb. 38, 16, 7 κ. τῶν κρημνῶν ῥίπτειν; Jos., Bell. 1, 313) Mt 8:32; Mk 5:13; Lk 8:33. κ. κεφαλῆς ἔχειν have someth. on one’s head (lit. hanging down fr. the head, as a veil. Cp. Plut., Mor. 200f ἐβάδιζε κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς ἔχων τὸ ἱμάτιον.; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 499, 5 of a mummy ἔχων τάβλαν κ. τοῦ τραχήλου) 1 Cor 11:4.
    ⓑ of position relatively deep, into someth. (Od. 9, 330 κ. σπείους ‘into the depths of the cave’; Hdt. 7, 235; X., An. 7, 1, 30) ἡ κ. βάθους πτωχεία extreme (lit. ‘reaching down into the depths’; cp. Strabo 9, 3, 5 [419] ἄντρον κοῖλον κ. βάθους) or abysmal poverty 2 Cor 8:2. This may perh. be the mng. of πλήσσειν τινὰ κ. τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν strike someone deep into the eyes ApcPt 11:26 (cp. Demosth. 19, 197 ξαίνει κ. τοῦ νώτου; PPetr II, 18 [2b], 15 [246 B.C.] ἔτυπτεν αὐτὸν κ. τοῦ τραχήλου).—κ. γαστρός Just., D. 78, 3 for ἐν γαστρί Mt 1:18 (cp. Ath. 35, 2 τὸ κ. γαστρὸς ζῶον εἶναι).
    ⓒ extension in various directions within an area, throughout (so in Luke’s writings; Polyb. 3, 19, 7 κ. τῆς νήσου διεσπάρησαν; PGiss 48, 8 κ. κυριακῆς γῆς; Jos., Ant. 8, 297; SibOr 3, 222; 4, 24; 5, 305) γνωστὸν γενέσθαι καθʼ ὅλης Ἰόππης become known throughout all Joppa Ac 9:42. καθʼ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας 9:31; 10:37; Lk 23:5. φήμη ἐξῆλθεν καθʼ ὅλης τῆς περιχώρου 4:14.
    ② down upon, toward, against someone or someth, fig. ext. of 1.
    ⓐ w. verbs of swearing, to denote what one swears by (Thu. 5, 47, 8; Lysias 32, 13; Isaeus 7, 28; Demosth. 21, 119; 29, 26; SIG 526, 4ff; 685, 25; UPZ 110, 39 [164 B.C.]; BGU 248, 13; Jdth 1:12; Is 45:23; 2 Ch 36:13) by ἐξορκίζειν (q.v.) Mt 26:63. ὀμνύναι (q.v.) Hb 6:13, 16. ὁρκίζειν (q.v.) Hs 9, 10, 5. Sim. ἐρωτᾶν κ. τινος request, entreat by someone Hv 3, 2, 3.
    ⓑ in a hostile sense, against
    α. after verbs that express hostile action, etc. διχάζειν Mt 10:35. ἐπαίρεσθαι 2 Cor 10:5. ἰσχύειν Ac 19:16. κακοῦν 14:2. στρατεύεσθαι 1 Pt 2:11. φυσιοῦσθαι 1 Cor 4:6
    β. after words and expressions that designate hostile speech, esp. an accusation ἔχειν (τι) κ. τινος have or hold someth. against someone Rv 2:4, 14, 20. φέρειν J 18:29. ἐγκαλεῖν Ro 8:33. ἐντυγχάνειν τινὶ κ. τινος 11:2 (TestJob 17:5). κατηγορεῖν Lk 23:14. ποιεῖν κρίσιν Jd 15a. τὸ κ. ἡμῶν χειρόγραφον the bond that stands against us Col 2:14. ἐμφανίζειν Ac 24:1; 25:2. αἰτεῖσθαί τι 25:3, 15. αἱ κ. τινος αἰτίαι vs. 27. εἰπεῖν πονηρόν Mt 5:11 (cp. Soph., Phil. 65 κακὰ λέγειν κ. τινος. X., Hell. 1, 5, 2; Isocr., C. Nic. 13; Plut., Mor. 2a λέγειν κ.; SIG 1180, 1 λέγειν κ. τινος; Just., A I, 23, 3; 49, 6 κ. τῶν … ὁμολογούντων). λαλεῖν ῥήματα Ac 6:13; cp. Jd 15b (TestDan 4:3; JosAs 23:15). μαρτυρεῖν κ. τ. θεοῦ give testimony in contradiction to God 1 Cor 15:15. ζητεῖν μαρτυρίαν κ. τινος testimony against someone Mk 14:55. ψευδομαρτυρεῖν 14:56f. ψευδομαρτυρία Mt 26:59. γογγύζειν 20:11. στενάζειν Js 5:9. διδάσκειν Ac 21:28. συμβούλιον διδόναι (ποιεῖν v.l.) Mk 3:6; ς. λαβεῖν Mt 27:1. ψεύδεσθαι Js 3:14 (Lysias 22, 7; X., Ap. 13; Ath. 35, 1 καθʼ ἡμῶν … κατεψεύσατο).
    γ. after expressions that designate such a position or state of mind in a different way εἶναι κ. τινος be against someone (opp. ὑπέρ) Mk 9:40 (WNestle, ZNW 13, 1912, 84–87; AFridrichsen, ibid., 273–80); Ro 8:31; (opp. μετά) Mt 12:30; Lk 11:23. δύνασθαί τι κ. τινος be able to do someth. against someone 2 Cor 13:8. ἔχειν τι κ. τινος have someth. against someone (in one’s heart) Mt 5:23; Mk 11:25; Hs 9, 24, 2; cp. ibid. 23, 2, where the acc. is to be supplied. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν J 19:11. ἐπιθυμεῖν Gal 5:17. μερίζεσθαι καθʼ ἑαυτῆς Mt 12:25. Cp. 1 Cl 39:4 (Job 4:18).—κατά prob. means against also in ἔβαλεν κατʼ αὐτῆς ἄνεμος Ac 27:14. ἐτελείωσαν κ. τ. κεφαλῆς αὐτῶν τὰ ἁμαρτήματα they completed the full measure of sins against their own head GPt 5:17.
    B. w. acc. (so in the NT 399 times [besides καθʼ εἷς and κατὰ εἷς])
    ⓐ of extension in space, along, over, through, in, upon (Hom. et al.; OGI 90, 7 ἐκ τῶν κ. τ. χώραν ἱερῶν; PHib 82, 19; PTebt 5, 188; LXX; Just.; Mel., HE 4, 26, 5) Ac 24:12. καθʼ ὅλην τ. πόλιν throughout the city Lk 8:39 (cp. Diod S 4, 10, 6 καθʼ ὅλην τὴν Ἐλλάδα). ἐγένετο λιμὸς κ. τὴν χώραν ἐκείνην 15:14. κ. τὰς κώμας 9:6. κ. πόλεις καὶ κώμας 13:22 (Appian., Maced. 9 §1 and 4 κ. πόλεις; Just., A I, 67, 3 κ. πόλεις ἢ ἀγρούς).—κ. τόπους in place after place Mt 24:7; Mk 13:8; Lk 21:11 (Theophr., περὶ σημ. 1, 4 p. 389 W.; Cat. Cod. Astr. III 28, 11 ἐν μέρει τ. ἀνατολῆς κ. τόπους, VIII/3, 186, 1 λιμὸς καὶ λοιμὸς καὶ σφαγαὶ κ. τόπους). οἱ ὄντες κ. τὴν Ἰουδαίαν those throughout Judea or living in Judea Ac 11:1. διασπαρῆναι κ. τὰς χώρας τῆς Ἰουδαίας be scattered over the regions of Judea 8:1. κ. τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν in the congregation there 13:1. τοῖς κ. τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν καὶ Συρίαν καὶ Κιλικίαν ἀδελφοῖς 15:23. τοὺς κ. τὰ ἔθνη Ἰουδαίους the Judeans (dispersed) throughout the nations 21:21. τοῖς κ. τὸν νόμον γεγραμμένοις throughout the law = in the law 24:14b. κ. τὴν ὁδόν along or on the way (Lucian, Catapl. 4; Jos., Ant. 8, 404) Lk 10:4; Ac 25:3; 26:13. τὸ κ. Κιλικίαν καὶ Παμφυλίαν πέλαγος the sea along the coast of Cilicia and Pamphylia 27:5; but the geographical designation τὰ μέρη τ. Λιβύης τῆς κ. Κυρήνην 2:10 prob. belongs to b: the parts of Libya toward Cyrene.
    ⓑ of extension toward, toward, to, up to ἐλθεῖν (γίνεσθαι v.l.) κ. τὸν τόπον come up to the place (Jos., Vi. 283) Lk 10:32. ἐλθόντες κ. τὴν Μυσίαν to Mysia Ac 16:7; cp. 27:7. πορεύεσθαι κ. μεσημβρίαν (s. μεσημβρία 2) toward the south 8:26 (cp. Jos., Bell. 5, 505). κ. σκοπὸν διώκειν run (over the course) toward the goal Phil 3:14. λιμὴν βλέπων κ. λίβα καὶ κ. χῶρον a harbor open to the southwest and northwest Ac 27:12 (s. βλέπω 8).—κ. πρόσωπον to the face (cp. Jos., Ant. 5, 205) Gal 2:11. ἔχειν τινὰ κ. πρόσωπον meet someone face to face (Thieme 19 has reff. for the use of κατὰ πρόσωπον as a legal formula) Ac 25:16. κ. πρόσωπον ταπεινός humble when personally present 2 Cor 10:1. κ. πρόσωπόν τινος in the presence of someone Lk 2:31; Ac 3:13. τὰ κ. πρόσωπον what lies before one’s eyes, i.e. is obvious 2 Cor 10:7. κ. ὀφθαλμοὺς προγράφειν portray before one’s eyes Gal 3:1.
    ⓒ of isolation or separateness, by (Thu. 1, 138, 6 οἱ καθʼ ἑαυτοὺς Ἕλληνες ‘the Greeks by themselves’; Polyb. 1, 24, 4; 5, 78, 3; 11, 17, 6; Diod S 13, 72, 8; Gen 30:40; 43:32; 2 Macc 13:13; Philo, Migr. Abr. 87; 90; Just., D. 4, 5 αὐτὴ καθʼ ἑαυτήν γενομένη; Tat. 13, 1 ἡ ψυχὴ καθʼ ἑαυτήν; Ath. 15, 2 ὁ πηλὸς καθʼ ἑαυτόν) ἔχειν τι καθʼ ἑαυτόν keep someth. to oneself Ro 14:22 (cp. Jos., Ant. 2, 255; Heliod. 7, 16, 1). καθʼ ἑαυτὸν μένειν live by oneself of the private dwelling of Paul in Rome Ac 28:16. πίστις νεκρὰ καθʼ ἑαυτήν faith by itself is dead Js 2:17 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 3, 43 τὸ σῶμα καθʼ αὑτὸ νεκρόν ἐστιν). ἡ κατʼ οἶκον ἐκκλησία the congregation in the house Ro 16:5; 1 Cor 16:19. κατʼ ἰδίαν s. ἴδιος 5. κ. μόνας (Thu. 1, 32, 5; Menand., Epitr. 988 S. [658 Kö.], Fgm. 146 Kö. [158 Kock]; Polyb. 4, 15, 11; Diod S 4, 51, 16; BGU 813, 15 [s. APF 2, 1903, 97]; LXX) alone, by oneself Mk 4:10; Lk 9:18; Hm 11:8 (here, as well as BGU loc. cit. and LXX, written as one word καταμόνας).
    ⓓ of places viewed serially, distributive use w. acc., x by x (Arrian., Anab. 4, 21, 10 κ. σκηνήν=tent by tent) or from x to x: κατʼ οἶκον from house to house (PLond III, 904, 20 p. 125 [104 A.D.] ἡ κατʼ οἰκίαν ἀπογραφή) Ac 2:46b; 5:42 (both in ref. to various house assemblies or congregations; w. less probability NRSV ‘at home’); cp. 20:20. Likew. the pl. κ. τοὺς οἴκους εἰσπορευόμενος 8:3. κ. τὰς συναγωγάς 22:19. κ. πόλιν (Jos., Ant. 6, 73) from city to city IRo 9:3, but in every (single) city Ac 15:21; 20:23; Tit 1:5. Also κ. πόλιν πᾶσαν (cp. Herodian 1, 14, 9) Ac 15:36; κ. πᾶσαν πόλιν 20:23 D. κ. πόλιν καὶ κώμην Lk 8:1; cp. vs. 4.
    ② marker of temporal aspect (Hdt. et al.; ins, pap, LXX, apolog.)
    ⓐ in definite indications of time: at, on, during (Hdt. 8, 17; Polemon Soph. B 43 Reader κατʼ ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν ‘in the course of that day’) κατʼ ἀρχάς in the beginning (cp. ἀρχή 1b) Hb 1:10 (Ps 101:26). κ. τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ πειρασμοῦ in the day of trial 3:8 (Ps 94:8.—Cp. Antig. Car. 173 κ. τὸν σπόρου καιρόν). νεκροῦ … ἀνάστασιν κατʼ αὐτὸν γεγονυῖαν ἱστορεῖ (Papias) reports that a resurrection from the dead occurred in his time Papias (2, 9; so, with personal names, Hdt.; Just., D. 23, 1 τοῦ θεοῦ … τοῦ κ. τὸν Ἐνώχ; Tat. 31, 2 Θεαγένης … κ. Καμβύσην γεγονώς). Of the future: κ. τὸν καιρὸν τοῦτον at that time, then Ro 9:9 (Gen 18:10). Of the past: κ. ἐκεῖνον τὸν καιρόν at that time, then (2 Macc 3:5; TestJos 12:1; Jos., Ant. 8, 266; cp. κατʼ ἐκεῖνο τοῦ καιροῦ Konon: 26 Fgm. 3 p. 191, 25 Jac.; Just., A I, 17, 2; 26, 3 al.) Ac 12:1; 19:23. κ. καιρόν at that time, then Ro 5:6 (Just., D. 132, 1; cp. OGI 90, 28 καθʼ ὸ̔ν καιρόν), unless καιρός here means the right time (s. καιρός 1b end). κατʼ ὄναρ (as καθʼ ὕπνον Gen 20:6; Just., D 60, 5 κ. τοὺς ὕπνους) during a dream, in a dream Mt 1:20; 2:12 (s. s.v. ὄναρ for ins).
    ⓑ with indefinite indications of time: toward, about κ. τὸ μεσονύκτιον about midnight Ac 16:25; cp. 27:27.—8:26 (s. μεσημβρία 1).
    ⓒ distributively (cp. 1d): x period by x period: κατʼ ἔτος every year (s. ἔτος) Lk 2:41. Also κατʼ ἐνιαυτόν (s. ἐνιαυτός 1) Hb 9:25; 10:1, 3. καθʼ ἡμέραν daily, every day (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Mt 26:55; Mk 14:49; Lk 16:19; 22:53; Ac 2:46f; 3:2; 16:5; 17:11; 19:9; 1 Cor 15:31; Hb 7:27; 10:11. Also τὸ καθʼ ἡμέραν (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Lk 11:3; 19:47; Ac 17:11 v.l. ἡ ἐπίστασις ἡ καθʼ ἡμέραν (s. ἐπίστασις) 2 Cor 11:28. κ. πᾶσαν ἡμέραν every day (Jos., Ant. 6, 49) Ac 17:7. Also καθʼ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Hb 3:13. κ. μίαν σαββάτου on the first day of every week 1 Cor 16:2. κ. πᾶν σάββατον every Sabbath Ac 13:27; 15:21b; 18:4. κ. μῆνα ἕκαστον each month Rv 22:2 (κ. μῆνα as SIG 153, 65; POxy 275, 18; 2 Macc 6:7). κ. ἑορτήν at each festival Mt 27:15; Mk 15:6.
    ③ marker of division of a greater whole into individual parts, at a time, in detail, distributive use apart from indications of place (s. above 1d) and time (s. 2c)
    ⓐ w. numerals: κ. δύο ἢ τὸ πλεῖστον τρεῖς two or, at the most, three at a time (i.e. in any one meeting, cp. ἀνὰ μέρος) 1 Cor 14:27 (Dio Chrys. 80 [30], 42 κ. δύο καὶ τρεῖς; Jos., Ant. 3, 142 κ. ἕξ; 5, 172 κ. δύο καὶ τρεῖς). καθʼ ἕνα (on this and the foll. s. εἷς 5e) singly, one after the other vs. 31. κ. ἕνα λίθον each individual stone Hs 9, 3, 5; καθʼ ἕνα λίθον 9, 6, 3. κ. ἓν ἕκαστον one by one, in detail Ac 21:19; 1 Cl 32:1 (Ath. 28, 4 καθʼ ἕκαστον). εἷς καθʼ εἷς Mk 14:19; J 8:9; cp. Ro 12:5 (B-D-F §305; Rob. 460). κ. ἑκατὸν καὶ κ. πεντήκοντα in hundreds and in fifties Mk 6:40.
    ⓑ περί τινος λέγειν κ. μέρος speak of someth. in detail Hb 9:5 (s. μέρος 1c). κατʼ ὄνομα (each one) by name (ἀσπάζομαι … τοὺς ἐνοίκους πάντες κα[τʼ] ὄνομα PTebt [III A.D.] 422, 11–16; Jos., Vi. 86) J 10:3; 3J 15 (cp. BGU 27, 18); ISm 13:2.
    ④ marker of intention or goal, for the purpose of, for, to (Thu. 6, 31, 1 κ. θέαν ἥκειν=to look at something; cp. Sb 7263, 6 [254 B.C.]; X., An. 3, 5, 2 καθʼ ἁρπαγὴν ἐσκεδασμένοι; Arrian, Anab. 1, 17, 12; 4, 5, 1; 21, 9; 6, 17, 6; 26, 2; Lucian, Ver. Hist. 2, 29; Anton. Lib., Fab. 24, 1 Δημήτηρ ἐπῄει γῆν ἅπασαν κ. ζήτησιν τῆς θυγατρός; 38; Jdth 11:19) κ. τὸν καθαρισμὸν τῶν Ἰουδαίων for the Jewish ceremonial purification J 2:6. κατὰ ἀτιμίαν λέγω to my shame 2 Cor 11:21 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 268 κ. τιμὴν τ. θεοῦ τοῦτο ποιῶν). ἀπόστολος … κ. πίστιν … καὶ ἐπίγνωσιν an apostle … for the faith … and the knowledge Tit 1:1 (but the mng. ‘in accordance with’ is also prob.).
    ⑤ marker of norm of similarity or homogeneity, according to, in accordance with, in conformity with, according to
    ⓐ to introduce the norm which governs someth.
    α. the norm of the law, etc. (OGI 56, 33; Mitt-Wilck., I/2, 352, 11 κ. τὰ κελευσθέντα [as Just., D. 78, 7]; POxy 37 II, 8) κ. τὸν νόμον (Jos., Ant. 14, 173; 15, 51; Just., D. 10, 1 al.; Ath. 31, 1; κ. τοὺς νόμους Ἀρεοπαγείτης, letter of MAurelius: ZPE 8, ’71, 169, ln. 27) Lk 2:22; J 18:31; 19:7; Hb 7:5. τὰ κ. τ. νόμον what is to be done according to the law Lk 2:39 (cp. EpArist 32). κ. τὸ ὡρισμένον in accordance w. what has been determined 22:22. Cp. 1:9; 2:24, 27, 42; Ac 17:2; 22:3. κ. τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου Ro 2:16; 16:25a; 2 Ti 2:8. κ. τὸ εἰρημένον Ro 4:18 (cp. Ath. 28, 1 κ. τὰ προειρημένα). κ. τὰς γραφάς (Just., D. 82, 4; cp. Paus. 6, 21, 10 κ. τὰ ἔπη=according to the epic poems; Just., A I, 32, 14 κ. τὸ λόγιον, D. 67, 1 κ. τὴν προφητείαν ταύτην) 1 Cor 15:3; cp. Js 2:8. κ. τὴν παράδοσιν Mk 7:5 (Tat. 39, 1 κ. τὴν Ἑλλήνων παράδοσιν).—κ. λόγον as one wishes (exx. in Dssm., B 209 [not in BS]; also PEleph 13, 1; 3 Macc 3:14) Ac 18:14 (though 5bβ below is also prob.).—It can also stand simply w. the acc. of the pers. according to whose will, pleasure, or manner someth. occurs κ. θεόν (cp. Socrat., Ep. 14, 5 κ. θεόν; 26, 2; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 4 p. 332, 1 Jac. and Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 84 §352 κ. δαίμονα; Jos., Ant. 4, 143 ὁ κ. τοῦτον[=θεόν] βίος; Just., D. 5, 1 κ. τινας … Πλατωνικούς; Tat. 1, 3 κ. … τὸν κωμικόν) Ro 8:27; 2 Cor 7:9–11; κ. Χριστὸν Ἰ. Ro 15:5. κ. κύριον 2 Cor 11:17. Cp. 1 Pt 1:15. κ. τ. Ἕλληνας in the manner of the Greeks, i.e. polytheists PtK 2, p. 14, 1; 7. κ. Ἰουδαίους ln. 25.
    β. the norm according to which a judgment is rendered, or rewards or punishments are given ἀποδοῦναι τινι κ. τ. πρᾶξιν or ἔργα αὐτοῦ (Ps 61:13; Pr 24:12; Just., A I, 12, 1; 17, 4 al.; κατʼ ἀξίαν τῶν πράξεων) Mt 16:27; Ro 2:6; 2 Ti 4:14; Rv 2:23. μισθὸν λήμψεται κ. τ. ἴδιον κόπον 1 Cor 3:8. κρίνειν κ. τι J 7:24; 8:15; 1 Pt 1:17; cp. Ro 2:2.
    γ. of a standard of any other kind κ. τ. χρόνον ὸ̔ν ἠκρίβωσεν in accordance w. the time which he had ascertained Mt 2:16. κ. τ. πίστιν ὑμῶν acc. to your faith 9:29. κ. τ. δύναμιν acc. to his capability 25:15 (Just., D. 139, 4; Tat. 12, 3; cp. Just., A II, 13, 6 κ. δύναμιν). Cp. Lk 1:38; 2:29; Ro 8:4; 10:2; Eph 4:7. ἀνὴρ κ. τ. καρδίαν μου Ac 13:22 (καρδία 1bε).
    δ. Oft. the norm is at the same time the reason, so that in accordance with and because of are merged: οἱ κ. πρόθεσιν κλητοί Ro 8:28. κατʼ ἐπιταγὴν θεοῦ 16:26; 1 Ti 1:1; Tit 1:3. κ. ἀποκάλυψιν Eph 3:3 (Just., D. 78, 2). οἱ καθʼ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ Ro 2:7. κατʼ ἐκλογήν 11:5 (Just., D. 49, 1). Cp. κ. τὴν βουλήν Eph 1:11 (Just., A I, 63, 16 al.); 2 Th 2:9; Hb 7:16. κ. τί γνώσομαι τοῦτο; by what shall I know this? (cp. Gen 15:8) Lk 1:18.—Instead of ‘in accordance w.’ κ. can mean simply because of, as a result of, on the basis of (Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 219 D.: κ. τοὺς νόμους; Jos., Ant. 1, 259; 278; Just., A I, 54, 1 κατʼ ἐνέργειαν τῶν φαύλων δαιμόνων; Ath. 7, 1 κ. συμπάθειαν τῆς παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ πνοῆς; 32, 1 κ. χρησμόν). κ. πᾶσαν αἰτίαν for any and every reason (αἰτία 1) Mt 19:3. κ. ἀποκάλυψιν Gal 2:2. Cp. Ro 2:5; 1 Cor 12:8 (κ. τ. πνεῦμα = διὰ τοῦ πν.); Eph 1:5; 4:22b; Phil 4:11; 1 Ti 5:21; 2 Ti 1:9; Tit 3:5; κ. ἀνάγκην Phlm 14 (Ar. 1, 2; 4, 2 al.; Just., A I, 30, 1; 61, 10; Ath. 24, 2); IPol 1:3. ὁ κ. τὸ πολὺ αὐτοῦ ἔλεος ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς 1 Pt 1:3.—καθʼ ὅσον (Thu. 4, 18, 4) in so far as, inasmuch as Hb 3:3. καθʼ ὅσον …, κ. τοσοῦτο in so far as …, just so far (Lysias 31, 8; Galen, De Dignosc. Puls. 3, 2, VIII 892 K.) 7:20, 22.
    ⓑ as a periphrasis to express equality, similarity, or example in accordance with, just as, similar(ly) to (TestJob 32:6 τίς γὰρ κ. σε ἐν μέσῳ τῶν τέκνων σου; Tat. 25, 1 κ. … τὸν Πρωτέα like Proteus; schol. on Nicander, Ther. 50: sheep are not burden-bearers κ. τοὺς ὄνους=as donkeys are).
    α. κ. τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν μὴ ποιεῖτε do not do as they do Mt 23:3. κ. Ἰσαάκ just as Isaac Gal 4:28. κ. θεὸν κτισθείς Eph 4:24 (Synes., Prov. 2, 2 p. 118c κ. θεόν=just as a god). Cp. Col 3:10. κ. τὸν τύπον Hb 8:5 (Ex 25:40; Mel., P. 58, 424 [νόμον v.l.]). Cp. 5:6 (Ps 109:4); 8:9 (Jer 38: 32); Js 3:9.—κ. τὰ αὐτά in (just) the same way (OGI 56, 66; PEleph 2, 6; 1 Macc 8:27; 12:2; Just., D. 1, 2; 3, 5; 113, 3) Lk 6:23, 26; 17:30; Dg 3:1. On the other hand, the sing. κ. τὸ αὐτό Ac 14:1 means together (marriage contract PEleph 1, 5 [IV B.C.] εἶναι ἡμᾶς κ. ταὐτό; 1 Km 11:11). καθʼ ὸ̔ν τρόπον just as (2 Macc 6:20; 4 Macc 14:17) Ac 15:11; 27:25. καθʼ ὅσον …, οὕτως (just) as …, so Hb 9:27. κ. πάντα τρόπον in every way (PSI 520, 16 [250 B.C.]; PCairZen 631, 2; 3 Macc 3:24) Ro 3:2. κ. μηδένα τρόπον (PMagd 14, 9 [221 B.C.]; PRein 7, 31; 3 Macc 4:13; 4 Macc 4:24; Just., D. 35, 7; s. Reader, Polemo 262) 2 Th 2:3. Cp. Johannessohn, Kasus, 1910, 82. κατά w. acc. serves in general
    β. to indicate the nature, kind, peculiarity or characteristics of a thing (freq. as a periphrasis for the adv.; e.g. Antiochus of Syracuse [V B.C.]: 555 Fgm. 12 Jac. κ. μῖσος=out of hate, filled with hate) κατʼ ἐξουσίαν with authority or power Mk 1:27. κ. συγκυρίαν by chance Lk 10:31. κ. ἄγνοιαν without knowing Ac 3:17 (s. ἄγνοια 2a). κ. ἄνθρωπον 1 Cor 3:3 al. (s. Straub 15; Aeschyl., Th. 425; ἄνθρωπος 2b). κ. κράτος powerfully, Ac 19:20 (κράτος 1a). κ. λόγον reasonably, rightly (Pla.; Polyb. 1, 62, 4; 5; 5, 110, 10; Jos., Ant. 13, 195; PYale 42, 24 [12 Jan., 229 B.C.]) 18:14 (but s. above 5aα). λέγειν τι κ. συγγνώμην οὐ κατʼ ἐπιταγήν say someth. as a concession, not as a command 1 Cor 7:6; cp. 2 Cor 8:8. κ. τάξιν in (an) order(ly manner) 1 Cor 14:40 (τάξις 2). κατʼ ὀφθαλμοδουλίαν with eye-service Eph 6:6. μηδὲν κατʼ ἐριθείαν μηδὲ κ. κενοδοξίαν Phil 2:3. κ. ζῆλος zealously 3:6a, unless this pass. belongs under 6 below, in its entirety. κ. σάρκα on the physical plane Ro 8:12f; 2 Cor 1:17; also 5:16ab, if here κ. ς. belongs w. οἴδαμεν or ἐγνώκαμεν (as Bachmann, JWeiss, H-D Wendland, Sickenberger take it; s. 7a below). καθʼ ὑπερβολήν (PTebt 42, 5f [c. 114 B.C.] ἠδικημένος καθʼ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπὸ, Ἁρμιύσιος; 4 Macc 3:18) beyond measure, beyond comparison Ro 7:13; 1 Cor 12:31; 2 Cor 4:17. καθʼ ὁμοιότητα (Aristot.; Gen 1:12; Philo, Fug. 51; Tat. 12, 4 κ. τὸ ὅμοιον αὐτῇ) in a similar manner Hb 4:15b. κ. μικρόν in brief B 1:5 (μικρός 1eγ).
    ⑥ denoting relationship to someth., with respect to, in relation to κ. σάρκα w. respect to the flesh, physically of human descent Ro 1:3; 4:1; 9:3, 5 (Ar. 15, 7 κ. σάρκα … κ. ψυχήν; Just., D. 43, 7 ἐν τῷ γένει τῷ κ. σάρκα τοῦ Ἀβραάμ al.). κ. τὸν ἔσω ἄνθρωπον 7:22 (cp. POxy 904, 6 πληγαῖς κατακοπτόμενον κ. τὸ σῶμα). Cp. Ro 1:4; 11:28; Phil 3:5, 6b (for vs. 6a s. 5bβ above); Hb 9:9b. τὰ κ. τινα (Hdt. 7, 148; Diod S 1, 10, 73; Aelian, VH 2, 20; PEleph 13, 3; POxy 120, 14; Tob 10:9; 1 Esdr 9:17; 2 Macc 3:40; 9:3 al.) someone’s case, circumstances Ac 24:22 (cp. PEleph 13, 3 τὰ κ. σε; Just., A I, 61, 13 τὰ κ. τὸν Ἰησοῦν πάντα, D. 102, 2 τὰ κ. αὐτόν; Ath. 24, 4 τὸ κ. τοὺς ἀγγέλους); 25:14; Eph 6:21; Phil 1:12; Col 4:7. κ. πάντα in all respects (since Thu. 4, 81, 3; Sb 4324, 3; 5761, 22; SIG 834, 7; Gen 24:1; Wsd 19:22; 2 Macc 1:17; 3 Macc 5:42; JosAs 1:7; Just., A II, 4, 4, D. 35, 8 al.); Ac 17:22; Col 3:20, 22a; Hb 2:17 (Artem. 1, 13 αὐτῷ ὅμοιον κ. π.); 4:15a.
    ⑦ Somet. the κατά phrase, which would sound cumbersome in the rendering ‘such-and-such’, ‘in line with’, or ‘in accordance with’, is best rendered as an adj., a possessive pron., or with a genitival construction to express the perspective from which something is perceived or to be understood. In translation it thus functions as
    ⓐ an adj. (Synes., Kingdom 4 p. 4d τὰ κατʼ ἀρετὴν ἔργα i.e. the deeds that are commensurate with that which is exceptional = virtuous deeds; PHib 27, 42 ταῖς κ. σελήνην ἡμέραις; 4 Macc 5:18 κ. ἀλήθειαν=ἀληθής; Just., A I, 2, 1 τοὺς κ. ἀλήθειαν εὐσεβεῖς; Tat. 26, 2 τῆς κ. ἀλήθειαν σοφίας) οἱ κ. φύσιν κλάδοι the natural branches Ro 11:21. ἡ κατʼ εὐσέβειαν διδασκαλία 1 Ti 6:3; cp. Tit 1:1b. οἱ κ. σάρκα κύριοι the earthly masters (in wordplay, anticipating the κύριος who is in the heavens, vs. 9) Eph 6:5. Cp. 2 Cor 5:16b, in case (s. 5bβ above) κ. ς. belongs w. Χριστόν (as the majority, incl. Ltzm., take it): a physical Christ, a Christ in the flesh, in his earthly relationships (σάρξ 5). Correspondingly in vs. 16a κ. ς. would be taken w. οὐδένα: no one simply as a physical being.—JMartyn, JKnox Festschr., ’67, 269–87.
    ⓑ a possessive pron., but with limiting force (Demosth. 2, 27 τὰ καθʼ ὑμᾶς ἐλλείμματα [i.e. in contrast to the activities of others: ‘your own’]; Aelian, VH 2, 42 ἡ κατʼ αὐτὸν ἀρετή; 3, 36; OGI 168, 17 παραγεγονότες εἰς τοὺς καθʼ ὑμᾶς τόπους; SIG 646, 6; 807, 15 al.; UPZ 20, 9 [II B.C.] ἐπὶ τῆς καθʼ ἡμᾶς λειτουργίας; PTebt 24, 64; 2 Macc 4:21; Tat. 42, 1 τίς ὁ θεὸς καὶ τίς ἡ κατʼ αὐτὸν ποίησις; Mel., HE 4, 26, 7 ἡ καθʼ ἡμᾶς φιλοσοφία) τῶν καθʼ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν τινες some of your (own) poets Ac 17:28. ἡ καθʼ ὑμᾶς πίστις Eph 1:15. ὁ καθʼ ὑμᾶς νόμος Ac 18:15. τὸ κατʼ ἐμὲ πρόθυμον my eagerness Ro 1:15.
    ⓒ a gen. w. a noun (Polyb. 3, 113, 1 ἡ κ. τὸν ἥλιον ἀνατολή; 2, 48, 2; 3, 8, 1 al.; Diod S 14, 12 ἡ κ. τὸν τύραννον ὠμότης; Dionys. Hal. 2, 1; SIG 873, 5 τῆς κ. τ. μυστήρια τελετῆς; 569, 22; 783, 20; PTebt 5, 25; PLond III, 1164k, 20 p. 167 [212 A.D.] ὑπὸ τοῦ κ. πατέρα μου ἀνεψιοῦ) τὰ κ. Ἰουδαίους ἔθη the customs of the Judeans Ac 26:3 (Tat. 12, 5 τῇ κ. Βαβυλωνίους προγνωστικῇ; 34, 2 ἡ κ. τὸν Ἀριστόδημον πλαστική). Cp. 27:2. ἡ κ. πίστιν δικαιοσύνη the righteousness of faith Hb 11:7. ἡ κατʼ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις purpose of election Ro 9:11.—Here also belong the titles of the gospels εὐαγγέλιον κατὰ Ματθαῖον etc., where κατά is likew. periphrasis for a gen. (cp. JLydus, De Mag. 3, 46 p. 136, 10 Wünsch τῆς κ. Λουκανὸν συγγραφῆς; Herodian 2, 9, 4 of an autobiography ἐν τῷ καθʼ αὑτὸν βίῳ; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 18 τ. καθʼ αὐτὸν ἱστορίαν; 2 Macc 2:13. Cp. B-D-F §163; 224, 2; Zahn, Einleitung §49; BBacon, Why ‘According to Mt’? Exp., 8th ser., 16, 1920, 289–310).—On the periphrasis of the gen. by κατά s. Rudberg (ἀνά beg.) w. many exx. fr. Pla. on. But it occurs as early as Thu. 6, 16, 5 ἐν τῷ κατʼ αὐτοὺς βίῳ.—M-M. DELG. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κατά

  • 8 σάββατον

    σάββατον, ου, τό (שַׁבָּת) dat. pl. σάββασιν (Meleager : Anth. Pal. 5, 160; 1 Macc 2:38; Jos., Vi. 279, Ant. 16, 163; Just., D. 27, 5; 29, 3) always in NT except that a v.l. at Mt 12:1 and 12 acc. to codex B has σαββάτοις (so usu. LXX [Thackeray 35]; Jos., Bell. 1, 146, Ant. 3, 294. See W-S. §8, 12; B-D-F §52; Mlt-H. 128; MBlack, BRigaux Festschr. ’70, 60f.—The word is found Plut. et al.; pap, LXX; En 10:17; Philo, Joseph.)
    ① the seventh day of the week in Israel’s calendar, marked by rest fr. work and by special religious ceremonies, sabbath
    ⓐ sing. (τὸ) σάββατον (Nepualius [I A.D.] ed. W Gemoll, Progr. Striegau 1884, 53; LXX; Philo, Cher. 87; Jos., Ant. 3, 143; 255; Just., D. 8, 4 al.) Mt 12:8; Mk 2:27f (Alex. Aphr., Eth. Probl. 10, II 2 p. 130, 34ff ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῶν ἀρετῶν χάριν, ἀλλʼ οὐκ ἔμπαλιν [=vice versa]); 6:2; 15:42 v.l.; 16:1; Lk 6:5; 23:54; J 5:9f; 9:14; B 15:1a, 3; GPt 2:5 al. ἁγιάζειν τὸ ς. B 15:1b (s. 2 Esdr 23:22). βεβηλοῦν τὸ ς. Mt 12:5b; λύειν τὸ ς. J 5:18 (s. λύω 4). τηρεῖν τὸ ς. 9:16 (cp. Just., D. 10, 3). σαββατίζειν τὸ ς. (cp. Lev 23:32) Ox 1, 9f (GTh 27) φυλάσσειν τὸ ς. (s. Ex 31:13f; Lev 19:3; Just., D. 8, 4) B 15:2, s. vs. 3. On the Sabbath (s. B-D-F §200, 3; Rob. 523): ἐν τῷ σαββάτῳ (2 Esdr 23:15a, 16) Lk 6:7; J 19:31a; ἐν σαββάτῳ (2 Esdr 20:32b) Mt 12:2; Lk 6:1; J 5:16; 7:22f; τῷ σαββάτῳ Lk 6:4 D (Unknown Sayings, 49–54); 6:9; 13:14a, 15; 14:3; τῷ σαββάτῳ ἐπερχομένης τῆς κυριακῆς AcPl Ha 3, 8. σαββάτῳ (Jos., Bell. 2, 456) Mt 24:20 (s. Boll 134, 1); Lk 14:1; J 6:59 v.l.; ἐν ἑτέρῳ ς. Lk 6:6; τῷ ἐρχομένῳ ς. Ac 13:44; ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ ς. (cp. Jer 17:21f) Lk 14:5 v.l.; ἐν ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ ς. (2 Esdr 20:32a; 23:15b; cp. Cyranides p. 79, 11 ἐν ἡμ. σαββάτου) Lk 14:5; τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ ς. Lk 13:14b, 16. In the acc. of duration of time (B-D-F §161, 2) τὸ σάββατον throughout the Sabbath Lk 23:56. κατὰ πᾶν ς. (on) every Sabbath Ac 13:27; 15:21; 18:4; εἰς τὸ μεταξὺ ς. on the following Sabbath 13:42. ἡ ἡμέρα πρὸ σαββάτου Lk 23:54 D.—σάββατον μέγα Great Sabbath MPol 8:1; 21:1; cp. J 19:31b (s. ESchwartz, Christl. u. jüd. Ostertafeln: AGG VIII/6, 1905, 127). ς. τὸ λεγόμενον πρῶτον the so-called first Sabbath PtK 2, p. 14, 28.—On σαββάτου ὁδός a Sabbath day’s journey Ac 1:12 s. ὁδός 2.
    ⓑ pl.
    α. of more than one Sabbath (2 Ch 31:3; Ezk 46; 3; Jos., Ant. 13, 252; Just., D. 10, 3 al.) σάββατα τρία Ac 17:2. B 15:8a (Is 1:13), b.
    β. τὰ σάββατα for a single Sabbath day (PCairZen 762, 6 [III B.C.]; Plut., Mor. 169c; 671e τὴν τῶν σαββάτων ἑορτήν; 672a; Ex 20:10; Lev 23:32 al.; Philo, Abr. 28 τὴν ἑβδόμην, ἣν Ἑβραῖοι σάββατα καλοῦσιν; Jos., Ant. 1, 33; 3, 237; 12, 259; 276.—B-D-F §141, 3 ; Rob. 408; ESchwyzer, ZVS 62, ’35, 1–16; ASchlatter, Mt 1929, 393) ὀψὲ σαββάτων Mt 28:1a (s. ὀψέ 3). Also prob. Col 2:16. ἡ ἡμέρα τῶν σαββάτων (Ex 20:8; 35:3; Dt 5:12; Jer 17:21f; Jos., Ant. 12, 274; Just., 27, 5) Lk 4:16; Ac 13:14; 16:13; Dg 4:3. (ἐν) τοῖς σάββασιν on the Sabbath (Jos., Vi. 279 τοῖς σάββασιν, Ant. 13, 252 v.l. ἐν τοῖς σάββασιν) Mt 12:1, 5, 10–12; Mk 1:21; 2:23, 24; 3:2, 4; Lk 4:31; 6:2; 13:10. ἡ περὶ τὰ σάββατα δεισιδαιμονία fanatical veneration of the Sabbath Dg 4:1 (only extreme danger to human life can cause the Sabbath law to be suspended: Synes., Ep. 4 p. 162bc). τὰ σάββατα the Sabbath feasts B 2:5 (Is 1:13).—JMeinhold, Sabbat u. Woche im AT 1905, Sabbat u. Sonntag 1909; JHehn, Siebenzahl u. Sabbat bei den Babyloniern u. im AT 1907, Der israelit. Sabbat 1909, Zur Sabbatfrage: BZ 14, 1917, 198–213; EMahler, Der Sabbat: ZDMG 62, 1908, 33–79, Handbuch der jüd. Chronologie 1916; GBeer, Schabbath1908; WNowack, Schabbat 1924; MWolff, Het ordeel der helleensch-romeinsche schrijvers over … den Sabbath: TT 44, 1910, 162–72; ELohse, Jesu Worte über den Sabbat, Beih. ZNW 26, ’60, 79–89; Moore, Judaism s. ind.; Schürer II 424–27; 447–54; 467–75. S. also κυριακός, end.
    ② a period of seven days, week
    ⓐ sing. δὶς τοῦ σαββάτου two days (in) a week Lk 18:12. πρώτῃ σαββάτου on the first day of the week (Sunday) Mk 16:9. κατὰ μίαν σαββάτου every Sunday 1 Cor 16:2. πρωὶ̈ μιᾶς σαββάτου early on Sunday morning Mk 16:2 D.
    ⓑ pl. (ἡ) μία (τῶν) σαββάτων (i.e. ἡμέρα) the first day of the week Mt 28:1b (Just., D. 41, 4; s. Dalman, Gramm. 247; SKrauss, Talm. Archäologie II 1911, 428f; PGardner-Smith, JTS 27, 1926, 179–81); Mk 16:2; Lk 24:1; J 20:1, 19; Ac 20:7; 1 Cor 16:2 v.l. Judeans fast δευτέρᾳ σαββάτων καὶ πέμπτῃ on the second and fifth days of the week (Monday and Thursday) D 8:1 (s. νηστεύω and the lit. there).—ESchürer, Die siebentägige Woche im Gebr. der christl. Kirche der ersten Jahrhunderte: ZNW 6, 1905, 1–66; FColson, The Week 1926; FBoll, Hebdomas: Pauly-W. VII/2, 1912, 2547–48; RNorth, The Derivation of ‘Sabbath’, Biblica 36, ’55, 182–201; WRordorf, Sunday, tr. AGraham, ’68; BHHW III 1633–35; TRE III 608.—B. 1005. DELG s.v. σάββατα. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > σάββατον

  • 9 ἐπί

    ἐπί, Thess. (before τ)
    A

    ἐτ IG9(2).517.14

     (iii B. C.), Prep. with gen., dat., and acc., to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.
    A WITH GEN.:
    I of Place,
    1 with Verbs of Rest, upon,

    καθέζετ' ἐ. θρόνου Il.1.536

    ;

    ἧστο.. ὑψοῦ ἐπ' ἀκροτάτης κορυφῆς 13.12

    ;

    ἐ. πύργου ἔστη 16.700

    ;

    κεῖται ἐ. χθονός 20.345

    : without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ' ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (sc. σταθέντα)

    ἐλήλατο 10.153

    ; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ' ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, 1.46; ἐ. γῆς, opp. ὑπὸ γῆς, Pl.Lg. 728a: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ' ἵππων on our chariot, Il.24.356;

    οὐκ ἂν ἐφ' ὑμετ έρων ὀχέων.. ἵκεσθον 8.455

    ;

    ἄγαγε.. δῶρ' ἐπ' ἀπήνης 24.447

    ;

    ἐπὶ τῆς ἁμάξης.. ὠχέετο Hdt.1.31

    ;

    ἐπὶ τῶν ἵππων ὀχεῖσθαι X.Cyr.4.5.58

    ;

    οὓς κῆρες φορέουσι.. ἐ. νηῶν Il.8.528

    ;

    πέμπειν τινὰς ἐ. τριήροιν X.HG5.4.56

    , etc.;

    ἐπ' ὤμου.. φέρειν Od.10.170

    ; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ' ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, Numen. ap. Eus.PE14.7; βαδιοῦνται ἐ. δυοῖν σκελοῖν, ἐφ' ἑνὸς πορεύσονται σκέλους, Pl.Smp. 190d; ἐπ' ἄκρων ὁδοιπορεῖν walk on tiptoe, S.Aj. 1230; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support,

    νέρθε κἀπὶ γῆς ἄνω Id.OT 416

    ; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, X.An.1.8.9,3.2.36; but most freq., in, rarely in Hom., ἐπ' ἀγροῦ in the country. Od. 1.190;

    γᾶς ἐ. ξένας S.OC 1705

     (lyr.);

    νήσου τῆσδ' ἐφ' ἧς ναίει Id.Ph. 613

    ;

    ἐ. ξένας δμωῒς ἐπ' ἀλλοτρίας πόλεος E.Andr. 137

     (lyr.);

    οἱ ἐ. Θρᾴκης σύμμαχοι Th.5.35

    ;

    τοὺς ἐ. τῆς Ἀσίας κατοικοῦντας Isoc.12.103

    ; ἐπ' οἰκήματος κατίσαι, καθῆσθαι, in a brothel, Hdt.2.121.έ, Pl. Chrm. 163b;

    τοὺς ἐ. τῶν οἰκημάτων καθεζομένους Aeschin.1.74

    ;

    ἐ. τῶν ἐργαστηρίων καθίζειν Isoc.7.15

    ; μένειν ἐ. τῆς αὐτῶν (sc. χώρας ) remain in statu quo, Indut. ap. Th.4.118;

    οἱ ἐπ' ἐρημίας λῃστεύοντες Jul. Or.7.210a

    ; later of towns,

    ἐπ' Ἀλεξανδρείας BGU908.16

     (ii A.D.), etc.; sts. also, at or near, ἐπ' αὐτάων (sc. τῶν πηγῶν) Il.22.153;

    κόλπος ὁ ἐ. Ποσιδηΐου Hdt.7.115

    ; αἱ ἐ. Λήμνου ἐπικείμεναι νῆσοι off Lemnos, ib.6 codd.; τὰ ἐ. Θρᾴκης the Thrace- ward region, Th.1.59, cf. IG12.45.17, etc.; ποταμοὶ ἐφ' ὧν ἔξεστιν ἡμῖν ταμιεύεσθαι.. on, i.e. near which.., X.An.2.5.18; ἐ. τῶν τραπεζῶν at the money-changers' tables, Pl.Ap. 17c; in Geom., αἱ ἐφ' ὧν AA BB [ γραμμαί] the lines AA BB, Arist.EN 1132b6, etc.; ἕλιξ ἐφ' ἇς τὰ ΑΒΓΔ a spiral ABCD, Archim.Spir.13 (cf. B.1.1k); also ἐ. τοῦ βάτου in the passage concerning the bush, Ev.Marc.12.26.
    2 in various relations not strictly local, μένειν ἐ. τῆς ἀρχῆς remain in the command, X.Ages.1.37; μένειν ἐ. τινος abide by it, D.4.9; ἐ. τῶν πραγμάτων, ἐ. τοῦ πολεμεῖν εἶναι, to be engaged in.., Id.15.11, Prooem.1; ἐ. ὀνόματος εἶναι bear a name, Id.39.21;

    ἔχεται πόλις ἐ. νόσου S.Ant. 1141

     (lyr.).
    b of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ' ἀγκύρας ride at (i.e. in dependence upon an) anchor, Hdt.7.188; ἐ. προσπόλου μιᾶς χωρεῖν dependent upon an attendant, S.OC 746.
    c with the personal and reflexive Pron., once in Hom.,

    εὔχεσθε.. σιγῇ ἐφ' ὑμείων Il.7.195

    ; later mostly with [ per.] 3rd pers., ἐπ' ἑωυτῶν κεῖσθαι by themselves, Hdt.2.2, cf. 8.32;

    οἰκέειν κώμην Id.5.98

    ;

    ἐ. σφῶν αὐτῶν αὐτόνομοι οἰκεῖν Th.2.63

    ;

    ἵζεσθαι Hdt.9.17

    ;

    ἐφ' ἑαυτῶν πλεῖν Th.8.8

    ; ἐπ' ὑμέων αὐτῶν βαλέσθαι consider it by yourselves, Hdt.3.71, etc.;

    αὐτὴ ἐφ' αὑτῆς σκοποῦσα Th.6.40

    ;

    ἐφ' ἡμῶν αὐτῶν τὸν ἐξετασμὸν ποιεῖσθαι D.18.16

    ; ἐπ' ἑωυτῶν διαλέγονται speak in a dialect of their own, Hdt. 1.142; also

    αὐτοὶ ἐφ' ἑαυτῶν χωρεῖν X. An.2.4.10

    ;

    πράττειν Pl.Prt. 326d

    , cf. Sph. 217c; τὸ ἐφ' ἑαυτῶν μόνον προορώμενοι considering their own interest only, th.1.17.
    d with numerals, to denote the depth of a body of soldiers, ἐ. τεττάρων ταχφῆναι to be drawn up four deep, four in file, X.An.1.2.15, etc.; ἐ. πεντήκοντα ἀσπίδων συνεστραμμένοι, of the Thebansat Leuctra, Id.HG 6.4.12; ἐπ' ὀλίγων τεταγμένοι, i.e. in a long thin line, Id.An.4.8.11;

    οὐκ ἐπ' ὀλίγων ἀσπίδων στρατιὰν παρατεταγμένην Th.7.79

    ; ἐφ' ἑνὸς ἄγειν in single file, X.Cyr.2.4.2, cf. An.5.2.6; rarely of the length of the line,

    ἐ. τεσσάρων ταξάμενοι τὰς ναῦς Th.2.90

    ; in X.,

    ἐγένοντο τὸ μέτωπον ἐ. τριακοσίων.. τὸ δὲ βάθος ἐφ' ἑκατόν Cyr.2.4.2

    ; πλεῖν ἐ. κέρως, ἐ. κέρας, v. infr. c.1.3; ἐ. φάλαγγος γίγνεται τὸ στράτευμα is formed in column, An.4.6.6, etc. (but in E.Ph. 1467, ἀσπίδων ἔπι is merely in or under arms): hence, generally, ἐ. ὀκτὼ πλίνθων τὸ εὖρος eight bricks wide, X.An.7.8.14.
    e c. gen. pers., before, in presence of,

    ἐ. μαρτύρων.. πράσσεταί τι Antipho 2.3.8

    ;

    ἐξελέγχεσθαι ἐ. πάντων D.25.36

    ; so, before a magistrate or official,

    ἐ. τοῦ στρατηγοῦ POxy. 38.11

     (i A.D.), cf. UPZ71.15 (ii B.C.), Ev.Matt.28.14;

    γράψομαί σε ἐ. Ῥαδαμάνθυος Luc.Cat.18

    ;

    τινὰ εἰς δίκην καὶ κρίσιν ἐ. τῶν στρατοπέδων προκαλεῖν Jul.Or.1.30d

    ;

    πίστεις δοῦναι ἐ. θεῶν D.H.5.29

    ; but ἐπὶ δικασταῖς is f.l. in D.19.243 (leg. ἔπη).
    f with Verbs of perceiving, observing, judging, etc., in the case of,

    ἐπὶ νούσων παντοίων ἐπύθοντο Emp.112.10

    ;

    ὁρᾶν τι ἐ. τινος X.Mem.3.9.3

    ;

    αἰσθάνεσθαί τι ἐ. τινος Pl.R. 406c

    , etc.;

    τὴν γνώμην ἔχειν ἐ. τινος Hyp.Eux.32

    ;

    τὰ συμβόλαια ἐ. τῶν νόμων σκοπεῖν D.18.210

    ; ἐπ' αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων ἂν ἐσκόπει ib.233, cf. 25.2 (v.l.);

    ἐφ' ἑνός τι παριδεῖν Lycurg.64

    ;

    τὰς ἐναντιώσεις ἐ. μὲν τῶν λόγων τηροῦντες, ἐ. δὲ τῶν ἔργων μὴ καθορῶντες Isoc.13.7

    ;

    οὐδεὶς ἐφ' αὑτοῦ τὰ κακὰ συνορᾷ Men.631

    ;

    ἀγνοεῖν τι ἐ. τινος X.Mem.2.3.2

    ; also with Verbs of speaking, on a subject,

    λέγειν ἐ. τινος Pl.Chrm. 155d

    , R. 524e, etc.;

    ἐπιδεῖξαί τι ἐ. τινος Isoc.8.109

    ;

    ἵνα τοὺς ἐπαίνους ἐπ' αὐτῶν κοινοὺς ποιήσωμαι D.60.12

    .
    3 implying Motion:
    a where the sense of motion is lost in the sense of being supported, ὀρθωθεὶς.. ἐπ' ἀγκῶνος having raised himself upon his elbow, Il.10.80;

    ἐ. μελίης.. ἐρεισθείς 22.225

    ;

    τὴν μὲν.. καθεῖσεν ἐ. θρόνου 18.389

    .
    b in a pregnant sense, denoting the goal of motion (cf.

    εἰς A.1.2

    ,

    ἐν A.1.8

    ), νῆα.. ἐπ' ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, 1.485; περάαν νήσων ἔπι carry to the islands and leave there, 21.454, cf.22.45;

    ἐ. τῆς γῆς καταπίπτειν X.Cyr.4.5.54

    ; ἀναβῆναι ἐ. τῶν πύργων ib.7.1.39;

    ἐπ' Ἀβύδου ἀφικομέναις Th.8.79

     (v.l.); freq. of motion towards or (in a military sense) upon a place,

    προτρέποντο μελαινάων ἐ. νηῶν Il.5.700

    ;

    τρέσσε.. ἐφ' ὁμίλου 11.546

     (but νήσου ἔ. Ψυρίης νέεσθαι to go near Psyria, Od.3.171); ἐπ' οἴκου ἀπελαύνειν, ἀναχωρεῖν, ἀποχωρεῖν, homewards, Hdt.2.121.δ, Th.1.30,87, etc.; also with names of places,

    ἰέναι ἐ. Κυζίκου Hdt.4.14

    ;

    πλεῖν ἐ. Χίου Id.1.164

    , cf. 168; ἀποπλεῖν ἐπ' αἰγύπτου ib. 1;

    ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἐ. Θεσσαλίης Id.5.64

    ; ὁ κόλπος ὁ ἐ. Παγασέων φέρων the bay that leads to Pagasae, Id.7.193; ἡ ἐ. βαβυλῶνος ὁδός the road leading to B., X.Cyr. 5.3.45, cf.An.6.3.24.
    c metaph., ἐ. γνώμης τινὸς γίγνεσθαι come to an opinion, D.4.7;

    ἐπ' ἐλπίδος γενέσθαι Plu.Sol.14

    ; ὡς ἐ. κινδύνου as if to meet danger, Th.6.34;

    ἐ. τοῦ ἀλύπως ζῆν

     with a view to..,

    Pl.Prt. 358b

    ; cf. infr. B. 111.2.
    II of Time, in the time of,

    ἐ. προτέρων ἀνθρώπων Il.5.637

    ,23.332;

    ἐ. Κρόνου Hes.Op. 111

    ; ἐ. Κέκροπος, ἐ. Δαρείου, etc., Hdt.8.44,6.98, etc.;

    ἐ. τῶν τριάκοντα Lys.13.2

    ;

    ὀλιγαρχία ἡ ἐ. τῶν τετρακοσίων καταστᾶσα Isoc.8.108

    ; ἐ. τούτου τυραννεύοντος, ἐ. Λέοντος βασιλεύοντος, ἐ. Μήδων ἀρχόντων, etc., Hdt.1.15,65, 134, etc.;

    ἐ. τῆς ἐμῆς βασιλείας Isoc.3.32

    ; ἐπ' ἐμεῦ in my time, Hdt.1.5, 2.46, etc.;

    ἡ εἰρήνη ἡ ἐπ' Ἀνταλκίδου D.20.54

    , cf. X.HG5.1.36;

    αἱ ἐπ' Ἀσδρούβα γενόμεναι ὁμολογίαι Plb.3.15.5

    ; ἐπ' εἰρήνης in time of peace, Il.2.797, 9.403;

    ἐπ' ἐμῆς νεότητος Ar.Ach. 211

     (lyr.);

    ἐ. Λάχητος καὶ τοῦ προτέρου πολέμου Th.6.6

    ; ἐπ' ἡμέρης ἑκάστης v.l. for -ῃ -τῃ in Hdt.5.117.
    b later ἐ. δείπνου at dinner, Luc.Asin.3; ἐ. τῆς τραπέζης, ἐφ' ἑκάστης κύλικος, Plu.Alex.23; ἐ. τῆς κύλικος, ἐ. τοῦ ποτηρίου, Luc.Pisc.34, Plu.Alex.53.
    III in various causal senses:
    1 over, of persons in authority,

    ἐπ' οὗ ἐτάχθημεν Hdt.5.109

    ; οἱ ἐ. τῶν πραγμάτων the public officers, D.18.247; freq. in forged decrees, ὁ ἐ. τῶν ὅπλων στρατηγός ib.38; ὁ ἐ. τῶν ὁπλιτῶν, τῶν ἱππέων, ib.116; ὁ ἐ. τῆς διοικήσεως ib.38 (but cf. c. 111.3); τοῦ ἐ. τῶν ὁπλιτῶν is f.l. in Lys. 32.5;

    ὁ ἐ. τῆς χώρας στρατηγός Plu.Phoc.32

    ;

    οἱ ἐ. τῶν σιτοποιῶν καὶ μαγείρων Id.Alex.23

    ;

    ὁ ἐ. τοῦ οἴνου Id.Pyrrh.5

    ; ὁ ἐ. τῶν ἐπιστολῶν τοῦ Ὄθωνος, = Lat. ab epistulis, his secretary, Id.Oth.9; cf. B. 111.6.
    2 κεκλῆσθαι ἐ. τινος to be called after him, Hdt.4.45;

    ἐ. τινος μετονομασθῆναι Id.1.94

    :

    ἐ. τινος τὰς ἐπωνυμίας ἔχειν Id.4.107

    ; ἐ. τινος ἐπώνυμος γίγνεσθαι ib. 184; also

    ἐπ' ὀνόματος καλεῖν Plb.5.35.2

    .
    3 of occasions, circumstances, and conditions, οὐκ ἐ. τούτου μόνον, ἀλλ' ἐ. πάντων, on all occasions, D.21.38, cf. 183;

    ἐφ' ἑκάστων Pl.Phlb. 25e

    ;

    ἐφ' ἑκατέρου Id.Tht. 159c

    ;

    ἐφ' ἑκάστης μαντείας D.21.54

    ; ἐπ' ἐξουσίας καὶ πλούτου πονηρὸν εἶναι in.. ib.138; ἐ. τῆς ἀληθείας καὶ τοῦ πράγματος ib.72, cf. 18.17;

    τὴν ἐ. τῆς πομπῆς καὶ τοῦ μεθύειν πρόφασιν λαβών Id.21.180

    ;

    ἐ. σχολῆς Aeschin.3.191

    ;

    ἐπ' ἀδείας Plu. Sol.22

    ;

    ἐπ' ἀληθείας Ev.Marc.12.14

    , POxy.255.16 (i A.D.): hence in adverbial phrases, ἐπ' ἴσας (sc. μοίρας) equally, S.El. 1062 (lyr.);

    ἐ. καιροῦ D.20.90

    ; ἐπ' ἐσχάτων at the last, LXXDe.17.7 (v.l. ἐσχάτῳ) ; ἐπὶ τοῦ παρόντος for the present, SIG543.6 (Epist. Philipp.).
    4 in respect of,

    ἐ. τῶν πραγμάτων Arist.Pol. 1280a17

    , cf. EN 1131b18; concerning,

    τὰ ἐπ' αὐτῶν ἐνεστηκότα PTeb.7.6

     (ii B. C.).
    B WITH DAT.:
    I of Place, upon, just like the gen. (hence Poets use whichever case suits the metre, whereas in Prose the dat. is more freq.):
    1 with Verbs of Rest,

    ἕζεο τῷδ' ἐ. δίφρῳ Il.6.354

    ;

    ἧντ' ἐ. πύργῳ 3.153

    ;

    στῆ δ' ἐ... νηΐ 8.222

    ;

    κεῖσθαι ἐ. τινι X.An.1.8.27

    ; καίειν ἐ. πᾶσι (sc. βωμοῖς) Il.8.240;

    ἔβραχε χαλκὸς ἐ. στήθεσσι 4.420

    ;

    ἐ. χθονὶ δέρκεσθαι 1.88

    , etc.: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something,

    νηυσὶν ἐπ' ὠκυπόροισιν ἔβαινον 2.351

     (v.l. for ἐν)

    ; ἐπ' ὤμοις φέρειν E.Ph. 1131

     (but ἐφ' ἵππῳ, ἐφ' ἵπποις and the like are never used for ἐφ' ἵππου, etc.); of places, mostly in,

    ἐ. τῇ χώρῃ Hdt.5.77

    ;

    τἀπὶ Τροίᾳ πέργαμα S.Ph. 353

    ;

    ἐπ' ἐσχάτοις τόποις Id.Tr. 1100

    ;

    ἐ. τῇ ψυχῇ δάκνομαι Id.Ant. 317

    ; also, at or near,

    ἐ. κρήνῃ Od.13.408

    ;

    ἐ. θύρῃσι Il.2.788

    , etc.; of rivers, etc., by, beside,

    ἐ. ὠκυρόῳ Κελάδοντι.. 7.133

    , etc.;

    ἐπ' ἐσχάρῃ Od.7.160

    ;

    ἐ. νηυσί Il.1.559

    , etc.; of persons, οὐ τἀπὶ Λυδοῖς οὐδ' ἐπ' Ὀμφάλῃ λατρεύματα in Lydia, in the power of O., S.Tr. 356.
    b on or over, ἐπ' Ἰφιδάμαντι over the body of Iphidamas, Il.11.261, cf. 4.470;

    τοιόνδ' ἐπ' ἀνδρὶ κομπάζεις λόγον A.Ag. 1400

    ; also, over or in honour of,

    ἐ. σοὶ κατέθηκε.. ἄεθλα Od.24.91

    ; [

    βοῦς] ἐ. Πατρόκλῳ πέφνεν Il. 23.776

    ;

    κειράμενοι χαίτας ἐπ' Ἀδώνιδι Bion 1.81

    , cf. Lys.2.80; in [dialect] Dor. and [dialect] Aeol.sepulchral Inscrr., Schwyzer 348,al.
    c in hostile sense, against, Hdt.1.61,6.74, 88, S.Ph. 1139 (lyr.), etc.; as a check upon,

    οἱ πρόβουλοι καθεστᾶσιν ἐ. τοῖς βουλευταῖς Arist.Pol. 1299b37

    , cf. 1271a39; also, towards, in reference to,

    ἐ. πᾶσι χόλον τελέσαι Il.4.178

    ;

    ἐπ' ἔργοις πᾶσι S.OC 1268

    ;

    δικαιότερος καὶ ἐπ' ἄλλῳ ἔσσεαι Il.19.181

    , cf. S.Tr. 994 (anap.), etc.;

    ἐ. τοῖς δυνατοῖς ἔχειν τὴν γνώμην Democr. 191

    ; τὸ ἐ. πᾶσιν τοῖς σώμασι κάλλος extending over all bodies, Pl. Smp. 210b; ἡ [παιδεία] ἡ ἐ. σώμασι, ἐ. ψυχῇ, Id.R. 376e; τἀπὶ σοὶ κακά the ills which lie upon thee, S.Ph. 806: in [dialect] Att. also, νόμον τίθεσθαι, θεῖναι ἐ. τινι, make a law for his case, whether for or against, Pl.Grg. 488d, Lexap.And.1.87;

    νόμους ἀναγράψαι ἐ. τοῖς ἀδικοῦσι D.24.5

    ; νόμος κεῖται ἐ. τινι ib.70; τἀπὶ τῷ πλήθει νενομοθετημένα ib.123, cf. 142; τί θεσμοποιεῖς ἐ. ταλαιπώρῳ νεκρῷ; E.Ph. 1645.
    d. of accumulation, upon, after, ὄγχνη ἐπ' ὄγχνῃ one pear after another, pear on pear, Od.7.120;

    ἐ. κέρδεϊ κέρδος Hes.Op. 644

    ;

    ἄτη ἑτέρα ἐπ' ἄτῃ A. Ch. 404

     (lyr.); πήματα ἐ. πήμασι, ἐ. νόσῳ νόσος, S.Ant. 595, OC 544 (both lyr.).
    e. in addition to, over and above, besides, οὐκ ἄρα σοί γ'

    ἐ. εἴδεϊ καὶ φρένες ἦσαν Od.17.454

    , cf. 308;

    ἄλλα τε πόλλ' ἐ. τῇσι παρίσχομεν Il.9.639

    , cf. Od.22.264; ἐ. τοῖσι besides, 24.277;

    ἐ. τούτοις Him.Or.14.10

    ; so of Numerals,

    τρισχιλίους ἐ. μυρίοις Plu.Publ.20

    , cf. Jul.Or.4.148c, etc.;

    γυναῖκ' ἐφ' ἡμῖν.. ἔχει E.Med. 694

    : with Verbs of eating and drinking, with,

    ἐ. τῷ σίτῳ πίνειν ὕδωρ X.Cyr.6.2.27

    ; νέκταρ

    ποτίσαι ἐπ' ἀμβροσίᾳ Pl.Phdr. 247e

    ; esp. of a relish, κάρδαμον μόνον

    ἐ. τῷ σίτῳ ἔχειν X.Cyr.1.2.11

    ;

    παίειν ἐφ' ἁλὶ τὰν μᾶδδαν Ar.Ach. 835

    : metaph., ἐ. τῷ φάγοις ἥδιστ' ἄν; ἐ. βαλλαντίῳ; Id.Eq. 707; later ἐ. γογγυλίσι διαβιῶναι live on turnips, Ath.10.419a.
    f. of position, after, behind, of soldiers, X.Cyr.8.3.16-18.
    g. in dependence upon, in the power of,

    τὰ δ' οὐκ ἐπ' ἀνδράσι κεῖται Pi.P.8.76

    ; ἐ. τινί ἐστι it is in his power to do, c.inf., Hdt.8.29, etc.;

    ἐ. σοί ἐστιν ἀναζωπυρεῖν M.Ant.7.2

    ;

    ἐ. ἑτέροις γίγνεσθαι Th.6.22

    ; ἐ. τῷ πλήθει in their hands, S.OC66, cf. Th.2.84; τὸ ἐπ' ἐμοί, τὸ ἐ. ἐκείνῳ, etc., as far as is in my power, etc., X. Cyr.5.4.11, Isoc.4.142, etc.;

    τὸ ἐ. τούτοις εἶναι Lys.28.14

    ; ἐ. τοῖς υἱάσι their property, Leg.Gort.4.37.
    h. according to, ἐ. τοῖς νόμοις Lexap.D. 24.56;

    ἐ. πᾶσι δικαίοις ποιούμεθα τοὺς λόγους Id.20.88

    ;

    ἐ. προφάσει θηρός S.Tr. 662

     codd.(lyr.).
    i. of condition or circumstances in which one is,

    ἀτελευτήτῳ ἐ. ἔργῳ Il.4.175

    , etc.;

    ἐπ' ἀρρήτοις λόγοις S.Ant. 556

    ;

    ἐπ' ἀσφάκτοις μήλοισι E. Ion 228

     (lyr.);

    ταύταις ἐ. συντυχίαις Pi.P.1.36

    ;

    ἐπ' εὐπραξίᾳ S.OC 1554

    ;

    ἐ. τῷ παρόντι Th.2.36

    ; ἐπ' αὐτοφώρῳ λαβεῖν, v. αὐτόφωρος; also ἐ. τῷ δείπνῳ at dinner, X.Cyr.1.3.12, Thphr.Char. 3.2;

    ἐ. τῇ κύλικι Pl.Smp. 214b

    ;

    ἐ. θαλίαις E.Med. 192

     (anap.).
    k. Geom., of the point, etc., at which letters are written, κέντρον ἐφ' ᾧ K Hippocr. ap. Simp.in Ph.64.14; ἡ [γραμμὴ] ἐφ' ᾗ HK the line HK, Arist.Mete. 375b22.
    2. with Verbs of Motion:
    a. where the sense of motion merges in that of support,

    ἐ. χθονὶ βαίνει Il.4.443

    ;

    θεῖναι ἐ. γούνασιν 6.92

    ;

    καταθέσθαι ἐ. γαίῃ 3.114

    ; ἱστὸν ἔστησεν ἐ.

    ψαμάθοις 23.853

    ;

    ἐ. φρεσὶ θῆκε 1.55

    ; δυσφόρους ἐπ' ὄμμασι γνώμας

    βαλεῖν S.Aj.51

    , etc.
    b. in pregnant construction, πέτονται ἐπ' ἄνθεσιν fly on to the flowers and settle there, Il.2.89; ἐκ.. βαῖνον ἐ.

    ῥηγμῖνι θαλάσσης Od.15.499

    ;

    καθεῖσεν ἐ. Σκαμάνδρῳ Il.5.36

    ; ἦλθε δ'

    ἐ. Κρήτεσσι 4.251

    , cf. 273;

    νῆες εἰρύατ'.. ἐ. θινὶ θαλάσσης 4.248

    .
    c. rarely for εἰς c.acc.,

    νηυσὶν ἔ. γλαφυρῇσιν ἐλαυνέμεν 5.327

    , 11.274.
    d. in hostile sense, upon or against, ἐ. τινι ἔχειν, ἰθύνειν ἵππους, 5.240, 8.110; ἐ. τινι ἱέναι βέλος, ἰθύνεσθαι ὀϊστόν, 1.382, Od.22.8; ἐ. τοι

    Ἀκράγαντι τανύσαις Pi.O.2.91

    ;

    ἐ. Τυδεΐδῃ ἐτιταίνετο.. τόξα Il.5.97

    ;

    ἐφ' Ἕκτορι.. ἀκοντίσσαι 16.358

    ;

    κύνας.. σεύῃ ἐπ' ἀγροτέρῳ συΐ 11.293

    ;

    ὡρμήθησαν ἐπ' ἀνδράσιν Od.10.214

    , cf. E.Ph. 1379, etc.: also ἐ. τινι

    τετάχθαι Th.2.70

    , 3.13;

    ὅστις φάρμακα δηλητήρια ποιοῖ ἐ. Τηΐοισιν SIG37.2

     (Teos, v B.C.).
    II. of Time, rarely, and never in good [dialect] Att., exc. in sense of succession (infr. 2), ἐ. νυκτί by night, Il.8.529;

    ἐφ' ἡμέρῃ, αἱ δ' ἐ. νυκτί Hes.Op. 102

    ; ἐπ' ἤματι τῷδε on this very day, Il.13.234; ἐπ' ἤματι for to-day, 19.229, 10.48, Od.2.284; αἰεὶ ἐπ' ἤματι every day, 14.105;

    ἐπ' ἡμέρῃ ἑκάστῃ Hdt.4.112

    , 5.53, cf. D.S. 34/5.2.1;

    ὁ ἥλιος νέος ἐφ' ἡμέρῃ ἐστίν Heraclit.6

    ;

    ἐ. τρίς Act.Ap.10.16

    , PHolm.1.18.
    2. of succession, after, ἕκτῃ ἐ. δέκα on the 16th of the month, Chron. ap. D.18.155, Decr.ib.181 ( δεκάτῃ codd.); τετράδι

    ἐ. δέκα IG12.304.62

    ; πρὸ τῆς ἕκτης ἐ. δέκα ib.22.1361.19; ἐπ' ἐξεργασμένοισι, = Lat. re peracta, Hdt.4.164, etc.; ἐ. τινι ἀγορεύειν, ἀνίστασθαι, E.Or. 898, 902, X.Cyr.2.3.7, etc.;

    ἐ. διεφθαρμένοισι Ἴωσι Hdt.1.170

    , τὰ ἐ. τούτοισι, = Lat. quod superest, Id.9.78, cf. Th.1.65, A.Ag. 255, etc.;

    τοὐπὶ τῷδε πῆμα E.Hipp. 855

     (lyr.), etc.
    3. in the time of (cf. A. 11) only in Arc.,

    ἐπὶ Χαιριάδαι Schwyzer665

     A 21, cf. 666 (Orchom.).
    III. in various causal senses:
    1. of the occasion or cause, τετεύξεται ἄλγε' ἐπ' αὐτῇ for her, Il.21.585; ἐ. σοὶ μάλα πόλλ' ἔπαθον for thee, 9.492: freq. with Verbs expressing some mental affection,

    ἐπὶ παντὶ λόγῳ ἐπτοῆσθαι Heraclit.87

    ; μέγα φρονεῖν ἐ. τινι to be proud at or of a thing, Pl.Prt. 342d, X.HG3.4.11, etc.; χλιδᾶν ἐ . τινι S.El. 360; ἀγάλλεσθαι, ἀγανακτεῖν ἐ. τοῖς παροῦσι, X.An.2.6.26, Isoc.4.122;

    ὀνομαστὸς ἐ. τινι γεγονέναι X.Mem.1.2.61

    ; also ἐφ' αἵματι φεύγειν to be tried on a capital charge, D.21.105; πληγὰς λαμβάνειν

    ἐ. τινι X.Cyr.1.3.16

    ;

    ζημιοῦσθαι ἐ. τινι D.24.122

    , etc.: in adverbial phrases [δικάσσαι] ἐπ' ἀρωγῇ with favour, Il.23.574;

    δολίῃ ἐ. τέχνῃ Hes. Th. 540

    ;

    ἐ. μιῇ αἰτίῃ ἀνήκεστον πάθος ἔρδειν Hdt.1.137

    , etc.; ἐ . κακουργίᾳ καὶ οὐκ ἀρετῇ for malice, Th.1.37; ἐπ' εὐνοία, ἐπ' ἔχθρα, D. 18.273, 21.55; ἐπ' ἀγαθῇ ἐλπίδι with.., X.Mem.2.1.18, cf. Ep.Rom. 4.18; ἐφ' ἑκατέροις in both cases, Pl.Tht. 158d, cf. Xenoph.34.4; ἐ.

    δάκρυσί τινα καταστένειν E. Tr. 315

     (lyr.); ἐ. τῇ πάσῃ συκοφαντίᾳ καὶ διασεισμῷ Mitteis Chr. 31 vI (ii B.C.), etc.
    2. of an end or purpose,

    υἱὸν ἐ. κτεάτεσσι λιπέσθαι Il.5.154

    , cf. 9.482; ἐ. δόρπῳ for supper, Od.18.44;

    ἐ. κακῷ ἀνθρώπου σίδηρος ἀνεύρηται Hdt.1.68

    ;

    ἐ. διαφθορῇ Id.4.164

    ;

    ἐ. σῷ καιρῷ S.Ph. 151

     (lyr.);

    ἐ. τῷ κέρδει X.Mem.1.2.56

    ; δῆσαι ἐ. θανάτῳ or τὴν ἐ. θανάτῳ, Hdt.9.37, 3.119, cf.1.109, X.An.1.6.10;

    ἐ. θανάτῳ συλλαβεῖν Isoc.4.154

    ; ἐπ' ἐξαγωγῇ for exportation, Hdt.5.6; χρηστηριάζεσθαι ἐ. τῇ χώρῃ with a view to gaining.., Id.1.66;

    ἐ. τούτοις ἐθύσαντο X.An.3.5.18

    ;

    ἐ. τῷ ὑβρίζεσθαι Th.1.38

    , cf.34, etc.;

    τι κακοτεχνεῖν ἐ. αἰσχύνῃ τοῦ ἀνδρός PEleph.1.6

     (iv B.C.).
    3. of the condition upon which a thing is done, ἐ. τούτοισι on these terms, Hdt.1.60, etc.;

    ἐ. τοῖσδε, ὥστε.. Th.3.114

    ; ἐ. τούτῳ, ἐπ' ᾧτε on condition that.., Hdt.3.83, cf. 7.158: in orat. obliq., ἐπ' or ἐφ' ᾧτε folld. by inf., Id.1.22, 7.154, X.HG2.2.20;

    ἐφ' ᾧ μηδὲν κακὸν ποιήσουσιν Th.1.126

     (but ἐφ' ᾧ = wherefore, Ep.Rom.5.12); ἐπ' οὐδενί on no condition, on no account, Hdt.3.38; but, for no adequate reason, D. 21.132; ἐπ' ἴσῃ τε καὶ ὁμοίῃ, ἐπὶ τῇ ἴσῃ καὶ ὁμοίᾳ, on fair and equal terms, Hdt.9.7, Th.1.27; ἐ. ῥητοῖς, v. ῥητός; also of a woman's dowry,

    τὴν μητέρα ἐγγυᾶν ἐ. ταῖς ὀγδοήκοντα μναῖς D.28.16

    ; γῆμαί

    τινα ἐ. δέκα ταλάντοις And.4.13

    ;

    τὴν θυγατέρα ἔχειν γυναῖκα ἐ. τῇ τυραννίδι Hdt.1.60

    ; on the principle of..,

    ἐ. τῷ μὴ λυπεῖν ἀλλήλους Th.1.71

    .
    4. of the price for which..,

    ἔργον τελέσαι δώρῳ ἔ. μεγάλῳ Il.10.304

    , cf. 21.445; ἐ. τίνι χρήματι; Hdt.3.38; ἐ. πόσῳ; Pl.Ap. 41a; ἐ .

    ταλάντῳ χρυσίου Ar.Av. 154

    ; ἐπ' ἀργυρίῳ λέγειν, πράττειν, D.19.182, 24.200;

    ἐ. χρήμασι λυμαίνεσθαι Id.19.332

    ;

    ἐ. πολλῷ ἐρρᾳθυμηκότες Id.1.15

    ; also of money lent at interest, δανείζεσθαι ἐ. τοῖς μεγάλοις τόκοις ibid.; ἐ. δραχμῇ δανείζειν lend at 12 per cent., Id.27.9; ἐπ' ὀκτὼ ὀβολοῖς τὴν μνᾶν τοῦ μηνὸς ἑκάστου δανείζειν, i.e. at 16 per cent., Id.53.13;

    ἐ. διακοσίαις εἴκοσι πέντε τὰς χιλίας

     for

    225

    per mille, i.e. 22.5 per cent., Syngr. ap. eund.35.10; also of the security on which money is borrowed,

    δανείζειν ἐ. ἀνδραπόδοις Id.27.27

    ; ἐπ' οἴνου

    κεραμίοις τρισχιλίοις Id.35.18

    ;

    ἐ. νηΐ Id.56.3

    ;

    δανείζειν ἐ. τοῖς σώμασιν Arist.Ath.9.1

    , cf. 2.2, D.H.4.9.
    5. of names, φάος καὶ νὺξ ὀνόμασται..

    ἐ. τοῖσί τε καὶ τοῖς Parm.9.2

    ;

    ἐ. τῇ τοῦ οἰκείου ἔχθρᾳ στάσις κέκληται Pl.R. 470b

    ; so

    ὄνομα κεῖται ἐ. τινι X.Cyr.2.2.12

    ; ὄνομα καλεῖν

    ἐ. τινι Pl.Sph. 218c

    , cf. 244b; πότερον ταῦτα, πέντε ὀνόματα ὄντα, ἐ.

    ἑνὶ πράγματί ἐστι Id.Prt. 349b

     (v. supr. A. 111.2).
    6. of persons in authority, ὅς μ' ἐ. βουσὶν εἷσεν who set me over the kine, Od.20.209, cf. 221;

    ποιμαίνειν ἐπ' ὄεσσι Il.6.25

    ;

    οὖρον κατέλειπον ἐ. κτεάτεσσιν Od.15.89

    ;

    σημαίνειν ἐ. δμῳῇσι 22.427

    ; πέμπειν ἐ. τοσούτῳ

    στρατεύματι Th.6.29

    ;

    ἐ. ταῖς ναυσίν X.HG1.5.11

    ;

    οἱ ἐ. ταῖς μηχαναῖς Id.Cyr.6.3.28

    ; οἱ ἐ. ταῖς καμήλοις ib.33;

    οἱ ἐ. τοῖς πράγμασιν ὄντες D. 9.2

    ;

    ἐ. θυγατρὶ.. γαμεῖν ἄλλην γυναῖκα Hdt.4.154

    .
    7. in possession of, possessing,

    ἐ. τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ μένειν Th.4.105

    , cf. 8.86; ζῆν ἐ. παιδίοις, τελευτᾶν ἐ. παιδὶ γνησίῳ, Alciphr.1.3, Philostr.VS2.12.2;

    ἐ. παισὶ διαδόχοις Hdn.4.2.1

    ;

    ἀποθανεῖν ἐ. κληρονόμοις ταῖς θυγατράσι Artem.1.78

    , cf. PMeyer6.22 (ii A.D.);

    ἐ. μόνῳ παιδὶ σαλεύειν Hld. 1.9

    .
    C. WITH Acc.:
    I. of Place, upon or on to a height, with Verbs of Motion,

    ἐ. πύργον ἔβη Il.6.386

    , cf. 12.375; ἐ. τὰ ὑψηλότατα τῶν

    ὀρέων ἀναβαίνειν Hdt.1.131

    ;

    προελθεῖν ἐ. βῆμα Th.2.34

    ; ἀναβιβαστέον τινά, ἀναβαίνειν ἐ. τὸν ἵππον, Pl.R. 467e, X.An.3.4.35; also ἐξ ἵππων

    ἀποβάντες ἐ. χθόνα Il.3.265

    ; ἐξεκυλίσθη πρηνὴς ἐ. στόμα upon his face, 6.43;

    ἐ. θρόνον.. ἕζετο 8.442

    ; ὤμω.. ἐ. στῆθος συνοχωκότε drawn together upon his breast, 2.218;

    Ὀδυσσῆ' εἷσαν ἐ. σκέπας Od.6.212

    ;

    θέσθαι ἐ. τὰ γόνατα X.An.7.3.23

    ;

    ἐπ' ἀμφότερα τὰ ὦτα καθεύδειν Aeschin.Socr.54

    ; ἐ. κεφαλήν head- foremost, Pl.R. 553b, Luc.Pisc.48 (v. κεφαλή): less freq. than ἐπί with gen. or dat.
    b. Geom., αἱ ἐ. τὰς ἁφὰς ἐπιζευγνύμεναι εὐθεῖαι joining the points of contact, Archim. Sph.Cyl.1.8; κάθετος ἐ. perpendicular to (v. κάθετος).
    2. to,

    ἦλθε θοὰς ἐ. νῆας Il.1.12

    , etc.; ἐ. βωμὸν ἄγων ib. 440; ἴθυσαν δ' ἐ.

    τεῖχος 12.443

    ;

    ἐ. τέρμ' ἀφίκετο S.Aj.48

    ;

    ἡ [ὁδὸς] ἐ. Σοῦσα φέρει X. An.3.5.15

    ;

    ἡ ὁδὸς ἡ ἀπὸ τῶν Πυλῶν ἐ. τὸ Ποσειδώνιον Th.4.118

    ; ἐ.

    τὸ αὐτὸ αἱ γνῶμαι ἔφερον Id.1.79

    : c.acc. pers.,

    βῆ δ' ἄρ' ἐπ' Ἀτρεΐδην Il.2.18

    , cf. 10.18,85, 150, etc.: sts. in pregn. constr. with Verbs of Rest,

    ἐπιστῆναι ἐ. τὰς θύρας Pl.Smp. 212d

    ;

    παρεῖναι ἐ. τὸν τάφον Th.2.34

    , cf. X.Cyr.3.3.12.
    b. metaph., ἐ. ἔργα τρέπεσθαι, ἰέναι, Il.3.422, Od.2.127;

    ἰέναι ἐ. τὸν ἔπαινον Th.2.36

    ;

    ἐ. συμφορὴν ἐμπεσεῖν Hdt.7.88

     codd.; also ἐ. τὴν τράπεζαν ἀποδιδόναι, ὀφείλειν, pay, owe to the bank, D.33.12, Docum. ap. eund.45.31; ἡ ἐγγύη ἡ ἐ. τὴν

    τράπεζαν D.33.10

    ; τὸ ἐ. τὴν τράπεζαν χρέως ib.24; also εἰσποιηθῆναι ἐ. τὸ ὄνομά τινος to be entered under his name, Id.44.36.
    c. up to, as far as ( μέχρι ἐ. X.An.5.1.[1]),

    παρατείνειν ἐπ' Ἡρακλέας στήλας Hdt.4.181

    ;

    ἐ. θάλασσαν καθήκειν Th.2.27

    ,97: metaph., ἐ. πείρατ' ἀέθλων

    ἤλθομεν Od.23.248

    ; ἐ. διηκόσια ἀποδιδόναι yield 200- fold, Hdt. 1.193; in measurements,

    πλέον ἢ ἐ. δύο στάδια X.Cyr.7.5.8

    , An.6.2.2; ὅσον ἐ. εἴκοσι σταδίους ib.6.4.5, cf. 1.7.15: freq. with a neut. Adj. or Pron.,

    τόσσον τίς τ' ἐπιλεύσσει ὅσον τ' ἐ. λᾶαν ἵησιν Il.3.12

    ; ὅσσον

    ἔφ' 2.616

    , cf. 15.358; ἐ. τοσοῦτό γε φρονέω,.. ταύτην μηδὲν σίνεσθαι I am prudent enough, not to.., Hdt.6.97;

    ἐ. ὅσον δεῖ Th.7.66

    ; ἐ.

    πάντ' ἀφίξομαι S.OT 265

    ;

    ἐ. πᾶν ἐλθεῖν X.An.3.1.18

    ; ἐ. τὸ ἔσχατον

    ἀγῶνος ἐλθεῖν Th.4.92

    ; ἐ. μεῖζον χωρεῖν, ἔρχεσθαι, ib. 117, S.Ph. 259;

    ἐ. μέγα χωρεῖν δυνάμεως Th.1.118

    ; ἐ. μακρότερον, ἐ. μακρότατον, Id.4.41, 1.1, Hdt.4.16, 192; ἐ. σμικρόν, ἐ. βραχύ, a little way, a little, S. El. 414, Th.1.118; ἐπ' ἔλαττον, ἐπ' ἐλάχιστον, Pl.Phd. 93b, Th.1.70; ἐπ' ὀλίγον, ἐ. πολλά, Pl.Sph. 254b; ἐ. πλέον still more, Hdt.2.171, 5.51, Th.2.51; rarely with Advs.,

    ἐ. μᾶλλον Hdt.1.94

    , 4.181.
    d. before, into the presence of (cf. A. 1.2e),

    ἦγον δή μιν ἐ. τὰ κοινά Id.3.156

     (but στὰς ἐ. τὸ συνέδριον standing at the door of the council, Id.8.79);

    ἐ. ἡγεμόνας καὶ βασιλεῖς ἀχθήσεσθε Ev.Matt.10.18

    .
    e. in Military phrases (cf. A. 1.2d), ἐπ' ἀσπίδας πέντε καὶ εἴκοσιν ἐτάξαντο, i.e. twenty-five in file, Th.4.93; dub. in X., as ἐ. πολλοὺς τεταγμένοι many in file, An.4.8.11 codd.;

    ἐπ' ὀλίγον τὸ βάθος γίγνεσθαι Cyr.7.5.2

     codd.; for ἐ. κέρας v. infr.3.
    3. of the quarter or direction towards or in which a thing takes place, ἐ. δεξιά, ἐπ' ἀριστερά, to the right or left, Il.7.238, 12.240, Od.3.171, Hdt.6.33, etc.; ἐ. τὰ ἕτερα or ἐ. θάτερα, Id.5.74, Th.1.87, etc.; ἐ. τὰ μακρότερα , βραχύτερα, on the longer, shorter side, Hdt.1.50; ἐπ' ἀμφότερα νοέων both ways, Id.8.22;

    ἐπ' ἀμφότερα μαχᾶν τάμνειν τέλος Pi.O.13.57

    , etc.; ἐ. τάδε Φασήλιδος on this side, Isoc.7.80; ἐ. ἐκεῖνα, v. ἐπέκεινα; ἐφ' ἕν, ἐ. δύο, ἐ. τρία, of space, in one, two, three dimensions, Arist.de An. 404b23, Plot.6.3.13; in Military phrases, ἐ. δόρυ ἀναστρέψαι ,ἐ. ἀσπίδα μεταβαλέσθαι, to the spear or shield side, i.e. to right or left, X.An.4.3.29, Cyr.7.5.6; ἐ. πόδα ἀναχωρεῖν, etc., retire on the foot, i.e. facing the enemy, Id.An.5.2.32; so ἐ. κέρας or ἐ. κέρως πλεῖν, etc., sail towards or on the wing, i.e. in column (v.

    κέρας v11

    ): metaph., ἐ. τὸ μεῖζον κοσμῆσαι, δεινῶσαι, etc., with exaggeration, Th.1.10, 8.74, etc.;

    ἐ. τὸ πλέον ἀγγέλλεσθαι Id.6.34

    ; ἐ. τὸ φοβερώτερον ib.83; ἐ. τὰ γελοιότερα ἐπαινέσαι so as to provoke laughter, Pl. Smp. 214e; ἐ. τὰ καλλίω, ἐ. τὰ αἰσχίονα, Id.Plt. 293e; ἐ. τὸ βέλτιον καὶ κάλλιον, ἐ. τὸ χεῖρον καὶ τὸ αἴσχιον, Id.R. 381b; ἐ. τὸ ἄμεινον Orac. ap. D.43.66.
    4. in hostile sense, against,

    ἰέναι ἐ. νέας Il. 13.101

    ;

    ὦρτο δ' ἐπ' αὐτούς 5.590

    ; στρατεύεσθαι or -εύειν ἐ. τινα, Hdt. 1.71,77, Th.1.26, etc.;

    ἰέναι ἐ. φάτιν S.OT 495

     (lyr.); πλεῖν ἐ. τοὺσ

    Ἀθηναίους Th.2.90

    ;

    πέμπειν στρατηγὸν ἐ. τινας Hdt.1.153

    ; θύεσθαι ἐ. τινα offer sacrifice on going against.., X.An.7.8.21; ἐφ' ὑμᾶς to your prejudice, D.6.33, 10.57.
    5. of extension over a space, πουλὺν ἐφ' ὑγρὴν ἤλυθον over much water, Il.10.27: ἐπ' εὐρέα νῶτα

    θαλάσσης 2.159

    ;

    ἐ. κύματα 13.27

    ;

    ὁρόων ἐπ' ἀπείρονα πόντον 1.350

    ; πλέων, λεύσσων ἐ. οἴνοπα πόντον, 7.88, 5.771;

    ἐ. πολλὰ δ' ἀλήθην Od. 14.120

    ;

    ἄγοισι.. Ἀνδρομάχαν.. ἐπ' ἄλμυρον πόντον Sapph.Supp. 20a

    . 7: also with Verbs of Rest, ἐπ' ἐννέα κεῖτο πέλεθρα over nine acres he lay stretched, Od.11.577; τόσσον ἔπ' over so much, 5.251, cf. 13.114; διώκοντες ἐ. πολύ over a large space, Th.1.50, cf. 62, etc.; ἐ. πλεῖστον ib.4;

    ὡς ἐ. πλεῖστον 2.34

    , etc.; freq. to be rendered on,

    δράκων ἐ. νῶτα δαφοινός Il.2.308

    ; ἵππους.. ἐ. νῶτον ἐΐσας ib. 765;

    ὅσσα τε γαῖαν ἔπι πνείει 17.447

    ; ἐ. γαῖαν εἰσὶ δύω [γένη] Hes.Op.11;

    ἀοιδοὶ ἔασιν ἐ. χθόνα Th.95

    ;

    ἐ. γᾶν μέλαιναν ἔμμεναι κάλλιστον Sapph. Supp.5.2

    ; also, among,

    κλέος πάντας ἐπ' ἀνθρώπους Il.10.213

    , cf. 24.202, 535;

    δασσάμενοι [κτήματ'] ἐφ' ἡμέας Od.16.385

    , cf. Pl.Prt. 322d.
    II. of Time, for or during a certain time,

    ἐ. χρόνον Il.2.299

    , Od.14.193:

    πολλὸν ἐ. χρόνον 12.407

    ;

    παυρίδιον.. ἐ. χρόνον Hes. Op. 133

    ;

    ἐ. δηρόν Il.9.415

    ;

    ἐ. πολὺν χρόνον Pl.Phd. 84c

    , etc.; ἐπ'

    ὀλίγον χρόνον Lycurg.7

    ; ἐ. χρόνον τινά, ἐ. τινα χρόνον, Pl.Prt. 344b, Grg. 524d;

    γῆν ἀπεμίσθωσαν ἐ. δέκα ἔτη Th.3.68

    ; ἐ. διετές Lexap.D. 46.20;

    ἐ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας X.An.6.6.36

    ; τὸ ἐφ' ἡμέραν ἀρκέσον enough for the day, Id.Cyr.6.2.34, cf. D.50.23, Hdt.1.32; ἐ. πολύ for a long time, Th.1.6, etc.
    2. up to, until a certain time, εὗδον παννύχιος

    καὶ ἐπ' ἠῶ καὶ μέσον ἦμαρ Od.7.288

    ;

    οὐδ' ἐ. γῆρας ἵκετ' 8.226

    .
    III. in various causal senses:
    1. of the object or purpose for which one goes, ἀγγελίην ἔπι Τυδῆ στεῖλαν sent him for (i.e. to bring) tidings of.., Il.4.384 (dub.); ἐ. βοῦν ἴτω let him go for an ox, Od.3.421;

    ἐ. τεύχεα δ' ἐσσεύοντο Il.2.808

    ;

    ἐλθεῖν πρός τινα ἐπ' ἀργύριον X.Cyr.1.6.12

    ; πέμπειν εἴς τινα ἐ. στράτευμα ib.4.5.31; ἴτω τις ἐφ' ὕδωρ ib.5.3.49; ἥκειν ἐ. τοὺς τόκους for (i.e. to demand) the interest, D.50.61: less freq. c. acc. pers.,

    ἐπ' Ὀδυσσῆα ἤϊε Od.5.149

    , cf. S.OT 555;

    κατῆλθον ἐ. ποιητήν Ar.Ra. 1418

    ;

    κατέρχονται ἐ. τὸν Ἀγόρατον Lys. 13.23

    : with acc. of a Noun of Action, ἐξιέναι ἐ. θήραν go out hunting, X.Cyr.1.2.9; ἔπλεον οὐχ ὡς ἐ. ναυμαχίαν (v.l. for -μαχίᾳ) Th.2.83;

    ἐ. μάχην ἰέναι X.An.1.4.12

    ; ἔρχεσθαι, ἵζειν ἐ. δεῖπνον, Il.2.381, Od.24.394;

    ἐ. δόρπον ἀνέστη 12.439

    ;

    κληθεὶς ἐ. δεῖπνον Pl.Smp. 174e

    , etc.;

    καλεῖν ἐ. ξείνια Hdt.2.107

    ,5.18; ἐ. τὴν θεωρίαν to see the sight, Ev.Luc.23.48, cf. PTeb.33.6 (ii B.C.): freq. with neut. Pron. or Adj., ἐ. τοῦτο ἐλθεῖν for this purpose, X.An.2.5.22, cf. Th.5.87; ἐπ' αὐτὸ

    τοῦτο Pl.Grg. 447b

    , etc.; ἐ. τί; to what end? Ar.Nu. 256;

    ἐφ' ὅ τι Id.Lys.22

    , 481; ἐφ' ἃ ἤλθομεν for which purpose, Th.7.15, etc.; ἐπὶ ἴσα for like ends, Pi.N.7.5 (but ἐ. ἶσα μάχη τέτατο, = ἴσως, Il.12.436); ἐ. τὸ βέλτιον to a better result, X.An.7.8.4; ἀναστῆσαί τινα ἐ. χριστὸν Θεοῦ set up as God's anointed, LXX 2 Ki.23.1: after an Adj., ἄριστοι πᾶσαν

    ἐπ' ἰθύν Il.6.79

    , cf. Od.4.434;

    ἄπορος ἐ. φρόνιμα S.OT 691

     (lyr.); χρήσιμος

    ἐ... οὐδέν D.25.31

    : after a Noun,

    ὁδὸς ἐ. τι X.Cyr.1.6.21

    ; ὄργανα ἐ. τι ib.6.2.34.
    2. so far as regards,

    τοὐπὶ τήνδε τὴν κόρην S.Ant. 889

    ;

    ὅσον γε τοὐπ' ἐμέ E.Or. 1345

    ; τοὐπί σε, τὸ ἐ. σέ, Id.Hec. 514, X.Cyr.1.4.12;

    τὸ ἐ. σφᾶς εἶναι Th.4.28

    ; ὡς ἐ. τὸ πολύ for the most part, Arist.Top. 100b29, etc.;

    ἐ. πᾶν Th.2.51

    ; τὸ πρὸς ἅπαν

    ξυνετὸν ἐ. πᾶν ἀργόν Id.3.82

    ;

    κρείσσων ἐπ' ἀρετήν Democr.181

    ; ἐ.

    μέγα Call.Dian.55

    .
    3. of persons set over others, ἐ. τοὺς πεζοὺς

    καθιστάναι ἄρχοντα X.Cyr.4.5.58

    , cf. HG3.4.20; στρατηγὸς ἐ. τοὺς ὁπλίτας, ἐ. τὴν χώραν, Arist.Ath.61.1, IG22.682.24;

    ἐ. τὸν Πειραιέα Arist.Ath.

    l.c.;

    ἐ. Ῥαμνοῦντα IG2.1206b

     (cf. A. 111.1); οἱ θεσμοθέται

    οἱ ἐ. τοὺς νόμους κληρούμενοι D.20.90

    .
    4. according to, by, ἐ. στάθμην by the rule, Od.5.245, 21.44, etc.
    D. POSITION:— ἐπί may suffer anastrophe ([etym.] ἔπι) and follow its case, as in Il.1.162; it may like wise follow its Verb,

    ἤλυθ' ἔπι ψυχή Od.24.20

    , cf. Il.9.539.
    II. in Poets it is sts. put with the second of two Nouns, though in sense it also governs the first, ἢ ἁλὸς ἢ ἐ.

    γῆς Od.12.27

    , cf. S.OT 761, Ant. 367 (lyr.).
    E. ABS., used adverbially, without anastrophe, καὶ ἐ. σκέπας

    ἦν ἀνέμοιο Od.5.443

    ; κτεῖνον δ' ἐ. μηλοβοτῆρας as well, Il.18.529; esp. ἐ. δέ.. and besides.., Hdt.7.65,75, etc.;

    πολιαί τ' ἐ. ματέρες S. OT 182

     (lyr.).
    II. ἔπι, for ἔπεστι, there is, Il.1.515, 3.45, Od.16.315; οὐ γὰρ ἔπ' ἀνήρ.. there is no man.., 2.58; σοὶ δ' ἔ. μὲν μορφὴ

    ἐπέων 11.367

    ;

    ἔ. δέ μοι γέρας A.Eu. 393

     codd. (lyr.).
    F. PROSODY: in ἐπιόψομαι, ι is not elided before a vowel; also in some words where σ or ϝ has been lost, as ἐπιάλμενος, ἐπιείκελος, ἐπιεικής, ἐπιέξομαι (v.

    ἐπέχω v11

    ). [dialect] Dor. ἐπιεργάζομαι (v. ἐπιεργάζομαι).
    G. IN COMPOSITION:
    I. of Place, denoting,
    1. Support or Rest upon, ἔπειμι (A), ἐπίκειμαι, ἐπικαθίζω, ἐπαυχένιος, ἐπιβώμιος, etc.
    2. Motion,
    a. upon or over, ἐπιβαίνω, ἐπιτρέχω.
    b. to or towards, ἐπέρχομαι, ἐπιστέλλω, ἐπαρίστερος, ἐπιδέξιος.
    c. against,

    ἐπαΐσσω, ἐπιπλέω 11

    , ἐπιστρατεύω, ἐπιβουλεύω.
    e. over a place, as in ἐπαιωρέομαι, ἐπαρτάω.
    f. over or beyond boundaries, as in ἐπινέμομαι.
    g. implying reciprocity, as in ἐπιγαμία.
    3. Extension over a surface, as in ἐπαλείφω, ἐπανθίζω,

    ἐπιπέτομαι, ἐπιπλέω 1

    , ἐπάργυρος, ἐπίχρυσος.
    4. Accumulation of one thing over or besides another, as in ἐπαγείρω, ἐπιμανθάνω, ἐπαυξάνω, ἐπιβάλλω, ἐπίκτητος.
    5. Accompaniment, to, with, as in ἐπᾴδω, ἐπαυλέω, ἐπαγρυπνέω: hence of Addition, ἐπίτριτος one and 1/3 more, 1 +1/3; so ἐπιτέταρτος, ἐπίπεμπτος, ἐπόγδοος, etc.
    6. with Adjs., somewhat, slightly, as in ἐπίξανθος, ἐπίπικρος.
    II. of Time and Sequence, after, as in ἐπιβιόω, ἐπιβλαστάνω, ἐπιγίγνομαι,

    ἐπακόλουθος, ἐπίγονος, ἐπιστάτης 1.2

    .
    III. in causal senses:
    1. Superiority felt over or at, as in ἐπιχαίρω, ἐπιγελάω, ἐπαισχύνομαι.
    2. Authority over, as in ἐπικρατέω, ἔπαρχος, ἐπιβουκόλος, ἐπιποιμήν.
    3. Motive for, as in ἐπιθυμέω, ἐπιζήμιος, ἐπιθάνατος.
    4. to give force or intensity to the Verb, as in ἐπαινέω, ἐπιμέμφομαι, ἐπικείρω, ἐπικλάω.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἐπί

  • 10 ὁ

    ὁ, ἡ, τό pl. οἱ, αἱ, τά article, derived fr. a demonstrative pronoun, ‘the’. Since the treatment of the inclusion and omission of the art. belongs to the field of grammar, the lexicon can limit itself to exhibiting the main features of its usage. It is difficult to set hard and fast rules for the employment of the art., since the writer’s style had special freedom of play here—Kühner-G. I p. 589ff; B-D-F §249–76; Mlt. 80–84; Rob. 754–96; W-S. §17ff; Rdm.2 112–18; Abel §28–32; HKallenberg, RhM 69, 1914, 642ff; FVölker, Syntax d. griech. Papyri I, Der Artikel, Progr. d. Realgymn. Münster 1903; FEakin, AJP 37, 1916, 333ff; CMiller, ibid. 341ff; EColwell, JBL 52, ’33, 12–21 (for a critique s. Mlt-H.-Turner III 183f); ASvensson, D. Gebr. des bestimmten Art. in d. nachklass. Epik ’37; RFink, The Syntax of the Greek Article ’53; JRoberts, Exegetical Helps, The Greek Noun with and without the Article: Restoration Qtly 14, ’71, 28–44; HTeeple, The Greek Article with Personal Names in the Synoptic Gospels: NTS 19, ’73, 302–17; Mussies 186–97.
    ① this one, that one, the art. funct. as demonstrative pronoun
    ⓐ in accordance w. epic usage (Hes., Works 450: ἡ=this [voice]) in the quot. fr. Arat., Phaenom. 5 τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν for we are also his (lit. this One’s) offspring Ac 17:28.
    ⓑ ὁ μὲν … ὁ δέ the one … the other (Polyaenus 6, 2, 1 ὁ μὲν … ὁ δὲ … ὁ δε; PSI 512, 21 [253 B.C.]); pl. οἱ μὲν … οἱ δέ (PSI 341, 9 [256 B.C.]; TestJob 29:1) some … others w. ref. to a noun preceding: ἐσχίσθη τὸ πλῆθος … οἱ μὲν ἦσαν σὺν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις, οἱ δὲ σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις Ac 14:4; 17:32; 28:24; 1 Cor 7:7; Gal 4:23; Phil 1:16f. Also without such a relationship expressed τοὺς μὲν ἀποστόλους, τοὺς δὲ προφήτας, τοὺς δὲ εὐαγγελιστάς Eph 4:11. οἱ μὲν … ὁ δέ Hb 7:5f, 20f. οἱ μὲν … ἄλλοι (δέ) J 7:12. οἱ μὲν … ἄλλοι δὲ … ἕτεροι δέ Mt 16:14. τινὲς … οἱ δέ Ac 17:18 (cp. Pla., Leg. 1, 627a; 2, 658 B.; Aelian, VH 2, 34; Palaeph. 6, 5).—Mt 26:67; 28:17 οἱ δέ introduces a second class; just before this, instead of the first class, the whole group is mentioned (cp. X., Hell. 1, 2, 14, Cyr. 3, 2, 12; KMcKay, JSNT 24, ’85, 71f)= but some (as Arrian, Anab. 5, 2, 7; 5, 14, 4; Lucian, Tim. 4 p. 107; Hesych. Miles. [VI A.D.]: 390 Fgm. 1, 35 end Jac.).
    ⓒ To indicate the progress of the narrative, ὁ δέ, οἱ δέ but he, but they (lit. this one, they) is also used without ὁ μέν preceding (likew. Il. 1, 43; Pla., X.; also Clearchus, Fgm. 76b τὸν δὲ εἰπεῖν=but this man said; pap examples in Mayser II/1, 1926, 57f) e.g. Mt 2:9, 14; 4:4; 9:31; Mk 14:31 (cp. Just., A II, 2, 3). ὁ μὲν οὖν Ac 23:18; 28:5. οἱ μὲν οὖν 1:6; 5:41; 15:3, 30.—JO’Rourke, Paul’s Use of the Art. as a Pronoun, CBQ 34, ’72, 59–65.
    ② the, funct. to define or limit an entity, event, or state
    ⓐ w. nouns
    α. w. appellatives, or common nouns, where, as in Pla., Thu., Demosth. et al., the art. has double significance, specific or individualizing, and generic.
    א. In its individualizing use it focuses attention on a single thing or single concept, as already known or otherwise more definitely limited: things and pers. that are unique in kind: ὁ ἥλιος, ἡ σελήνη, ὁ οὐρανός, ἡ γῆ, ἡ θάλασσα, ὁ κόσμος, ἡ κτίσις, ὁ θεός (BWeiss [s. on θεός, beg.]), ὁ διάβολος, ὁ λόγος (J 1:1, 14), τὸ φῶς, ἡ σκοτία, ἡ ζωή, ὁ θάνατος etc. (but somet. the art. is omitted, esp. when nouns are used w. preps.; B-D-F §253, 1–4; Rob. 791f; Mlt-Turner 171). ἐν συναγωγῇ καὶ ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ J 18:20.—Virtues, vices, etc. (contrary to Engl. usage): ἡ ἀγάπη, ἡ ἀλήθεια, ἡ ἁμαρτία, ἡ δικαιοσύνη, ἡ σοφία et al.—The individualizing art. stands before a common noun that was previously mentioned (without the art.): τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους Lk 9:16 (after πέντε ἄρτοι vs. 13). τὸ βιβλίον 4:17b (after βιβλίον, vs. 17a), τοὺς μάγους Mt 2:7 (after μάγοι, vs. 1). J 4:43 (40); 12:6 (5); 20:1 (19:41); Ac 9:17 (11); Js 2:3 (2); Rv 15:6 (1).—The individ. art. also stands before a common noun which, in a given situation, is given special attention as the only or obvious one of its kind (Hipponax [VI B.C.] 13, 2 West=D.3 16 ὁ παῖς the [attending] slave; Diod S 18, 29, 2 ὁ ἀδελφός=his brother; Artem. 4, 71 p. 245, 19 ἡ γυνή=your wife; ApcEsdr 6:12 p. 31, 17 μετὰ Μωσῆ … ἐν τῷ ὄρει [Sinai]; Demetr. (?): 722 fgm 7 Jac. [in Eus., PE 9, 19, 4] ἐπὶ τὸ ὄρος [Moriah]) τῷ ὑπηρέτῃ to the attendant (who took care of the synagogue) Lk 4:20. εἰς τὸν νιπτῆρα into the basin (that was there for the purpose) J 13:5. ἰδοὺ ὁ ἄνθρωπο here is this (wretched) man 19:5. ἐκ τῆς παιδίσκης or ἐλευθέρας by the (well-known) slave woman or the free woman (Hagar and Sarah) Gal 4:22f. τὸν σῖτον Ac 27:38. ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ 1 Cor 5:9 (s. ἐπιστολή) τὸ ὄρος the mountain (nearby) Mt 5:1; 8:1; 14:23; Mk 3:13; 6:46; Lk 6:12; 9:28 al.; ἡ πεισμονή this (kind of) persuasion Gal 5:8. ἡ μαρτυρία the (required) witness or testimony J 5:36.—The art. takes on the idea of κατʼ ἐξοχήν ‘par excellence’ (Porphyr., Abst. 24, 7 ὁ Αἰγύπτιος) ὁ ἐρχόμενος the one who is (was) to come or the coming one par excellence=The Messiah Mt 11:3; Lk 7:19. ὁ προφήτης J 1:21, 25; 7:40. ὁ διδάσκαλος τ. Ἰσραήλ 3:10 (Ps.-Clem., Hom. 5, 18 of Socrates: ὁ τῆς Ἑλλάδος διδάσκαλος); cp. MPol 12:2. With things (Stephan. Byz. s.v. Μάρπησσα: οἱ λίθοι=the famous stones [of the Parian Marble]) ἡ κρίσις the (last) judgment Mt 12:41. ἡ ἡμέρα the day of decision 1 Cor 3:13; (cp. Mi 4:6 Mt); Hb 10:25. ἡ σωτηρία (our) salvation at the consummation of the age Ro 13:11.
    ב. In its generic use it singles out an individual who is typical of a class, rather than the class itself: ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος Mt 12:35. κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον 15:11. ὥσπερ ὁ ἐθνικός 18:17. ὁ ἐργάτης Lk 10:7. ἐγίνωσκεν τί ἦν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ J 2:25. τὰ σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου 2 Cor 12:12. ὁ κληρονόμος Gal 4:1. So also in parables and allegories: ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης Mt 24:43. Cp. J 10:11b, 12. The generic art. in Gk. is often rendered in Engl. by the indef. art. or omitted entirely.
    β. The use of the art. w. personal names is varied; as a general rule the presence of the art. w. a personal name indicates that the pers. is known; without the art. focus is on the name as such (s. Dssm., BPhW 22, 1902, 1467f; BWeiss, D. Gebr. des Art. b. d. Eigennamen [im NT]: StKr 86, 1913, 349–89). Nevertheless, there is an unmistakable drift in the direction of Mod. Gk. usage, in which every proper name has the art. (B-D-F §260; Rob. 759–61; Mlt-Turner 165f). The ms. tradition varies considerably. In the gospels the art. is usu. found w. Ἰησοῦς; yet it is commonly absent when Ἰ. is accompanied by an appositive that has the art. Ἰ. ὁ Γαλιλαῖος Mt 26:69; Ἰ. ὁ Ναζωραῖος vs. 71; Ἰ. ὁ λεγόμενος Χριστός 27:17, 22. Sim. Μαριὰμ ἡ μήτηρ τοῦ Ἰ. Ac 1:14. The art. somet. stands before oblique cases of indecl. proper names, apparently to indicate their case (B-D-F §260, 2; Rob. 760). But here, too, there is no hard and fast rule.—HTeeple, NTS 19, ’73, 302–17 (synopt.).
    γ. The art. is customarily found w. the names of countries (B-D-F §261, 4; W-S. § 18, 5 d; Rob. 759f); less freq. w. names of cities (B-D-F §261, 1; 2; Rob. 760; Mlt-Turner 170–72). W. Ἰερουσαλήμ, Ἱεροσόλυμα it is usu. absent (s. Ἱεροσόλυμα); it is only when this name has modifiers that it must have the art. ἡ νῦν Ἰ. Gal 4:25; ἡ ἄνω Ἰ. vs. 26; ἡ καινὴ Ἰ. Rv 3:12. But even in this case it lacks the art. when the modifier follows: Hb 12:22.—Names of rivers have the art. ὁ Ἰορδάνης, ὁ Εὐφράτης, ὁ Τίβερις Hv 1, 1, 2 (B-D-F §261, 8; Rob. 760; Mlt-Turner 172). Likew. names of seas ὁ Ἀδρίας Ac 27:27.
    δ. The art. comes before nouns that are accompanied by the gen. of a pronoun (μοῦ, σοῦ, ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, αὐτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ, αὐτῶν) Mt 1:21, 25; 5:45; 6:10–12; 12:49; Mk 9:17; Lk 6:27; 10:7; 16:6; Ro 4:19; 6:6 and very oft. (only rarely is it absent: Mt 19:28; Lk 1:72; 2:32; 2 Cor 8:23; Js 5:20 al.).
    ε. When accompanied by the possessive pronouns ἐμός, σός, ἡμέτερος, ὑμέτερος the noun always has the art., and the pron. stands mostly betw. art. and noun: Mt 18:20; Mk 8:38; Lk 9:26; Ac 26:5; Ro 3:7 and oft. But only rarely so in John: J 4:42; 5:47; 7:16. He prefers to repeat the article w. the possessive following the noun ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμή J 5:30; cp. 7:6; 17:17; 1J 1:3 al.
    ζ. Adjectives (or participles), when they modify nouns that have the art., also come either betw. the art. and noun: ἡ ἀγαθὴ μερίς Lk 10:42; τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα 12:10; Ac 1:8; ἡ δικαία κρίσις J 7:24 and oft., or after the noun w. the art. repeated τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον Mk 3:29; J 14:26; Ac 1:16; Hb 3:7; 9:8; 10:15. ἡ ζωὴ ἡ αἰώνιος 1J 1:2; 2:25. τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν Ac 12:10. Only rarely does an adj. without the art. stand before a noun that has an art. (s. B-D-F §270, 1; Rob. 777; Mlt-Turner 185f): ἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κεφαλῇ 1 Cor 11:5. εἶπεν μεγάλῃ τῇ φωνῇ Ac 14:10 v.l.; cp. 26:24. κοιναῖς ταῖς χερσίν Mk 7:5 D.—Double modifier τὸ πῦρ τὸ αἰώνιον τὸ ἡτοιμασμένον τῷ διαβόλῳ Mt 25:41. τὸ θυσιαστήριον τὸ χρυσοῦν τὸ ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου Rv 8:3; 9:13. ἡ πόρνη ἡ μεγάλη ἡ καθημένη 17:1.—Mk 5:36 τὸν λόγον λαλούμενον is prob. a wrong rdg. (B has τὸν λαλ., D τοῦτον τὸν λ. without λαλούμενον).—On the art. w. ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς s. the words in question.
    η. As in the case of the poss. pron. (ε) and adj. (ζ), so it is w. other expressions that can modify a noun: ἡ κατʼ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις Ro 9:11. ἡ παρʼ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη 11:27. ὁ λόγος ὁ τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 Cor 1:18. ἡ ἐντολὴ ἡ εἰς ζωήν Ro 7:10. ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν 1 Th 1:8. ἡ διακονία ἡ εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 2 Cor 8:4.
    θ. The art. precedes the noun when a demonstrative pron. (ὅδε, οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging with it comes before or after; e.g.: οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος Lk 14:30; J 9:24. οὗτος ὁ λαός Mk 7:6. οὗτος ὁ υἱός μου Lk 15:24. οὗτος ὁ τελώνης 18:11 and oft. ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος Mk 14:71; Lk 2:25; 23:4, 14, 47. ὁ λαὸς οὗτος Mt 15:8. ὁ υἱός σου οὗτος Lk 15:30 and oft.—ἐκείνη ἡ ἡμέρα Mt 7:22; 22:46. ἐκ. ἡ ὥρα 10:19; 18:1; 26:55. ἐκ. ὁ καιρός 11:25; 12:1; 14:1. ἐκ. ὁ πλάνος 27:63 and oft. ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη Mt 7:25, 27. ἡ ὥρα ἐκ. 8:13; 9:22; ἡ γῆ ἐκ. 9:26, 31; ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκ. 13:1. ὁ ἀγρὸς ἐκ. vs. 44 and oft.—ὁ αὐτός s. αὐτός 3b.
    ι. An art. before a nom. noun makes it a vocative (as early as Hom.; s. KBrugman4-AThumb, Griech. Gramm. 1913, 431; Schwyzer II 63f; B-D-F §147; Rob. 769. On the LXX Johannessohn, Kasus 14f.—ParJer 1:1 Ἰερεμία ὁ ἐκλεκτός μου; 7:2 χαῖρε Βαρούχι ὁ οἰκονόμος τῆς πίστεως) ναί, ὁ πατήρ Mt 11:26. τὸ κοράσιον, ἔγειρε Mk 5:41. Cp. Mt 7:23; 27:29 v.l.; Lk 8:54; 11:39; 18:11, 13 (Goodsp, Probs. 85–87); J 19:3 and oft.
    ⓑ Adjectives become substantives by the addition of the art.
    α. ὁ πονηρός Eph 6:16. οἱ σοφοί 1 Cor 1:27. οἱ ἅγιοι, οἱ πλούσιοι, οἱ πολλοί al. Likew. the neut. τὸ κρυπτόν Mt 6:4. τὸ ἅγιον 7:6. τὸ μέσον Mk 3:3. τὸ θνητόν 2 Cor 5:4. τὰ ἀδύνατα Lk 18:27. τὸ ἔλαττον Hb 7:7. Also w. gen. foll. τὰ ἀγαθά σου Lk 16:25. τὸ μωρόν, τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 1:25; cp. vs. 27f. τὸ γνωστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 1:19. τὰ ἀόρατα τοῦ θεοῦ vs. 20. τὸ ἀδύνατον τοῦ νόμου 8:3. τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης 2 Cor 4:2.
    β. Adj. attributes whose noun is customarily omitted come to have substantive force and therefore receive the art. (B-D-F §241; Rob. 652–54) ἡ περίχωρος Mt 3:5; ἡ ξηρά 23:15 (i.e. γῆ). ἡ ἀριστερά, ἡ δεξιά (sc. χείρ) 6:3. ἡ ἐπιοῦσα (sc. ἡμέρα) Ac 16:11. ἡ ἔρημος (sc. χώρα) Mt 11:7.
    γ. The neut. of the adj. w. the art. can take on the mng. of an abstract noun (Thu. 1, 36, 1 τὸ δεδιός=fear; Herodian 1, 6, 9; 1, 11, 5 τὸ σεμνὸν τῆς παρθένου; M. Ant. 1, 1; Just., D. 27, 2 διὰ τὸ σκληροκάρδιον ὑμῶν καὶ ἀχάριστον εἰς αὐτόν) τὸ χρηστὸν τοῦ θεοῦ God’s kindness Ro 2:4. τὸ δυνατόν power 9:22. τὸ σύμφορον benefit 1 Cor 7:35. τὸ γνήσιον genuineness 2 Cor 8:8. τὸ ἐπιεικές Phil 4:5 al.
    δ. The art. w. numerals indicates, as in Il. 5, 271f; X. et al. (HKallenberg, RhM 69, 1914, 662ff), that a part of a number already known is being mentioned (Diod S 18, 10, 2 τρεῖς μὲν φυλὰς … τὰς δὲ ἑπτά=‘but the seven others’; Plut., Cleom. 804 [8, 4] οἱ τέσσαρες=‘the other four’; Polyaenus 6, 5 οἱ τρεῖς=‘the remaining three’; Diog. L. 1, 82 Βίας προκεκριμένος τῶν ἑπτά=Bias was preferred before the others of the seven [wise men]. B-D-F §265): οἱ ἐννέα the other nine Lk 17:17. Cp. 15:4; Mt 18:12f. οἱ δέκα the other ten (disciples) 20:24; Mk 10:41; lepers Lk 17:17. οἱ πέντε … ὁ εἷς … ὁ ἄλλος five of them … one … the last one Rv 17:10.
    ⓒ The ptc. w. the art. receives
    α. the mng. of a subst. ὁ πειράζων the tempter Mt 4:3; 1 Th 3:5. ὁ βαπτίζων Mk 6:14. ὁ σπείρων Mt 13:3; Lk 8:5. ὁ ὀλεθρεύων Hb 11:28. τὸ ὀφειλόμενον Mt 18:30, 34. τὸ αὐλούμενον 1 Cor 14:7. τὸ λαλούμενον vs. 9 (Just., D. 32, 3 τὸ ζητούμενον). τὰ γινόμενα Lk 9:7. τὰ ἐρχόμενα J 16:13. τὰ ἐξουθενημένα 1 Cor 1:28. τὰ ὑπάρχοντα (s. ὑπάρχω 1). In Engl. usage many of these neuters are transl. by a relative clause, as in β below. B-D-F §413; Rob. 1108f.
    β. the mng. of a relative clause (Ar. 4, 2 al. οἱ νομίζοντες) ὁ δεχόμενος ὑμᾶς whoever receives you Mt 10:40. τῷ τύπτοντί σε Lk 6:29. ὁ ἐμὲ μισῶν J 15:23. οὐδὲ γὰρ ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον τὸ δεδομένον (ὸ̔ δέδοται) Ac 4:12. τινές εἰσιν οἱ ταράσσοντες ὑμᾶς Gal 1:7. Cp. Lk 7:32; 18:9; J 12:12; Col 2:8; 1 Pt 1:7; 2J 7; Jd 4 al. So esp. after πᾶς: πᾶς ὁ ὀργιζόμενος everyone who becomes angry Mt 5:22. πᾶς ὁ κρίνων Ro 2:1 al. After μακάριος Mt 5:4, 6, 10. After οὐαὶ ὑμῖν Lk 6:25.
    ⓓ The inf. w. neut. art. (B-D-F §398ff; Rob. 1062–68) is used in a number of ways.
    α. It stands for a noun (B-D-F §399; Rob. 1062–66) τὸ (ἀνίπτοις χερσὶν) φαγεῖν Mt 15:20. τὸ (ἐκ νεκρῶν) ἀναστῆναι Mk 9:10. τὸ ἀγαπᾶν 12:33; cp. Ro 13:8. τὸ ποιῆσαι, τὸ ἐπιτελέσαι 2 Cor 8:11. τὸ καθίσαι Mt 20:23. τὸ θέλειν Ro 7:18; 2 Cor 8:10.—Freq. used w. preps. ἀντὶ τοῦ, διὰ τό, διὰ τοῦ, ἐκ τοῦ, ἐν τῷ, ἕνεκεν τοῦ, ἕως τοῦ, μετὰ τό, πρὸ τοῦ, πρὸς τό etc.; s. the preps. in question (B-D-F §402–4; Rob. 1068–75).
    β. The gen. of the inf. w. the art., without a prep., is esp. frequent (B-D-F §400; Mlt. 216–18; Rob. 1066–68; DEvans, ClQ 15, 1921, 26ff). The use of this inf. is esp. common in Lk and Paul, less freq. in Mt and Mk, quite rare in other writers. The gen. stands
    א. dependent on words that govern the gen.: ἄξιον 1 Cor 16:4 (s. ἄξιος 1c). ἐξαπορηθῆναι τοῦ ζῆν 2 Cor 1:8. ἔλαχε τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι Lk 1:9 (cp. 1 Km 14:47 v.l. Σαοὺλ ἔλαχεν τοῦ βασιλεύειν).
    ב. dependent on a noun (B-D-F §400, 1; Rob. 1066f) ὁ χρόνος τοῦ τεκεῖν Lk 1:57. ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν 2:6. ἐξουσία τοῦ πατεῖν 10:19. εὐκαιρία τοῦ παραδοῦναι 22:6. ἐλπὶς τοῦ σῴζεσθαι Ac 27:20; τοῦ μετέχειν 1 Cor 9:10. ἐπιποθία τοῦ ἐλθεῖν Ro 15:23. χρείαν ἔχειν τοῦ διδάσκειν Hb 5:12. καιρὸς τοῦ ἄρξασθαι 1 Pt 4:17. τ. ἐνέργειαν τοῦ δύνασθαι the power that enables him Phil 3:21. ἡ προθυμία τοῦ θέλειν zeal in desiring 2 Cor 8:11.
    ג. Somet. the connection w. the noun is very loose, and the transition to the consecutive sense (=result) is unmistakable (B-D-F §400, 2; Rob. 1066f): ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμέραι ὀκτὼ τοῦ περιτεμεῖν αὐτόν Lk 2:21. ὀφειλέται … τοῦ κατὰ σάρκα ζῆν Ro 8:12. εἰς ἀκαθαρσίαν τοῦ ἀτιμάζεσθαι 1:24. ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ μὴ βλέπειν 11:8. τὴν ἔκβασιν τοῦ δύνασθαι ὑπενεγκεῖν 1 Cor 10:13.
    ד. Verbs of hindering, ceasing take the inf. w. τοῦ μή (s. Schwyzer II 372 for earlier Gk; PGen 16, 23 [207 A.D.] κωλύοντες τοῦ μὴ σπείρειν; LXX; ParJer 2:5 φύλαξαι τοῦ μὴ σχίσαι τὰ ἱμάτιά σου): καταπαύειν Ac 14:18. κατέχειν Lk 4:42. κρατεῖσθαι 24:16. κωλύειν Ac 10:47. παύειν 1 Pt 3:10 (Ps 33:14). ὑποστέλλεσθαι Ac 20:20, 27. Without μή: ἐγκόπτεσθαι τοῦ ἐλθεῖν Ro 15:22.
    ה. The gen. of the inf. comes after verbs of deciding, exhorting, commanding, etc. (1 Ch 19:19; ParJer 7:37 διδάσκων αὐτοὺ τοῦ ἀπέχεσθαι) ἐγένετο γνώμης Ac 20:3. ἐντέλλεσθαι Lk 4:10 (Ps 90:11). ἐπιστέλλειν Ac 15:20. κατανεύειν Lk 5:7. κρίνειν Ac 27:1. παρακαλεῖν 21:12. προσεύχεσθαι Js 5:17. τὸ πρόσωπον στηρίζειν Lk 9:51. συντίθεσθαι Ac 23:20.
    ו. The inf. w. τοῦ and τοῦ μή plainly has final (=purpose) sense (ParJer 5:2 ἐκάθισεν … τοῦ ἀναπαῆναι ὀλίγον; Soph., Lex. I 45f; B-D-F §400, 5 w. exx. fr. non-bibl. lit. and pap; Rob. 1067): ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων τοῦ σπείρειν a sower went out to sow Mt 13:3. ζητεῖν τοῦ ἀπολέσαι = ἵνα ἀπολέσῃ 2:13. τοῦ δοῦναι γνῶσιν Lk 1:77. τοῦ κατευθῦναι τοὺς πόδας vs. 79. τοῦ σινιάσαι 22:31. τοῦ μηκέτι δουλεύειν Ro 6:6. τοῦ ποιῆσαι αὐτά Gal 3:10. τοῦ γνῶναι αὐτόν Phil 3:10. Cp. Mt 3:13; 11:1; 24:45; Lk 2:24, 27; 8:5; 24:29; Ac 3:2; 20:30; 26:18; Hb 10:7 (Ps 39:9); 11:5; GJs 2:3f; 24:1.—The apparently solecistic τοῦ πολεμῆσαι Ro 12:7 bears a Semitic tinge, cp. Hos 9:13 et al. (Mussies 96).—The combination can also express
    ז. consecutive mng. (result): οὐδὲ μετεμελήθητε τοῦ πιστεῦσαι αὐτῷ you did not change your minds and believe him Mt 21:32. τοῦ μὴ εἶναι αὐτὴν μοιχαλίδα Ro 7:3. τοῦ ποιεῖν τὰ βρέφη ἔκθετα Ac 7:19. Cp. 3:12; 10:25.
    ⓔ The art. is used w. prepositional expressions (Artem. 4, 33 p. 224, 7 ὁ ἐν Περγάμῳ; 4, 36 ὁ ἐν Μαγνησίᾳ; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010 recto, 8–12] οἱ ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις … οἱ ἐν τοῖς ὄρεσι καὶ μετεώροις; Tat. 31, 2 οἱ μὲν περὶ Κράτητα … οἱ δὲ περὶ Ἐρατοσθένη) τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς ἐν Κεγχρεαῖς Ro 16:1. ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις ταῖς ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ Rv 1:4. τῷ ἀγγέλῳ τῆς ἐν (w. place name) ἐκκλησίας 2:1, 8, 12, 18; 3:1, 7, 14 (on these pass. RBorger, TRu 52, ’87, 42–45). τοῖς ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ to those in the house Mt 5:15. πάτερ ἡμῶν ὁ ἐν τ. οὐρανοῖς 6:9. οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας Hb 13:24. οἱ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ Ro 8:1. οἱ ἐξ ἐριθείας 2:8. οἱ ἐκ νόμου 4:14; cp. vs. 16. οἱ ἐκ τῆς Καίσαρος οἰκίας Phil 4:22. οἱ ἐξ εὐωνύμων Mt 25:41. τὸ θυσιαστήριον … τὸ ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου Rv 8:3; cp. 9:13. On 1:4 s. ref in B-D-F §136, 1 to restoration by Nestle. οἱ παρʼ αὐτοῦ Mk 3:21. οἱ μετʼ αὐτοῦ Mt 12:3. οἱ περὶ αὐτόν Mk 4:10; Lk 22:49 al.—Neut. τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ πλοίου pieces of wreckage fr. the ship Ac 27:44 (difft. FZorell, BZ 9, 1911, 159f). τὰ περί τινος Lk 24:19, 27; Ac 24:10; Phil 1:27 (Tat. 32, 2 τὰ περὶ θεοῦ). τὰ περί τινα 2:23. τὰ κατʼ ἐμέ my circumstances Eph 6:21; Phil 1:12; Col 4:7. τὰ κατὰ τὸν νόμον what (was to be done) according to the law Lk 2:39. τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν Ro 12:18. τὰ πρὸς τὸν θεόν 15:17; Hb 2:17; 5:1 (X., Resp. Lac. 13, 11 ἱερεῖ τὰ πρὸς τοὺς θεούς, στρατηγῷ δὲ τὰ πρὸς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους). τὰ παρʼ αὐτῶν Lk 10:7. τὸ ἐν ἐμοί the (child) in me GJs 12:2 al.
    ⓕ w. an adv. or adverbial expr. (1 Macc 8:3) τὸ ἔμπροσθεν Lk 19:4. τὸ ἔξωθεν Mt 23:25. τὸ πέραν Mt 8:18, 28. τὰ ἄνω J 8:23; Col 3:1f. τὰ κάτω J 8:23. τὰ ὀπίσω Mk 13:16. τὰ ὧδε matters here Col 4:9. ὁ πλησίον the neighbor Mt 5:43. οἱ καθεξῆς Ac 3:24. τὸ κατὰ σάρκα Ro 9:5. τὸ ἐκ μέρους 1 Cor 13:10.—Esp. w. indications of time τό, τὰ νῦν s. νῦν 2b. τὸ πάλιν 2 Cor 13:2. τὸ λοιπόν 1 Cor 7:29; Phil 3:1. τὸ πρῶτον J 10:40; 12:16; 19:39. τὸ πρότερον 6:62; Gal 4:13. τὸ καθʼ ἡμέραν daily Lk 11:3.—τὸ πλεῖστον at the most 1 Cor 14:27.
    ⓖ The art. w. the gen. foll. denotes a relation of kinship, ownership, or dependence: Ἰάκωβος ὁ τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου Mt 10:2 (Thu. 4, 104 Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου [sc. υἱός]; Plut., Timol. 3, 2; Appian, Syr. 26 §123 Σέλευκος ὁ Ἀντιόχου; Jos., Bell. 5, 5; 11). Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου Lk 24:10. ἡ τοῦ Οὐρίου the wife of Uriah Mt 1:6. οἱ Χλόης Chloë’s people 1 Cor 1:11. οἱ Ἀριστοβούλου, οἱ Ναρκίσσου Ro 16:10f. οἱ αὐτοῦ Ac 16:33. οἱ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Cor 15:23; Gal 5:24. Καισάρεια ἡ Φιλίππου Caesarea Philippi i.e. the city of Philip Mk 8:27.—τό, τά τινος someone’s things, affairs, circumstances (Thu. 4, 83 τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου; Parthenius 1, 6; Appian, Syr. 16 §67 τὰ Ῥωμαίων) τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, τῶν ἀνθρώπων Mt 16:23; 22:21; Mk 8:33; cp. 1 Cor 2:11. τὰ τῆς σαρκός, τοῦ πνεύματος Ro 8:5; cp. 14:19; 1 Cor 7:33f; 13:11. τὰ ὑμῶν 2 Cor 12:14. τὰ τῆς ἀσθενείας μου 11:30. τὰ τοῦ νόμου what the law requires Ro 2:14. τὸ τῆς συκῆς what has been done to the fig tree Mt 21:21; cp. 8:33. τὰ ἑαυτῆς its own advantage 1 Cor 13:5; cp. Phil 2:4, 21. τὸ τῆς παροιμίας what the proverb says 2 Pt 2:22 (Pla., Theaet. 183e τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου; Menand., Dyscolus 633 τὸ τοῦ λόγου). ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου in my Father’s house (so Field, Notes 50–56; Goodsp. Probs. 81–83; difft., ‘interests’, PTemple, CBQ 1, ’39, 342–52.—In contrast to the other synoptists, Luke does not elsewhere show Jesus ‘at home’.) Lk 2:49 (Lysias 12, 12 εἰς τὰ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ; Theocr. 2, 76 τὰ Λύκωνος; pap in Mayser II [1926] p. 8; POxy 523, 3 [II A.D.] an invitation to a dinner ἐν τοῖς Κλαυδίου Σαραπίωνος; PTebt 316 II, 23 [99 A.D.] ἐν τοῖς Ποτάμωνος; Esth 7:9; Job 18:19; Jos., Ant. 16, 302. Of the temple of a god Jos., C. Ap. 1, 118 ἐν τοῖς τοῦ Διός). Mt 20:15 is classified here by WHatch, ATR 26, ’44, 250–53; s. also ἐμός b.
    ⓗ The neut. of the art. stands
    α. before whole sentences or clauses (Epict. 4, 1, 45 τὸ Καίσαρος μὴ εἶναι φίλον; Prov. Aesopi 100 P. τὸ Οὐκ οἶδα; Jos., Ant. 10, 205; Just., D. 33, 2 τὸ γὰρ … [Ps 109:4]) τὸ Οὐ φονεύσεις, οὐ μοιχεύσεις κτλ. (quot. fr. the Decalogue) Mt 19:18; Ro 13:9. τὸ Καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη (quot. fr. Is 53:12) Lk 22:37. Cp. Gal 5:14. τὸ Εἰ δύνῃ as far as your words ‘If you can’ are concerned Mk 9:23. Likew. before indirect questions (Vett. Val. 291, 14 τὸ πῶς τέτακται; Ael. Aristid. 45, 15 K. τὸ ὅστις ἐστίν; ParJer 6:15 τὸ πῶς ἀποστείλης; GrBar 8:6 τὸ πῶς ἐταπεινώθη; Jos., Ant. 20, 28 ἐπὶ πείρᾳ τοῦ τί φρονοῖεν; Pel.-Leg. p. 20, 32 τὸ τί γένηται; Mel., Fgm. 8, 2 [Goodsp. p. 311] τὸ δὲ πῶς λούονται) τὸ τί ἂν θέλοι καλεῖσθαι αὐτό Lk 1:62. τὸ τίς ἂν εἴη μείζων αὐτῶν 9:46. τὸ πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν 1 Th 4:1. Cp. Lk 19:48; 22:2, 4, 23f; Ac 4:21; 22:30; Ro 8:26; Hs 8, 1, 4.
    β. before single words which are taken fr. what precedes and hence are quoted, as it were (Epict. 1, 29, 16 τὸ Σωκράτης; 3, 23, 24; Hierocles 13 p. 448 ἐν τῷ μηδείς) τὸ ‘ἀνέβη’ Eph 4:9. τὸ ‘ἔτι ἅπαξ’ Hb 12:27. τὸ ‘Ἁγάρ’ Gal 4:25.
    ⓘ Other notable uses of the art. are
    α. the elliptic use, which leaves a part of a sentence accompanied by the art. to be completed fr. the context: ὁ τὰ δύο the man with the two (talents), i.e. ὁ τὰ δύο τάλαντα λαβών Mt 25:17; cp. vs. 22. τῷ τὸν φόρον Ro 13:7. ὁ τὸ πολύ, ὀλίγον the man who had much, little 2 Cor 8:15 after Ex 16:18 (cp. Lucian, Bis Accus. 9 ὁ τὴν σύριγγα [sc. ἔχων]; Arrian, Anab. 7, 8, 3 τὴν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ [sc. ὁδόν]).
    β. Σαῦλος, ὁ καὶ Παῦλος Ac 13:9; s. καί 2h.
    γ. the fem. art. is found in a quite singular usage ἡ οὐαί (ἡ θλῖψις or ἡ πληγή) Rv 9:12; 11:14. Sim. ὁ Ἀμήν 3:14 (here the masc. art. is evidently chosen because of the alternate name for Jesus).
    ⓙ One art. can refer to several nouns connected by καί
    α. when various words, sing. or pl., are brought close together by a common art.: τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ γραμματεῖς Mt 2:4; cp. 16:21; Mk 15:1. ἐν τοῖς προφήταις κ. ψαλμοῖς Lk 24:44. τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ καὶ Σαμαρείᾳ Ac 1:8; cp. 8:1; Lk 5:17 al.—Even nouns of different gender can be united in this way (Aristoph., Eccl. 750; Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 12 p. 37a οἱ δύο θεοί, of Apollo and Artemis; Ps.-Demetr., Eloc. c. 292; PTebt 14, 10 [114 B.C.]; En 18:14; EpArist 109) κατὰ τὰ ἐντάλματα καὶ διδασκαλίας Col 2:22. Cp. Lk 1:6. εἰς τὰς ὁδοὺς καὶ φραγμούς 14:23.
    β. when one and the same person has more than one attribute applied to him: πρὸς τὸν πατέρα μου καὶ πατέρα ὑμῶν J 20:17. ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. Ro 15:6; 2 Cor 1:3; 11:31; Eph 1:3; 1 Pt 1:3. ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατὴρ (ἡμῶν) Eph 5:20; Phil 4:20; 1 Th 1:3; 3:11, 13. Of Christ: τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ σωτῆρος 2 Pt 1:11; cp. 2:20; 3:18. τοῦ μεγάλου θεοῦ καὶ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν Tit 2:13 (PGrenf II, 15 I, 6 [139 B.C.] of the deified King Ptolemy τοῦ μεγάλου θεοῦ εὐεργέτου καὶ σωτῆρος [ἐπιφανοῦς] εὐχαρίστου).
    γ. On the other hand, the art. is repeated when two different persons are named: ὁ φυτεύων καὶ ὁ ποτίζων 1 Cor 3:8. ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ ὁ ἡγεμών Ac 26:30.
    ⓚ In a fixed expression, when a noun in the gen. is dependent on another noun, the art. customarily appears twice or not at all: τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 3:16; πνεῦμα θεοῦ Ro 8:9. ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ 2 Cor 2:17; λόγος θεοῦ 1 Th 2:13. ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ κυρίου 2 Th 2:2; ἡμ. κ. 1 Th 5:2. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου Mt 8:20; υἱ. ἀ. Hb 2:6. ἡ ἀνάστασις τῶν νεκρῶν Mt 22:31; ἀ. ν. Ac 23:6. ἡ κοιλία τῆς μητρός J 3:4; κ. μ. Mt 19:12.—APerry, JBL 68, ’49, 329–34; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 93–95.—DELG. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὁ

  • 11 διά

    διά, poet. [full] διαί ([dialect] Aeol. [full] ζά, q.v.), Prep. governing gen. and acc.— Rad. sense,
    A through; never anastroph. [Prop. δῐᾰ: but Hom. uses [pron. full] ῑ at the beginning of a line, Il.3.357, 4.135, al.: also ᾱ, metri gr., freq. in Hom., for which A. uses [full] διαί in lyr., Ag. 448, al.]
    A WITH GEN.
    I of Place or Space:
    1 of motion in a line, from one end to the other, right through, in Hom. freq. of the effect of weapons,

    διὰ μὲν ἀσπίδος ἦλθε.. ἔγχος καὶ διὰ θώρηκος.. Il. 3.357

    ;

    δουρὶ βάλεν Δάμασον κυνέης διά 12.183

    ;

    δι' ὤμου.. ἔγχος ἦλθεν 4.481

    ; in Prose,

    τιτρώσκειν διὰ τοῦ θώρακος X.An.1.8.26

    ; διὰ τοῦ ὀρόφου ἐφαίνετο πῦρ ib.7.4.16: also of persons, διὰ Σκαιῶν πεδίονδ' ἔχον ὠκέας ἵππους out through the Scaean gate, Il.3.263; δι' ἠέρος αἰθέρ' ἵκανεν quite through the lower air even to the ether, Il.14.288, cf. 2.458; διὰ Τρώων πέτετο straight through them, 13.755;

    δι' ὄμματος.. λείβων δάκρυον S.OC 1250

    , etc.: also in Compos. with πρό and ἐκ, v. διαπρό, διέκ: in adverbial phrases, διὰ πασῶν (sc. χορδῶν), v. διαπασῶν:

    διὰ πάσης

     throughout,

    Th.1.14

    ;

    διὰ κενῆς

     idly,

    Id.4.126

    , etc. (cf.111.1.c).
    2 of motion through a space, but not in a line, throughout, ouer,

    ἑπόμεσθα διὰ πεδίοιο Il.11.754

    ;

    δι' ὄρεσφι 10.185

    , al.; ὀδύνη διὰ χροὸς ἦλθε through all his frame, 11.398;

    τεῦχε βοὴν διὰ ἄστεος Od.10.118

    ;

    δι' ὁμίλου Il.6.226

    , etc.;

    θορύβου διὰ τῶν τάξεων ἰόντος X.An.1.8.16

    , cf. 2.4.26, etc.; later, in quoting an authority,

    ἱστορεῖ δ. τῆς δευτέρας

     in the course of..,

    Ath.10.438b

    .
    3 in the midst of, Il.9.468;

    κεῖτο τανυσσάμενος δ. μήλων Od.9.298

    ; between,

    δ. τῶν πλευρέων ταμόντα Hp.Morb.2.61

    : hence, of pre-eminence,

    ἔπρεπε καὶ δ. πάντων Il.12.104

    ;

    τετίμακε δι' ἀνθρώπων Pi.I.4(3).37

    ;

    εὐδοκιμέοντι δ. πάντων Hdt.6.63

    , cf. 1.25, etc.
    4 in Prose, sts. of extension, along,

    παρήκει δ. τῆσδε τῆς θαλάσσης ἡ ἀκτή Id.4.39

     (but πέταται δ. θαλάσσας across the sea, Pi.N.6.48);

    λόφος, δι' οὗ τὸ σταύρωμα περιεβέβληντο X.HG7.4.22

    .
    5 in Prose, of Intervals of Space, δ. τριήκοντα δόμων at intervals of thirty layers, i. e. after every thirtieth layer, Hdt.1.179; δ. δέκα ἐπάλξεων at every tenth battlement, Th.3.21; cf. infr. 11.3: of a single interval, δ. πέντε σταδίων at a distance of five stades, Hdt.7.30, cf. 198; δ. τοσούτου μᾶλλον ἢ δ. πολλῶν ἡμερῶν ὁδοῦ at so short a distance, etc., Th.2.29; δ. πολλοῦ at a great distance apart, Id.3.94;

    δ. πλείστου Id.2.97

    ;

    δι' ἐλάσσονος Id.3.51

    ;

    ὕδατα δ. μακροῦ ἀλόμενα Hp.

    Aër.9, etc.
    II of Time,
    1 of duration from one end of a period to the other, throughout, δ. παντὸς [τοῦ χρόνου] Hdt.9.13;

    δι' ὅλου τοῦ αἰῶνος Th.1.70

    ;

    δι' αἰῶνος S.El. 1024

    ;

    δι' ἡμέρας ὅλης Ar. Pax 27

    ;

    δι' ὅλης τῆς νυκτός X.An.4.2.4

    , etc.: without an Adj., δι' ἡμέρης all day long, Hdt.1.97;

    δ. νυκτός Th.2.4

    , X.An.4.6.22 (but δ. νυκτός in the course of the night, by night, Act.Ap.5.19, PRyl.138.15 (i A. D.), etc.);

    δ. νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας Pl.R. 343b

    ; δι' ἐνιαυτοῦ, δι' ἔτους, Ar.Fr.569.8, V. 1058;

    δ. βίου Pl.Smp. 183e

    , etc.;

    δ. τέλους

     from beginning to end,

    A.Pr. 275

    , Pl.R. 519c, etc.: with Adjs. alone,

    δ. παντός

     continually,

    A.Ch. 862

     (lyr.), etc.; δι' ὀλίγου for a short time, Th.1.77;

    δ. μακροῦ E.Hec. 320

    ;

    ὁ δ. μέσου χρόνος Hdt. 8.27

    .
    2 of the interval which has passed between two points of Time, δ. χρόνου πολλοῦ or δ. πολλοῦ χρ. after a long time, Id.3.27, Ar.Pl. 1045;

    δ. μακρῶν χρόνων Pl.Ti. 22d

    : without an Adj., δ. χρόνου after a time, S.Ph. 758, X.Cyr.1.4.28, etc.; δι' ἡμερῶν after several days, Ev.Marc.2.1; and with Adjs. alone,

    δι' ὀλίγου Th.5.14

    ;

    οὐ δ. μακροῦ Id.6.15

    ,91;

    δ. πολλοῦ Luc.Nigr.2

    , etc.: with Numerals,

    δι' ἐτέων εἴκοσι Hdt.6.118

    , cf. OGI56.38 (iii B. C.), etc.: but δ. τῆς ἑβδόμης till the seventh day, Luc.Hist.Conscr.21: also distributively, χρόνος δ. χρόνου προὔβαινε time after time, S.Ph. 285;

    ἄλλος δι' ἄλλου E.Andr. 1248

    .
    3 of successive Intervals, δ. τρίτης ἡμέρης every other day, Hdt.2.37; δ. τρίτου ἔτεος ib.4, etc.; δ. πεντετηρίδος every four years (with inclusive reckoning), Id.3.97; δι' ἔτους πέμπτου, of the Olympic games, Ar.Pl. 584 (but δι' ἑνδεκάτου ἔτεος in the course of the eleventh year, Hdt.1.62).
    III causal, through, by,
    a of the Agent, δι' ἀλλέλων or -ου ἐπικηρυκεύεσθαι, ποιεῖσθαι, by the mouth of.., Id.1.69,6.4, cf. 1.113;

    δι' ἑρμηνέως λέγειν X.An.2.3.17

    , etc.;

    τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ Κυρίου δ. τοῦ προφήτου Ev.Matt.1.22

    ;

    δι' ἑκόντων ἀλλ' οὐ δ. βίας ποιεῖσθαι Pl.Phlb. 58b

    ; πεσόντ' ἀλλοτρίας διαὶ γυναικός by her doing, A.Ag. 448 (lyr.);

    ἐκ θεῶν γεγονὼς δ. βασιλέων πεφυκώς X.Cyr.7.2.24

    ; δι' ἑαυτοῦ ποιεῖν τι of oneself, not by another's agency, ib.1.1.4, etc.; but also, by oneself alone, unassisted, D.15.14, cf. 22.38.
    b of the Instrument or Means, δ. χειρῶν by hand (prop. by holding between the hands),

    δι' ὁσίων χ. θιγών S. OC 470

    ; also δ. χερῶν λαβεῖν, δ. χειρὸς ἔχειν in the hand, Id.Ant. 916, 1258 (but τὰ τῶν ξυμμάχων δ. χειρὸς ἔχειν to keep a firm hand on, Th.2.13);

    δ. στέρνων ἔχειν S.Ant. 639

    ;

    ἡ ἀκούουσα πηγὴ δι' ὤτων Id.OT 1387

    ;

    δ. στόματος ἔχειν X.Cyr.1.4.25

    ;

    δ. μνήμης ἔχειν Luc.Cat.9

    ;

    αἱ δ. τοῦ σώματος ἡδοναί X.Mem.1.5.6

    ; δ. λόγων συγγίγνεσθαι to hold intercourse by word, Pl.Plt. 272b;

    δ. λόγου ἀπαγγέλλειν Act.Ap.15.27

    ;

    δι' ἐπιστολῶν 2 Ep.Cor.10.9

    , POxy. 1070.15 (iii A. D.).
    c of Manner (where διά with its Noun freq. serves as an Adv.),

    δ. μέθης ποιήσασθαι τὴν συνουσίαν Pl.Smp. 176e

    ; παίω δι' ὀργῆς through passion, in passion, S.OT 807; δ. τάχους, = ταχέως, Id.Aj. 822, Th.1.63 (but δ. ταχέων ib.80, al.); δ. σπουδῆς in haste, hastily, E.Ba. 212; δι' αἰδοῦς with reverence, respectfully, ib. 441; δ. ψευδῶν ἔπη lying words, Id.Hel. 309; αἱ δ. καρτερίας ἐπιμέλειαι long-continued exertions, X.Mem.2.1.20; δι' ἀκριβείας, δ. πάσης ἀκρ., Pl.Ti. 23d, Lg. 876c;

    δ. σιγῆς Id.Grg. 450c

    ;

    δ. ξυμφορῶν ἡ ξύμβασις ἐγένετο Th.6.10

    ;

    οὐ δι' αἰνιγμάτων, ἀλλ' ἐναργῶς γέγραπται Aeschin.3.121

    ;

    δι' αἵματος, οὐ δ. μέλανος τοὺς νόμους ὁ Δράκων ἔγραψεν Plu.Sol.17

    : also with Adjs., δ. βραχέων, δ. μακρῶν τοὺς λόγους ποιεῖσθαι, Isoc.14.3, Pl.Grg. 449b; ἀποκρίνεσθαι δ. βραχυτάτων ibid. d; cf. infr. IV.
    2 in later Prose, of Material out of which a thing is made,

    κατασκευάζειν εἴδωλα δι' ἐλέφαντος καὶ χρυσοῦ D.S.17.115

    ;

    θυσίαι δι' ἀλφίτου καὶ σπονδῆς πεποιημέναι Plu.Num.8

    ;

    βρώματα δ. μέλιτος καὶ γάλακτος γιγνόμενα Ath.14.646e

    ;

    οἶνος δ. βουνίου Dsc. 5.46

    .
    IV διά τινος ἔχειν, εἶναι, γίγνεσθαι, to express conditions or states, ἀγὼν διὰ πάσης ἀγωνίης ἔχων extending through every kind of contest, Hdt.2.91;

    δι' ἡσυχίης εἶναι Id.1.206

    ; δι' ὄχλου εἶναι to be troublesome, Ar.Ec. 888;

    δ. φόβου εἶναι Th.6.59

    ;

    δι' ἀπεχθείας γίγνεσθαι X.Hier.9.2

    ; ἡ ἐπιμέλεια δ. χάριτος γίγνεται ibid.;

    δ. μιᾶς γνώμης γίγνεσθαι Isoc.4.138

    .
    b with Verbs of motion, δ. μάχης ἐλεύσονται will engage in battle, Hdt.6.9;

    ἐλθεῖν Th.4.92

    ; δ. παντὸς πολέμου, δ. φιλίας ἰέναι τινί, X.An.3.2.8; δ. δίκης ἰέναι τινί go to law with.., S.Ant. 742, cf. Th.6.60;

    δ. τύχης ἰέναι S.OT 773

    ;

    δι' ὀργῆς ἥκειν Id.OC 905

    ; ἐμαυτῷ δ. λόγων ἀφικόμην I held converse with myself, E.Med. 872; δ. λόγων, δ. γλώσσης ἰέναι come to open speech, Id.Tr. 916, Supp. 112; δ. φιλημάτων ἰέναι come to kissing, Id.Andr. 416;

    δ. δικαιοσύνης ἰέναι καὶ σωφροσύνης Pl.Prt. 323a

    , etc.; δ. πυρὸς ἰέναι (v. πῦρ): in pass. sense, δι' ἀπεχθείας ἐλθεῖν τινι to be hated by.., A.Pr. 121 (anap.).
    c with trans. Verbs, δι' αἰτίας ἔχειν or ἄγειν τινά hold in fault, Th.2.60, Ael.VH9.32;

    δι' ὀργῆς ἔχειν τινά Th.2.37

    , etc.;

    δ. φυλακῆς ἔχειν τι Id.7.8

    ; δι' οἴκτου ἔχειν τινά, δι' αἰσχύνης ἔχειν τι, E.Hec. 851, IT 683;

    δ. πένθους τὸ γῆρας διάγειν X.Cyr.4.6.6

    ;

    δι' οὐδενὸς ποιεῖσθαί τι S.OC 584

    .
    B WITH Acc.
    I of Place, only Poet., in same sense as διά c. gen.:
    1 through,

    ἓξ δὲ δ. πτύχας ἦλθε.. χαλκός Il.7.247

    ;

    ἤϊξε δ. δρυμὰ.. καὶ ὕλην 11.118

    , cf. 23.122, etc.; δ. τάφρον ἐλαύνειν across it, 12.62;

    δ. δώματα ποιπνύοντα 1.600

    ;

    ἐπὶ χθόνα καὶ δ. πόντον βέβακεν Pi.I.4(3).41

    ;

    φεύγειν δ. κῦμ' ἅλιον A.Supp.14

     (anap.).
    2 through, among, in,

    οἴκεον δι' ἄκριας Od.9.400

    ;

    ἄραβος δὲ δ. στόμα γίγνετ' ὀδόντων Il.10.375

     (but μῦθον, ὃν.. δ. στόμα.. ἄγοιτο through his mouth, 14.91; so

    δ. στόμα ὄσσαν ἱεῖσαι Hes.Th.65

    ;

    ἀεὶ γὰρ ἡ γυνή σ' ἔχει δ. στόμα Ar.Lys. 855

    );

    δ. κρατερὰς ὑσμίνας Hes.Th. 631

    ;

    νόμοι δι' αἰθέρα τεκνωθέντες S.OT 867

     (lyr.).
    II of Time, also Poet.,

    δ. νύκτα Il.2.57

    , etc.; δ. γλυκὺν ὕπνον during sweet sleep, Mosch.4.91.
    III causal:
    1 of persons, thanks to, by aid of,

    νικῆσαι δ... Ἀθήνην Od.8.520

    , cf. 13.121;

    δ. δμῳὰς.. εἷλον 19.154

    ; δ. σε by thy fault or service, S.OC 1129, Ar.Pl. 145, cf. 160, 170: in Prose, by reason of, on account of,

    δ' ἡμᾶς Th.1.41

    , cf. X.An.7.6.33, D.18.249;

    οὐ δι' ἐμαυτόν And.1.144

    ; so εἰ μὴ διά τινα if it had not been for..,

    εἰ μὴ δι' ἄνδρας ἀγαθούς Lys.12.60

    ;

    Μιλτιάδην εἰς τὸ βάραθρον ἐμβαλεῖν ἐψηφίσαντο, καὶ εἰ μὴ δ. τὸν πρύτανιν ἐνέπεσεν ἄν Pl.Grg. 516e

    , cf. D.19.74;

    εἰ μὴ δ. τὴν ἐκείνου μέλλησιν Th.2.18

    , cf. Ar.V. 558;

    πλέον' ἔλπομαι λόγον Ὀδυσσέος ἢ πάθαν γενέσθαι δι' Ὅμηρον Pi.N.7.21

    .
    2 of things, to express the Cause, Occasion, or Purpose, δι' ἐμὴν ἰότητα because of my will, Il.15.41;

    Διὸς μεγάλου δ. βουλάς Od.8.82

    ; δι' ἀφραδίας for, through want of thought, 19.523;

    δι' ἀτασθαλίας 23.67

    ; δι' ἔνδειαν by reason of poverty, X. An.7.8.6; δ. καῦμα, δ. χειμῶνα, ib.1.7.6;

    δι' ἄγνοιαν καὶ ἀμαθίαν Pl. Prt. 360b

    , etc.: freq. also with neut. Adjs., δ. τί; wherefore?; δ. τοῦτο, δ. ταῦτα on this account; δι' ὅ, δι' ἅ on which account; δ. πολλά for many reasons, etc.
    3 = ἕνεκα, to express Purpose, δἰ ἀχθηδόνα for the sake of vexing, Th.4.40, cf. 5.53; δ. τὴν τούτου σαφήνειαν with a view to clearing this up, Pl.R. 524c, cf. Arist.EN 1172b21; αὐτή δι' αὑτήν for its own sake, Pl.R. 367b, etc.
    C WITHOUT CASE as Adv. throughout, δ. πρό (v. supr. A.I.I);

    δ. δ' ἀμπερές Il.11.377

    .
    I through, right through, of Space, διαβαίνω, διέχω, διιππεύω.
    II in different directions, as in διαπέμπω, διαφορέω; of separation, asunder, διαιρέω, διαλύω; of difference or disagreement, at variance, διαφωνέω, διαφέρω; or simply mutual relation, one with another, διαγωνίζομαι, διάδω, διαθέω, διαπίνω, διαφιλοτιμέομαι.
    III pre-eminence, διαπρέπω, διαφέρω.
    IV completion, to the end, utterly, διεργάζομαι, διαμάχομαι, διαπράττω, διαφθείρω: of Time, διαβιόω.
    V to add strength, thoroughly, out and out, διαγαληνίζω, etc.; cf. ζά.
    VI of mixture, between, partly, esp. in Adj., as διάλευκος, διάχρυσος, διάχλωρος, etc.
    VII of leaving an interval or breach, διαλείπω, διαναπαύω. (Cogn. with δύο, δίς.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > διά

  • 12 καί

    καί conjunction (Hom.+), found most frequently by far of all Gk. particles in the NT; since it is not only used much more commonly here than in other Gk. lit. but oft. in a different sense, or rather in different circumstances, it contributes greatly to some of the distinctive coloring of the NT style.—HMcArthur, ΚΑΙ Frequency in Greek Letters, NTS 15, ’68/69, 339–49. The vivacious versatility of κ. (for earlier Gk. s. Denniston 289–327) can easily be depressed by the tr. ‘and’, whose repetition in a brief area of text lacks the support of arresting aspects of Gk. syntax.
    ① marker of connections, and
    ⓐ single words
    α. gener. Ἰάκωβος καὶ Ἰωσὴφ καὶ Σίμων καὶ Ἰούδας Mt 13:55. χρυσὸν καὶ λίβανον καὶ σμύρναν 2:11. ἡ ἐντολὴ ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή Ro 7:12. πολυμερῶς κ. πολυτρόπως Hb 1:1. ὁ θεὸς κ. πατήρ God, who is also the Father 1 Cor 15:24; cp. 2 Cor 1:3; 11:31; Eph 1:3; Js 1:27; 3:9 al.—Connects two occurrences of the same word for emphasis (OGI 90, 19 [196 B.C.] Ἑρμῆς ὁ μέγας κ. μέγας; pap in Mayser II/1, 54) μείζων κ. μείζων greater and greater Hv 4, 1, 6. ἔτι κ. ἔτι again and again B 21:4; Hs 2, 6 (B-D-F §493, 1; 2; s. Rob. 1200).
    β. w. numerals, w. the larger number first δέκα καὶ ὁκτώ Lk 13:16. τεσσεράκοντα κ. ἕξ J 2:20. τετρακόσιοι κ. πεντήκοντα Ac 13:20.—The καί in 2 Cor 13:1 ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα=‘or’ ([v.l. ἢ τριῶν for καὶ τριῶν as it reads Mt 18:16]; cp. Js 4:13 v.l. σήμερον καὶ αὔριον=‘today or tomorrow’, but s. above all Thu. 1, 82, 2; Pla., Phd. 63e; X., De Re Equ. 4, 4 ἁμάξας τέτταρας καὶ πέντε; Heraclides, Pol. 58 τρεῖς καὶ τέσσαρας; Polyb. 3, 51, 12 ἐπὶ δυεῖν καὶ τρισὶν ἡμέραις; 5, 90, 6; Diod S 34 + 35 Fgm. 2, 28 εἷς καὶ δύο=one or two; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1091 p. 305, 22 W. τριέτης καὶ τετραέτης) by the statement of two or three witnesses every charge must be sustained, as explained by Dt 19:15.
    γ. adding the whole to the part and in general (Aristoph., Nub. 1239 τὸν Δία καὶ τοὺς θεούς; Thu. 1, 116, 3; 7, 65, 1) Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι Peter and the rest of the apostles Ac 5:29. οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς κ. τὸ συνέδριον ὅλον the high priest and all the rest of the council Mt 26:59. Vice versa, adding a (specially important) part to the whole and especially (πᾶς Ἰουδὰ καὶ Ἰερουσαλήμ 2 Ch 35:24; cp. 32, 33; 1 Macc 2:6) τοῖς μαθηταῖς κ. τῷ Πέτρῳ Mk 16:7. σὺν γυναιξὶ κ. Μαριάμ Ac 1:14.
    δ. The expr. connected by καί can be united in the form of a hendiadys (Alcaeus 117, 9f D.2 χρόνος καὶ καρπός=time of fruit; Soph., Aj. 144; 749; Polyb. 6, 9, 4; 6, 57, 5 ὑπεροχὴ καὶ δυναστεία=1, 2, 7; 5, 45, 1 ὑπεροχὴ τῆς δυναστείας; Diod S 5, 67, 3 πρὸς ἀνανέωσιν καὶ μνήμην=renewal of remembrance; 15, 63, 2 ἀνάγκη καὶ τύχη=compulsion of fate; 16, 93, 2 ἐπιβουλὴ κ. θάνατος=a fatal plot; Jos., Ant. 12, 98 μετὰ χαρᾶς κ. βοῆς=w. a joyful cry; 17, 82 ἀκρίβεια κ. φυλακή) ἐξίσταντο ἐπὶ τῇ συνέσει καὶ ταῖς ἀποκρίσεσιν αὐτοῦ they were amazed at his intelligent answers Lk 2:47. δώσω ὑμῖν στόμα κ. σοφίαν I will give you wise utterance 21:15. τροφὴ κ. εὐφροσύνη joy concerning (your) food Ac 14:17. ἐλπὶς κ. ἀνάστασις hope of a resurrection 23:6 (2 Macc 3:29 ἐλπὶς καὶ σωτηρία; s. OLagercrantz, ZNW 31, ’32, 86f; GBjörck, ConNeot 4, ’40, 1–4).
    ε. A colloquial feature is the coordination of two verbs, one of which should be a ptc. (s. B-D-F §471; Rob. 1135f) ἀποτολμᾷ κ. λέγει = ἀποτολμῶν λέγει he is so bold as to say Ro 10:20. ἔσκαψεν κ. ἐβάθυνεν (=βαθύνας) Lk 6:48. ἐκρύβη κ. ἐξῆλθεν (=ἐξελθών) J 8:59. Sim. χαίρων κ. βλέπων I am glad to see Col 2:5. Linking of subordinate clause and ptc. Μαριὰμ ὡς ἦλθεν … καὶ ἰδοῦσα J 11:32 v.l. Cp. παραλαβών … καὶ ἀνέβη Lk 9:28 v.l.
    ⓑ clauses and sentences
    α. gener.: ἐν γαστρὶ ἕξει κ. τέξεται υἱόν Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14). εἰσῆλθον … κ. ἐδίδασκον Ac 5:21. διακαθαριεῖ τὴν ἅλωνα αὐτοῦ κ. συνάξει τὸν σῖτον Mt 3:12. κεκένωται ἡ πίστις καὶ κατήργηται ἡ ἐπαγγελία Ro 4:14 and very oft. Connecting two questions Mt 21:23, or quotations (e.g. Ac 1:20), and dialogue (Lk 21:8), or alternate possibilities (13:18).
    β. Another common feature is the practice, drawn fr. Hebrew or fr. the speech of everyday life, of using κ. as a connective where more discriminating usage would call for other particles: καὶ εἶδον καὶ (for ὅτι) σεισμὸς ἐγένετο Rv 6:12. καὶ ἤκουσεν ὁ βασιλεὺς … καὶ (for ὅτι) ἔλεγον and the king learned that they were saying Mk 6:14 (s. HLjungvik, ZNW 33, ’34, 90–92; on this JBlinzler, Philol. 96, ’43/44, 119–31). τέξεται υἱὸν καὶ καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (for οὗ τὸ ὄνομα καλ.) Mt 1:21; cp. Lk 6:6; 11:44. καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι καὶ ποιήσωμεν σκηνάς Mk 9:5. Esp. freq. is the formula in historical narrative καὶ ἐγένετο … καὶ (like וַ … וַיְהִי) and it happened or came about … that Mt 9:10; Mk 2:15; Lk 5:1 v.l. (for ἐγένετο δὲ … καὶ; so also the text of 6:12), 12, 17; 14:1; 17:11 al. (Gen 7:10 al.; JosAs 11:1; 22:1). S. MJohannessohn, Das bibl. Καὶ ἐγένετο u. seine Geschichte, 1926 (fr. ZVS 35, 1925, 161–212); KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT I, 1 ’62, 29–62; Mlt-Turner 334f; ÉDelebecque, Études Grecques sur L’Évangile de Luc ’76, 123–65; JVoelz, The Language of the NT: ANRW II/25/2, 893–977, esp. 959–64.—As in popular speech, κ. is used in rapid succession Mt 14:9ff; Mk 1:12ff; Lk 18:32ff; J 2:13ff; 1 Cor 12:5f; Rv 6:12ff; 9:1ff. On this kind of colloquial speech, which joins independent clauses rather than subordinating one to the other (parataxis rather than hypotaxis) s. B-D-F §458; Rdm.2 p. 222; Rob. 426; Dssm., LO 105ff (LAE 129ff), w. many references and parallels fr. secular sources. This is a favorite, e.g., in Polyaenus 2, 3, 2–4; 2, 4, 3; 3, 9, 10; 3, 10, 2; 4, 6, 1; 7, 36 al.
    γ. It is also coordination rather than subordination when κ. connects an expr. of time with that which occurs in the time (Od. 5, 362; Hdt. 7, 217; Thu. 1, 50, 5; Pla., Symp. 220c; Aeschin. 3, 71 νὺξ ἐν μέσῳ καὶ παρῆμεν; s. B-D-F §442, 4; KBrugmann4-AThumb, Griechische Gramm. 1913, 640*): ἤγγικεν ἡ ὥρα κ. παραδίδοται the time has come when he is to be given up Mt 26:45. κ. ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν when they crucified him Mk 15:25. κ. ἀνέβη εἰς Ἰεροσόλυμα when he went up to Jerusalem J 2:13. κ. συντελέσω when I will make Hb 8:8 (Jer 38:31); cp. J 4:35; 7:33; Lk 19:43; 23:44; Ac 5:7.
    δ. καί introducing an apodosis is really due to Hebr./LXX infl. (B-D-F §442, 7; Abel §78a, 6 p. 341; Mlt-H. 422; KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT I, 1 ’62, 66–72; but not offensive to ears trained in good Gk.: s. Il. 1, 478; Hdt. 1, 79, 2; sim.Thu. 2, 93, 4 ὡς ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐχώρουν εὐθύς; 8, 27, 5; Herm. Wr. 13, 1 …, καὶ ἔφης; Delebecque [s. above in β] 130–32) καὶ ὅτε ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμέραι ὀκτὼ …, κ. ἐκλήθη τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ Lk 2:21; cp. Rv 3:20. Also κ. ἰδού in an apodosis Lk 7:12; Ac 1:10.
    ε. connecting negative and affirmative clauses Lk 3:14. οὔτε ἄντλημα ἔχεις κ. τὸ φρέαρ ἐστὶ βαθύ you have no bucket, and the well is deep J 4:11; cp. 3J 10 (οὔτε … καί Eur., Iph. Taur. 591f; Longus, Past. 1, 17; 4, 28; Aelian, NA 1, 57; 11, 9; Lucian, Dial. Meretr. 2, 4 οὔτε πάντα ἡ Λεσβία, Δωρί, πρὸς σὲ ἐψεύσατο καὶ σὺ τἀληθῆ ἀπήγγελκας Μυρτίῳ ‘It wasn’t all lies that Lesbia told you, Doris; and you certainly reported the truth to Myrtium’). After a negative clause, which influences the clause beginning w. καί: μήποτε καταπατήσουσιν … κ. στραφέντες ῥήξωσιν ὑμᾶς Mt 7:6; cp. 5:25; 10:38; 13:15 (Is 6:10); 27:64; Lk 12:58; 21:34; J 6:53; 12:40 (Is 6:10); Ac 28:27 (Is 6:10); 1 Th 3:5; Hb 12:15; Rv 16:15.
    ζ. to introduce a result that comes fr. what precedes: and then, and so Mt 5:15; 23:32; Mk 8:34; 2 Cor 11:9; Hb 3:19; 1J 3:19. καὶ ἔχομεν and so we have 2 Pt 1:19. Esp. after the impv., or expr. of an imperatival nature (Soph., Oed. Col. 1410ff θέσθε … καὶ … οἴσει, El. 1207; Sir 2:6; 3:17) δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου καὶ ποιήσω and then I will make Mt 4:19. εἰπὲ λόγῳ, κ. ἰαθήσεται ὁ παῖς μου speak the word, and then my servant will be cured Mt 8:8; Lk 7:7; cp. Mt 7:7; Mk 6:22; Lk 10:28; J 14:16; Js 4:7, 10; Rv 4:1.—καί introduces a short clause that confirms the existence of someth. that ought to be: ἵνα τέκνα θεοῦ κληθῶμεν, καὶ ἐσμέν that we should be called children of God; and so we really are (καλέω 1d) 1J 3:1 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 40 §161 they were to conquer Sardinia, καὶ κατέλαβον=and they really took it; 4, 127 §531 one day would decide [κρίνειν] the fate of Rome, καὶ ἐκρίθη).
    η. emphasizing a fact as surprising or unexpected or noteworthy: and yet, and in spite of that, nevertheless (Eur., Herc. Fur. 509; Philostrat., Her. 11 [II 184, 29 Kayser] ῥητορικώτατον καὶ δεινόν; Longus, Past. 4, 17 βουκόλος ἦν Ἀγχίσης καὶ ἔσχεν αὐτὸν Ἀφροδίτη) κ. σὺ ἔρχῃ πρὸς μέ; and yet you come to me? Mt 3:14; cp. 6:26; 10:29; Mk 12:12; J 1:5, 10; 3:11, 32; 5:40; 6:70; 7:28; 1 Cor 5:2; 2 Cor 6:9; Hb 3:9 (Ps 94:9); Rv 3:1. So also, connecting what is unexpected or otherw. noteworthy with an attempt of some kind (JBlomqvist, Das sogennante και adversativum ’79): but ζητεῖ κ. οὐχ εὑρίσκει but he finds none (no resting place) Mt 12:43. ἐπεθύμησαν ἰδεῖν κ. οὐχ εἶδαν but did not see (it) 13:17; cp. 26:60; Lk 13:7; 1 Th 2:18. Cp. GJs 18:3 (not pap). Perhaps Mk 5:20. Introducing a contrasting response καὶ ἀποδώσεις μοι Hv 2, 1, 3.
    θ. to introduce an abrupt question, which may often express wonder, ill-will, incredulity, etc. (B-D-F §442, 8. For older lit. exx. of this usage s. Kühner-G. II p. 247f; for later times EColwell, The Gk. of the Fourth Gospel ’31, 87f): κ. πόθεν μοι τοῦτο; how have I deserved this? Lk 1:43. κ. τίς; who then? Mk 10:26; Lk 10:29; J 9:36. καὶ τί γέγονεν ὅτι … ; how does it happen that … ? 14:22. καὶ πῶς σὺ λέγεις … ; how is it, then, that you say … J 14:9 v.l. W. a protasis εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼ λυπῶ ὑμᾶς, κ. τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με; for if I make you sad, who then will cheer me up? 2 Cor 2:2 (cp. Ps.-Clem., Hom. 2, 43; 44 εἰ [ὁ θεὸς] ψεύδεται, καὶ τίς ἀληθεύει;). Thus Phil 1:22 is prob. to be punctuated as follows (s. ADebrunner, GGA 1926, 151): εἰ δὲ τὸ ζῆν ἐν σαρκί, τοῦτο μοι καρπὸς ἔργου, καὶ τί αἱρήσομαι; οὐ γνωρίζω but if living on here means further productive work, then which shall I choose? I really don’t know. καὶ πῶς αὐτοῦ υἱός ἐστιν; how, then, is he his son? Lk 20:44 (cp. Gen 39:9).
    ι. to introduce a parenthesis (Eur., Orest. 4, Hel. 393; X., Equ. 11, 2.—B-D-F §465, 1; Rob. 1182) κ. ἐκωλύθην ἄρχι τοῦ δεῦρο but so far I have been prevented Ro 1:13.
    ⓒ oft. explicative; i.e., a word or clause is connected by means of καί w. another word or clause, for the purpose of explaining what goes before it and so, that is, namely (PPetr II, 18 [1], 9 πληγὰς … καὶ πλείους=blows … indeed many of them.—Kühner-G. II 247; B-D-F §442, 9; Rob. 1181; Mlt-Turner 335) χάριν κ. ἀποστολήν grace, that is, the office of an apostle Ro 1:5. ἀπήγγειλαν πάντα καὶ τὰ τ. δαιμονιζομένων they told everything, namely what had happened to those who were possessed Mt 8:33. καὶ χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος that is, grace upon grace J 1:16. Cp. 1 Cor 3:5; 15:38.—Mt 21:5.—Other explicative uses are καὶ οὗτος, καὶ τοῦτο, καὶ ταῦτα (the first and last are in earlier Gk.: Hdt., X. et al.; s. Kühner-G. I 647; II 247) and, also ascensive and indeed, and at that Ἰ. Χρ., καὶ τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον J. Chr., (and) indeed him on the cross 1 Cor 2:2. καὶ τοῦτο Ro 13:11; 1 Cor 6:6, 8; Eph 2:8. καὶ ταῦτα w. ptc. and to be sure Hb 11:12. See B-D-F §290, 5; 425, 1; 442, 9.—The ascensive force of καί is also plain in Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον a Roman citizen, and uncondemned at that Ac 22:25. ἔρχεται ὥρα καὶ νῦν ἐστιν an hour is coming, indeed it is already here J 5:25. προσέθηκεν καὶ τοῦτο ἐπὶ πᾶσιν καὶ κατέκλεισεν τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐν φυλακῇ added this on top of everything else, namely to put John in prison Lk 3:20.
    ⓓ After πολύς and before a second adj. καί is pleonastic fr. the viewpoint of modern lang. (earlier Gk.: Hom. et al. [Kühner-G. II 252, 1]; cp. Cebes 1, 1 πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα ἀναθήματα; 2, 3; B-D-F §442, 11) πολλὰ … κ. ἄλλα σημεῖα many other signs J 20:30 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 318). πολλὰ κ. βαρέα αἰτιώματα many severe charges Ac 25:7. πολλὰ … καὶ ἕτερα Lk 3:18 (cp. Himerius, Or. 40 [=Or. 6], 6 πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα). πολλοὶ καὶ ἀνυπότακτοι Tit 1:10.
    ⓔ introducing someth. new, w. loose connection: Mt 4:23; 8:14, 23, 28; 9:1, 9, 27, 35; 10:1; 12:27; Mk 5:1, 21; Lk 8:26; J 1:19 and oft.
    ⓕ καί … καί both … and, not only …, but also (Synes., Dreams 10 p. 141b καὶ ἀπιστεῖν ἔξεστι καὶ πιστεύειν.—B-D-F §444, 3; Rob. 1182; Mlt-Turner 335) connecting single expressions Mt 10:28; Mk 4:41; Ro 11:33; Phil 2:13; 4:12. κ. ἐν ὀλίγῳ κ. ἐν μεγάλῳ Ac 26:29. κ. ἅπαξ κ. δίς (s. ἅπαξ 1) Phil 4:16; 1 Th 2:18. Connecting whole clauses or sentences: Mk 9:13; J 7:28; 9:37; 12:28; 1 Cor 1:22. Introducing contrasts: although … yet (Anthol. VII, 676 Δοῦλος Ἐπίκτητος γενόμην καὶ σῶμʼ ἀνάπηρος καὶ πενίην ῏Ιρος καὶ φίλος ἀθανάτοις ‘I was Epictetus, a slave; crippled in body and an Iros [a beggar in Hom., Od.] in poverty, but dear to the Immortals’) J 15:24; Ac 23:3. καὶ … κ. οὐ Lk 5:36; J 6:36. καὶ οὐ … καί 17:25; κ. … κ. now … now Mk 9:22. On τὲ … καί s. τέ 2c. Somet. w. ἤ q.v. 1aβ.—HCadbury, Superfluous καί in the Lord’s Prayer (i.e. Mt 6:12) and Elsewhere: Munera Studiosa (=WHatch Festschr.) ’46.
    ② marker to indicate an additive relation that is not coordinate to connect clauses and sentences, also, likewise, funct. as an adv.
    ⓐ simply κ. τὴν ἄλλην the other one also Mt 5:39; cp. vs. 40; 6:21; 12:45; Mk 1:38; 2:26; 8:7 and oft. Freq. used w. pronouns κἀγώ (q.v.). καὶ σύ Mt 26:73. κ. ὑμεῖς 20:4, 7; Lk 21:31; J 7:47 and oft. κ. αὐτός (s. αὐτός 1f).
    ⓑ intensive: even Mt 5:46f; 10:30; Mk 1:27; Lk 10:17; J 14:9 v.l.; Ac 5:39; 22:28; Ro 9:24 (ἀλλὰ καί); 1 Cor 2:10; 2 Cor 1:8; Gal 2:17; Eph 5:12; Phlm 21; Hb 7:25; 1 Pt 4:19 (but s. d below); Jd 23; Hs 5, 2, 10; 7:1; ἔτι καὶ νῦν Dg 2:3. CBlackman, JBL 87, ’68, 203f would transl. Ro 3:26b: … even in the act of declaring righteous (cp. the gen. abs. Polemon Soph. B 14 Reader καὶ Δάτιδος ἀποπλέοντος=even though Datis was sailing away). In formulas expressing a wish: ὄφελον καί if only, would that Gal 5:12. In connection w. a comparative: κ. περισσότερον προφήτου one who is even more than a prophet Mt 11:9. κ. μείζονα ποιήσει J 14:12.
    ⓒ In sentences denoting a contrast καί appears in var. ways, somet. in both members of the comparison, and oft. pleonastically, to our way of thinking καθάπερ …, οὕτως καί as …, thus also 2 Cor 8:11. ὥσπερ …, οὕτως καί (Hyperid. 1, 2, 5–8) Ro 5:19; 11:30f; 1 Cor 11:12; 15:22; Gal 4:29. ὡς …, οὕτως καί Ro 5:15, 18. ὸ̔ν τρόπον …, οὕτως καί 2 Ti 3:8.—οὕτως καί thus also Ro 6:11. ὡσαύτως καί in the same way also 1 Cor 11:25. ὁμοίως καί (Jos., Bell. 2, 575) J 6:11; Jd 8. ὡς καί Ac 11:17; 1 Cor 7:7; 9:5. καθὼς καί Ro 15:7; 1 Cor 13:12; 2 Cor 1:14; Eph 4:17. καθάπερ καί Ro 4:6; 2 Cor 1:14.—καί can also stand alone in the second member w. the mng. so also, so. ὡς … καί Mt 6:10; Ac 7:51; Gal 1:9; Phil 1:20. καθὼς … καί Lk 6:31 v.l.; J 6:57; 13:15; 1 Cor 15:49.—οἷος …, τοιοῦτος καί 1 Cor 15:48. After a comp. ὅσῳ καί by so much also Hb 8:6. καί is found in both members of the comparison (s. Kühner-G. II 256; 2 Macc 2:10; 6:14) Ro 1:13; 1 Th 2:14. καθὼς καὶ … οὕτως καί Col 3:13 (cp. Hyperid. 1, 40, 20–25 ὥσπερ καὶ … οὕτω καί; 3, 38).
    ⓓ w. expressions that introduce cause or result, here also pleonastic to a considerable degree διὰ τοῦτο καί for this reason (also) Lk 11:49; J 12:18. διὸ καί Lk 1:35; Ac 10:29; Ro 4:22; Hb 13:12. εἰς τοῦτο καί 2 Cor 2:9. ὥστε καί 1 Pt 4:19 (but this pass. may well fit in b). ὅθεν καί Hb 7:25; 11:19.
    ⓔ after an interrogative (as Thu., X., et al.; s. Kühner-G. II 255. S. also B-D-F §442, 14) at all, still ἱνατί καὶ τ. γῆν καταργεῖ; Lk 13:7. τί καί; (Hyperid. 3, 14 τί καὶ ἀδικεῖ; what kind of wrong, then, is he committing?) τί καὶ ἐλπίζει; why does he still (need to) hope? Ro 8:24. v.l. τί καὶ βαπτίζονται; why are they baptized (at all)? 1 Cor 15:29; cp. vs. 30.
    ⓕ used w. a relative, it oft. gives greater independence to the foll. relative clause: Mk 3:14; Lk 10:30; J 11:2 v.l.; Ac 1:3, 11; 7:45; 10:39; 11:30; 12:4; 13:22; 28:10; Ro 9:24; 1 Cor 11:23; Gal 2:10; Col 1:29 al.
    ⓖ used pleonastically w. prep.
    α. μετά (BGU 412, 6 μετὰ καὶ τ. υἱοῦ) Phil 4:3.
    β. σύν (ins in PASA III 612; PFay 108; BGU 179, 19; 515, 17) 1 Cl 65:1.—Dssm., NB 93 (BS 265f).
    ⓗ w. double names ὁ καί who is also called … (the earliest ex. in a fragment of Ctesias: 688 Fgm. 15, 51 p. 469, 23 Jac. ῏Ωχος καὶ Δαρειαῖος [s. Hatch 141]; OGI 565; 574; 583; 589; 603; 604; 620; 623; 636; POxy 45; 46; 54; 101; 485; 1279; PFay 30; BGU 22, 25; 36, 4; Jos., Ant. 1, 240; 5, 85; 12, 285; 13, 320; 18, 35. Further material in WSchmid, Der Atticismus III 1893, 338; Dssm., B 181ff [BS 313–17]. Lit. in B-D-F §268, 1) Σαῦλος, ὁ καὶ Παῦλος Ac 13:9. Ἰγνάτιος, ὁ καὶ Θεοφόρος ins of all the letters of Ign.
    ⓘ with other particles
    α. καὶ γάρ for (s. γάρ 1b).—καὶ γὰρ … ἀλλά (or granted that … but) 2 Cor 13:4; Phil 2:27.—καὶ γὰρ οὐ(κ): neither 1 Cor 11:9; for even … not 2 Cor 3:10.
    β. καί γε (without intervening word [opp. earlier Gk, e.g. Pla., Phd. 58d; Rep. 7, 531a]: Hippocr., Septim. 9, VII 450 Littré; Cornutus p. 40, 12; Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2; Rhetor Apsines [III A.D.] p. 332, 17 Hammer; TestReub 4:4 al.; for גָּם always in Theod. [DBarthélemy, Les devanciers d’Aquila ’63, 31ff]), weakened force: (if) only or at least Lk 19:42 v.l.; intensive: indeed (Jos. Ant 29, 19) Ac 2:18 (J 3:2 v.l.; Mel., P. 30, 207); Hm 8:5; 9:9. καί γε οὐ μακράν= and indeed God is not far Ac 17:27.—Kühner-G. II 176b; Schwyzer II 561; B-D-F §439, 2; Rdm.2 35–37.
    γ. καὶ … δέ and also, but also (s. δέ 5b).
    δ. καίτοι (Il. 13, 267 et al., ins, pap; 4 Macc 2:6; 5:18; 7:13; Ath. 8, 1 al.; Mel., P. 58, 422) particle (B-D-F §425, 1; 450, 3; Rob. 1129 and 1154) w. finite verb (Chion, Ep. 3, 1; Jos. Ant. 5, 78) yet, on the other hand Ac 14:17. W. gen. abs. foll. (BGU 850, 4 [76 A.D.] καίτοι ἐμοῦ σε πολλὰ ἐρωτήσαντος; 898, 26; Philo, Vi. Mos. 1, 20; Jos., Ant. 2, 321; Ath. 19, 2; 25, 2) Hb 4:3.—καίτοι γε or καί τοι γε (since Aristoph., Ach. 611; but esp. in later Gk. [cp. Schwyzer II 561; MMeister, De Aiocho dial., Breslau diss. 1915 p. 31, 5]; Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 364b; Jos., Bell. 1, 7, Ant. 5, 36; Epict. 3, 24, 90; Just., A II, 11, 2; D. 7, 3; Ath. 3, 1; 22, 7; SIG 685, 76 and 82 [139 B.C.]) although J 4:2; Ac 14:17 v.l.; Dg 8:3. W. part. foll. (Jos., C. Ap. 1, 230; Mel., P. 58, 422) AcPt Ox 849, 18.—Kühner-G. II 151f; B-D-F §439, 1; 450, 3.—For ἀλλὰ κ., δὲ και, ἐὰν κ., εἰ κ., ἢ κ. s. ἀλλά, δέ, ἐάν, εἰ, ἤ.—ERobson, KAI-Configurations in the Gk. NT, 3 vols. diss. Syracuse ’79. LfgrE s.v. καί col. 1273f (lit.). DELG. M-M. EDNT.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > καί

  • 13 ἕκαστος

    ἕκαστος, η, ον (Hom.+) one of an aggregate in a distributive sense, each, every, distributive pronoun
    ⓐ As adj. ἕκαστον δένδρον every tree (perh. both kinds of trees, good and bad, w. ἕκαστος=ἑκάτερος, as in late H. Gk.; s. HSahlin, Zwei Lukas-Stellen, ’45, 5 w. ref. there; L-S-J-M s.v. ἕκαστος IV) Lk 6:44. ἑκάστῳ στρατιώτῃ J 19:23. καθʼ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν every day (Thu. 6, 63, 2; X., Mem. 4, 2, 12 et al.; PAmh 136, 7 al. in pap; Ex 5:8; Esth 2:11; 3:4 al.; TestAbr A 86, 22f [Stone p. 20] καθεκάστην) Hb 3:13; B 19:10; also ἑκάστης ἡμέρας AcPl Ha 6, 8 (Just., D. 2, 6) κατὰ μῆνα ἕκαστον (Lucian, Nav. 24; BGU 86, 36 al. in pap) Rv 22:2, but ἕκ. may refer to ξύλον.
    ⓑ As subst. each one, every one Mt 16:27; J 6:7; Ac 4:35; Ro 2:6; 12:3. W. partitive gen. foll. Lk 13:15; Ac 2:38; Ro 14:12; 1 Cor 15:38; 16:2; 1 Cl 24:5; 41:1; B 2:8 (cp. Just., A I, 18, 1 ἑκάστου τῶν … βασιλέων). Followed by ἴδιος (1 Esdr 5:8; Job 2:11; 3 Macc 5:21, 34): ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν δύναμιν Mt 25:15. Cp. Lk 6:44; Ac 2:8; Ro 14:5; Papias (2:16) al.—ἕ. every one (has or does someth., but one does one thing, another someth. else) 1 Cor 1:12; 14:26.—Strengthened εἷς ἕκαστος every single one (Hdt. 6, 128; Thu. 1, 77, 6; 2, 60, 4 et al.; PTebt 397, 1; 4 Macc 13:13; 15:19; Jos., Ant. 19, 305; JosAs 2:10; Ath. 4:1 πρὸς ἓν ἕκαστον; also ἕ. … τις Just., A II, 13, 3 and D. 134, 2). Mt 26:22; Ac 2:6; 20:31; Dg 8:3; Hs 8, 1, 5; 8, 11, 2 al. W. part. gen. foll. (X., An. 6, 6, 12; Ptolem., Apotel. 1, 2, 11 εἷς ἕκαστος τῶν ἀνθρώπων; 4 Macc 8:5, 9; 13:18; 16:24; 27:5 JosAs 27:5) Lk 4:40; 16:5; Ac 2:3; 17:27; 21:26; 1 Cor 12:18; Eph 4:7; 1 Th 2:11; 2 Th 1:3. ἀνὰ εἷς ἕκαστος every single one (ἀνά 3) Rv 21:21. καθʼ ἓν ἕκαστον one after the other = in detail (Hyperid. 3, 14; Dionys. Hal., Comp. 3; 23; PHal 1, 223 [III B.C.]) Ac 21:19; 1 Cl 32:1. For this καθʼ ἕκαστα (PCairGoodsp 15, 14; Just., D. 1, 4; Tat. 12, 3; καθʼ ἕκαστος Ar. [Milne 74, 21]; καθʼ ἕκαστον Tat. 41, 2; Ath. 28, 4) B 1:7.—The sg. is used w. pron. or verbs in the pl. (Hom. et al.; LXX; Jos., Bell. 6, 19) ὑμῖν ἑκάστῳ Rv 2:23; cp. 6:11. ἵνα σκορπισθῆτε ἕκαστος J 16:32; cp. Mt 18:35; Lk 2:3 (Appian, Liby. 39 §164 ἀνεζεύγνυον ἑκάτερος ἐς τὸ αὑτοῦ στρατόπεδον); Ac 11:29; Eph 4:25; Hb 8:11 (Jer 38:34); Rv 5:8; 20:13.—The pl. ἕκαστοι is extremely rare (Polyb. 1, 12, 9; Diod S 14, 5, 4; Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 3, 14 Jac.; Lucian, Herm. 68; Ath. 18, 2; 22, 5; UPZ 110, 47; 53; 152 [164 B.C.]) Phil 2:4; Rv 6:11 t.r. (Erasmian rdg.); Hs 5, 6, 2.—S. πᾶς and ref. to Schmidt, Syn. IV 547. DELG. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἕκαστος

  • 14 ὁ

    ὁ, [full] ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
    A demonstr. Pronoun.
    B in [dialect] Att., definite or prepositive Article.
    C in [dialect] Ep., the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nom. masc. and fem. sg. and pl., ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codd. and most printed books, exc. when used as the relative ; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, αἳ ; the nom. forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by A.D.Pron.8.7 not to be enclitic. The forms τῶν, τοῖς, ταῖς were barytone (i. e. τὼν, τοὶς, ταὶς ) in [dialect] Aeol. acc. to Aristarch. ap. A.D.Synt.51.26. For οἱ, αἱ some dialects (not Cypr., cf. Inscr.Cypr.135.30H., nor Cret., cf.Leg.Gort. 5.28, nor Lesbian, cf. Alc.81, Sapph.Supp.5.1 ) and Hom. have τοί, ταί (though οἱ, αἱ are also found in Hom.): other Homeric forms are gen. sg. τοῖο, gen. and dat. dual

    τοῖιν Od.18.34

    , al.: gen. pl. fem. τάων [pron. full] [ᾱ], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι, never ταῖσι or ταῖς in Hom.— In [dialect] Dor. and all other dialects exc. [dialect] Att. and [dialect] Ion. the fem. forms preserve the old [pron. full] ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence [dialect] Dor. etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶς ; the gen. pl. τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶν ; the gen. sg. is in many places τῶ, acc. pl. τώς, but Cret., etc., τόνς (Leg.Gort.7.7, al.) or τός (ib.3.50, al.) ; in Lesbian [dialect] Aeol. the acc. pl. forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, IG12(2).645 A13, B62 ; dat. pl. τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, v. supr.), ib.645 A8, ib.1.6 ; ταῖσι as demonstr., Sapph. 16. The [dialect] Att. Poets also used the [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Ep. forms τοῖσι, ταῖσι ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν.., τοὶ δέ.., for οἱ μέν.., οἱ δέ.., not only in lyr., as A.Pers. 584, Th. 295, 298 ;

    οἱ μέν.. τοὶ δ' S.Aj. 1404

     (anap.) ; but even in a trimeter, A.Pers. 424. In [dialect] Att. the dual has usu. only one gender, τὼ θεώ (for τὰ θεά) And.1.113 sq. ; τὼ πόλεε Foed. ap. Th.5.23 ;

    τὼ ἡμέρα X.Cyr.1.2.11

     ;

    τὼ χεῖρε Id.Mem.2.3.18

     ;

    τοῖν χεροῖν Pl.Tht. 155e

     ;

    τοῖν γενεσέοιν Id.Phd. 71e

     ;

    τοῖν πολέοιν Isoc.4.75

     (τά S.Ant. 769, Ar.Eq. 424, 484,

    ταῖν Lys.19.17

    , Is.5.16, etc. have been corrected) ; in Arc. the form τοῖς functions as gen. dual fem.,

    μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν Schwyzer664.8

     (Orchom., iv B.C.):—in Elean and [dialect] Boeot. ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, = ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, nom.pl. masc. τυΐ the following men, Schwyzer485.14 (Thespiae, iii B.C.), al., cf. infr. VIII. 5. (With ὁ, ἁ, cf. Skt. demonstr. pron. sa, sā, Goth. sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Lat. acc. sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from Τόδ] cf. Skt. tat (tad), Lat. is-tud, Goth. pata: —with τοί cf. Skt. te, Lith. tĩe, OE. pá, etc.:—with τάων cf. Skt. tāsām, Lat. is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (q. v.) is different.)
    A ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in Hom. the commonest sense: freq. also in Hdt. (1.86,5.35,al.), and sts. in Trag. (mostly in lyr., A.Supp. 1047, etc.; in trimeters, Id.Th. 197, Ag.7, Eu. 174 ; τῶν γάρ.., τῆς γάρ.., Id.Supp. 358, S.OT 1082 ; seldom in [dialect] Att. Prose, exc. in special phrases, v. infr. VI, VII):
    I joined with a Subst., to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, Il. 11.660; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with Appellat., Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.— thataged man, 7.324 ; αἰετοῦ.. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, 21.252, al. ; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, 20.181 ; οἴχετ' ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, 11.288, cf. 13.433, al.: sts. with words between the Pron. and Noun,

    αὐτὰρ ὁ αὖτε Πέλοψ 2.105

     ;

    τὸν Ἕκτορι μῦθον ἐνίσπες 11.186

    , cf. 703, al.:—different from this are cases like Il.1.409 αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι, τοὺς δὲ κατὰ πρύμνας τε καὶ ἀμφ' ἅλα ἔλσαι Ἀχαιούς if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships— I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, cf. 1.472, 4.20, 329, al.
    II freq. without a Subst., he, she, it,

    ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε Il.1.12

    , al.
    III placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons., ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc., Il.17.172 ; οἷ' οὔ πώ τιν' ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν.. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who.., Od.2.119, cf. Il.5.332 ;

    θάλαμον τὸν ἀφίκετο, τόν ποτε τέκτων ξέσσεν Od.21.43

    , cf. 1.116, 10.74 :—for the [dialect] Att. usage v. infr.
    IV before a Possessive Pron. its demonstr. force is sts. very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, Il.6.407, cf. 11.608 ; but in 15.58, 16.40, and elsewh. it is merely the Art.
    V for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, v. infr. B. init.
    VI ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.. without a Subst., in all cases, genders, and numbers, Hom., etc.: sts. in Opposition, where ὁ μέν prop. refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter ; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter,

    ὁ δέ

     the former,

    Pl.Prt. 359e

    , Isoc.2.32,34: sts. in Partition, the one.., the other.., etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in gen. pl., being divided by the ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.., into parts,

    ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι.., τῶν δ' αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο Il.18.595

     ;

    τῶν πόλεων αἱ μὲν τυραννοῦνται, αἱ δὲ δημοκρατοῦνται, αἱ δὲ ἀριστοκρατοῦνται Pl.R. 338d

    , etc.: but freq. the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition,

    ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον Il.5.28

    , cf. Od.12.73, etc.: so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., S.Ant. 22, etc. ;

    πηγὴ ἡ μὲν εἰς αὐτὸν ἔδυ, ἡ δὲ ἔξω ἀπορρεῖ Pl.Phdr. 255c

     ; if the Noun be collective, it is in the gen. sg.,

    ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος D.42.6

     : sts. a Noun is added in apposition with ὁ μέν or

    ὁ δέ, ὁ μὲν οὔτασ' Ἀτύμνιον ὀξέϊ δουρὶ Ἀντίλοχος.., Μάρις δὲ.. Il.16.317

    -19, cf. 116 ;

    τοὺς μὲν τὰ δίκαια ποιεῖν ἠνάγκασα, τοὺς πλουσίους, τοὺς δὲ πένητας κτλ. D.18.102

    , cf. Pl.Grg. 501a, etc.
    2 when a neg. accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g.

    τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ S.OC24

     ;

    τὸν φιλόσοφον σοφίας ἐπιθυμητὴν εἶναι, οὐ τῆς μὲν τῆς δ' οὔ, ἀλλὰ πάσης Pl.R. 475b

     ;

    οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μὲν τὰς δ' οὔ· οὐδὲ πάντων, ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν τῶν δ' οὔ Id.Cri. 47a

    , etc.
    3 ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite,

    ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν.., ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος X.Cyr.3.1.41

     ;

    νόμους.. τοὺς μὲν ὀρθῶς τιθέασιν τοὺς δέ τινας οὐκ ὀρθῶς Pl.R. 339c

    , cf. Phlb. 13c.
    4 on τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., or τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., v. infr. VIII.4.
    5 ὁ μέν is freq. used without a corresponding

    ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ' ἐσκίδναντο.., Μυρμιδόνας δ' οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι Il.23.3

    , cf. 24.722, Th.8.12, etc.: also folld. by

    ἀλλά, ἡ μὲν γάρ μ' ἐκέλευε.., ἀλλ' ἐγὼ οὐκ ἔθελον Od.7.304

     ; by ἄλλος δέ, Il.6.147, etc. ;

    τὸν μὲν.., ἕτερον δέ Ar.Av. 843

    , etc. ;

    ὁ μέν.., ὃς δέ.. Thgn.205

     (v.l. οὐδέ): less freq. ὁ δέ in the latter clause without ὁ μέν preceding, τῇ ῥα παραδραμέτην φεύγων, ὁ δ' ὄπισθε διώκων (for ὁ μὲν φεύγων) Il.22.157 ;

    σφραγῖδε.. χρυσοῦν ἔχουσα τὸν δακτύλιον, ἡ δ' ἑτέρα ἀργυροῦν IG22.1388.45

    , cf.

    μέν D.

     III ;

    γεωργὸς μὲν εἷς, ὁ δὲ οἰκοδόμος, ἄλλος δέ τις ὑφαντής Pl.R. 369d

    , cf. Tht. 181d.
    6 ὁ δέ following μέν sts. refers to the subject of the preceding clause,

    τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ', ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον.. βεβλήκει Il. 4.491

     ;

    τὴν μὲν γενομένην αὐτοῖσι αἰτίην οὐ μάλα ἐξέφαινε, ὁ δὲ ἔλεγέ σφι Hdt.6.3

    , cf. 1.66,6.9, 133,7.6 : rare in [dialect] Att. Prose,

    ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν Th.1.87

     ;

    ἔμενον ὡς κατέχοντες τὸ ἄκρον· οἱ δ' οὐ κατεῖχον X.An.4.2.6

     : this is different from ὁ δέ in apodosi, v. infr. 7 ; also from passages in which both clauses have a common verb, v. ὅ γε 11.
    7 ὁ δέ is freq. used simply in continuing a narrative, Il.1.43, etc.; also used by Hom. in apodosi after a relat., v. ὅδε 111.3.
    VII the following usages prevailed in [dialect] Att. Prose,
    1 in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nom. sg. masc. καὶ ὅς ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Art. were used (v.

    ὅς A.

     II.I and cf. Skt. sas, alternat. form of sa) ; so, in acc.,

    καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν Pl.Smp. 174a

    , cf. X.Cyr.1.3.9, etc.; also in Hdt.,

    καὶ τὴν φράσαι 6.61

    , al.
    2 ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such,

    τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ Pl.Lg. 721b

     : but mostly in acc.,

    καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν Lys.1.23

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 784d ;

    τὰ καὶ τὰ πεπονθώς D.21.141

    , cf. 9.68 ;

    τὸ καὶ τό Id.18.243

     ; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, Arist.Rh. 1401a4, cf. 1413a22 ; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad,

    τὸν δ' ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν Thgn.398

    , cf. Pi.P.5.55,7.20, al.;

    τῶν τε καὶ τῶν καιρόν Id.O. 2.53

     ; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, Hp.Acut.46 ; cf. A. VI.8.
    VIII abs. usages of single cases,
    1 fem. dat. τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, Il.5.752, 858, al.: folld. by ᾗ, 13.52, etc.: also in Prose,

    τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ X.Ath.2.12

    .
    b with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, Il.10.531,11.149, 12.124 ;

    τῇ ἴμεν ᾗ.. 15.46

     ;

    δελφῖνες τῇ καὶ τῇ ἐθύνεον ἰχθυάοντες Hes.Sc. 210

     :—only poet.
    c of Manner,

    τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν

     in this way, thus,

    Od.8.510

    .
    d repeated, τῇ μέν.., τῇ δέ.., in one way.., in another.., or partly.., partly.., E.Or. 356, Pl.Smp. 211a, etc.: without

    μέν, τῇ μᾶλλον, τῇ δ' ἧσσον Parm.8.48

    .
    e relat., where, by which way, only [dialect] Ep., as Il.12.118, Od.4.229.
    2 neut. dat. τῷ, therefore, on this account, freq. in Hom., Il.1.418, 2.254, al. (v. infr.): also in Trag., A.Pr. 239, S.OT 510 (lyr.) ; in Prose,

    τῷ τοι.. Pl.Tht. 179d

    , Sph. 230b.
    b thus, so, Il.2.373, 13.57, etc.: it may also, esp. when εἰ precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, Od.1.239,3.224, 258,al., Theoc.29.11.—In Hom. the true form is prob. τῶ, as in cod. A, or τώ, cf. A.D.Adv.199.2.
    3 neut. acc. τό, wherefore, Il.3.176, Od.8.332, al., S.Ph. 142(lyr.) ; also τὸ δέ abs., but the fact is.., Pl.Ap. 23a, Men. 97c, Phd. 109d, Tht. 157b, R. 340d, Lg. 967a ; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (cf. supr. VI. 6),

    τὸ δ' ἐπὶ κακουργίᾳ.. ἐπετήδευσαν Th.1.37

     ;

    τὸ δὲ.. ἡμῖν μᾶλλον περιέσται Id.2.89

     ; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, Nic.Dam.58J.
    4 τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., partly.., partly.., or on the one hand.., on the other.., Th.7.36, etc., cf.Od.2.46 ; more freq. τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., Hdt.1.173, S.Tr. 534, etc.; also

    τὰ μέν τι.., τὰ δέ τι.. X.An.4.1.14

     ;

    τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Luc.Macr.14

     ;

    τὰ μέν.., τὸ δὲ πλέον.. Th.1.90

     : sts. without τὸ μέν.. in the first clause,

    τὸ δέ τι Id.1.107

    ,7.48 : rarely of Time, τὰ μὲν πολλὰ.., τέλος δέ several times.. and finally, Hdt.3.85.
    5 of Time, sts. that time, sts. this (present) time, συνμαχία κ' ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) SIG9.3 (Olympia, vi B.C.): so with Preps., ἐκ τοῦ, [dialect] Ep. τοῖο, from that time, Il.1.493,15.601.
    b πρὸ τοῦ, sts. written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, Hdt.1.103, 122,5.55, A.Ag. 1204, Ar.Nu.5, etc.;

    ἐν τῷ πρὸ τοῦ χρόνῳ Th.1.32

    , cf. A.Eu. 462 ;

    τὸ πρὸ τοῦ D.S.20.59

    .
    6 ἐν τοῖς is freq. used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, Hdt.7.137 ; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, Th.1.6, etc.; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος ( πρώτοις codd.) Pherecr.145.4 ; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, Aristid. Or.43(1).16, cf. 37(2).2: when used with fem. Nouns, ἐν τοῖς remained without change of gender, ἐν τοῖς πλεῖσται δὴ νῆες the greatest number of ships, Th.3.17; ἐν τοῖς πρώτη ἐγένετο (sc. ἡ στάσις) ib.82 : also with Advbs.,

    ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα Id.8.90

    , Pl.Cri. 52a, Plu.2.74e, 421d, 723e, Brut.6, 11,al., Paus.1.16.3, etc.;

    ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα Th.7.71

     ;

    τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα μελάγγειον οὖσαν Plu.2.364c

     : in late Prose, also with Positives,

    ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον Aristid.Or.48(24).47

     codd.; with

    πάνυ, ἐν τοῖς πάνυ D.H.1.19

    , cf. 66 ( ἐν ταῖς πάνυ f.l. 4.14,15).
    B ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signf. in the earliest Gr., becoming commoner later. In Hom. the demonstr. force can generally be traced, v. supr. A. I, but the definite Art. must be recognized in places like Il.1.167,7.412, 9.309, 12.289, Od.19.372 : also when joined to an Adj. to make it a Subst.,

    αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον

     the hindmost man,

    Il.11.178

     ;

    τὸν ἄριστον 17.80

     ;

    τὸν δύστηνον 22.59

     ;

    τὸν προὔχοντα 23.325

     ; τῷ πρώτῳ.., τῷ δευτέρῳ.., etc., ib. 265sq. ; also in

    τῶν ἄλλων 2.674

    , al.: with Advs.,

    τὸ πρίν 24.543

    , al.;

    τὸ πάρος περ 17.720

     ;

    τὸ πρόσθεν 23.583

     ; also τὸ τρίτον ib. 733 ;

    τὰ πρῶτα 1.6

    ,al.; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest, 23.454 ;

    ἀνδρῶν τῶν τότε 9.559

    .—The true Art., however, is first fully established in fifth-cent. [dialect] Att., whilst the demonstr. usage disappears, exc. in a few cases, V. A. VI-VIII.—Chief usages, esp. in [dialect] Att.
    I not only with common Appellats., Adjs., and Parts., to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also freq. where we use the Possessive Pron.,

    τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην Ar.Ach.5

     ; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, And.1.61, etc. ; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, S.Ant. 190 ; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, Th.1.12;

    οὐχ ὑπὲρ τὴν οὐσίαν ποιούμενοι τοὺς παῖδας Pl.R. 372b

    .
    b omitted with pr.nn.and freq. with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, v. θεός 1.1, βασιλεύς III ; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, IG12.4.1, al.: but added to pr. nn., when attention is to be called to the previous mention of the person, as Th. (3.70 ) speaks first of Πειθίας and then refers to him repeatedly as ὁ Π.; cf. Θράσυλος in Id.8.104, with ὁ Θ. ib. 105 ; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, E.Fr. 480 ; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with pr. nn., save to give pecul. emphasis, like Lat. ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, S.OT 729, El.35, etc.: later, however, the usage became very common (the Homeric usage of ὁ with a pr. n. is different, v. A.I).
    c Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in SE183b7, PA642a28, al., but ὁ Σωκράτης when he means the Platonic Socrates, as Pol.1261a6, al.: so with other pr.nn., EN1145a21, 1146a21, al.
    d for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc., v. καί B.2.
    2 in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type,

    οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν.. λεύσσει Il.3.109

    ;

    πονηρὸν ὁ συκοφάντης D.18.242

    , etc.
    b freq. with abstract Nouns,

    ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως Th.3.45

    , etc.
    3 of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, v. γεωγράφος, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός.
    4 with infs., which thereby become Substs., τὸ εἴργειν prevention, Pl.Grg. 505b ; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, S.Ant. 1348(anap.), etc.: when the subject is expressed it is put between the Art.and the inf., τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, Pl.Phd. 62b ; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, Hdt.1.86.
    5 in neut. before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man ; τὸ λέγω the word λέγω ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', E.Hipp. 265(lyr.); τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, Pl.Men. 72e : and so before whole clauses, ἡ δόξα.. περὶ τοῦ οὕστινας δεῖ ἄρχειν the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', Id.R. 431e ; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ' ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if.. ', X.Cyr. 5.1.21, cf. Pl.R. 327c, etc.;

    τοὺς τοῦ τί πρακτέον λογισμούς D.23.148

     ; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, Arist.Pol. 1283b11.
    6 before relat. clauses, when the Art. serves to combine the whole relat. clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, Pl.Cra. 435a ; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν.., καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) Id.Criti. 115b ;

    τῶν ὅσοι ἂν.. ἀγαθοὶ κριθῶσιν Id.R. 469b

     ;

    ἐκ γῆς καὶ πυρὸς μείξαντες καὶ τῶν ὅσα πυρὶ καὶ γῇ κεράννυται Id.Prt. 320d

    , cf. Hyp.Lyc.2 ;

    ταύτην τε τὴν αἰτίαν καὶ τὴν ὅθεν ἡ κίνησις Arist.Metaph. 987a8

     ;

    τὸν ὃς ἔφη Lys.23.8

     : hence the relat., by attraction, freq. follows the case of the Art., τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν τε καὶ ὑμῖν, i.e. τοῖς οὖσιν οἷοι ἡμεῖς καὶ ὑμεῖς, X.HG2.3.25, etc.
    7 before Prons.,
    a before the pers. Prons., giving them greater emphasis, but only in acc.,

    τὸν ἐμέ Pl.Tht. 166a

    ,Phlb. 20b ; τὸν.. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ ib. 59b ;

    τὸν αὑτόν Id.Phdr. 258a

     ; on ὁ αὐτός, v. αὐτός 111.
    b before the interrog. Pron. (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, A.Pr. 251, Ar. Pax 696 ; also τὰ τί; because οἷα went before, ib. 693. Of τίς only the neut. is thus used (v.supr.): ποῖος is thus used not only in neut. pl., τὰ ποῖα; E.Ph. 707 ; but also in the other genders, ὁ ποῖος; ib. 1704 ; τῆς ποίας μερίδος; D.18.64 ; τοῖς ποίοις.. ; Arist.Ph. 227b1.
    c with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc., the Art. either makes the Pron. into a Subst.,

    ὁ τοιοῦτος

     that sort of person,

    X.Mem.4.2.21

    , etc.; or subjoins it to a Subst. which already has an Art.,

    τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην D.41.13

    .
    8 before ἅπας, Pi.N.1.69, Hdt.3.64, 7.153 (s.v.l.), S.OC 1224 (lyr.), D.18.231, etc.; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, Arist.Pol. 1287b8, 1288a19 : on its usage with ἕκαστος, v. sub voc.; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc., v. ἄλλος 11.6,

    πολύς 11.3

    , etc.
    9 the Art. with the [comp] Comp. is rare, if ἤ follows, S.Ant. 313, OC 796.
    II elliptic expressions:
    1 before the gen. of a pr.<*>., to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (sc. υἱός) Th.4.104 ; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (sc. θυγάτηρ) E.Hel. 470 : also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, Lys.32.24, Alciphr.2.2.10 ; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M. the wife of S., Ar.Ec.46 ; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, X.An.1.2.15 ; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of A., Hp.Hum.20.
    2 generally, before a gen. it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, Th.4.23,6.60 ; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, Id.4.83, cf. 6.89, etc.; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, Id.4.18 ; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, ib.55 ; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, E.Supp.78(lyr.); τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, S.Tr. 498(lyr.): hence with neut. of Possessive Pron., τὸ ἐμόν, τὸ σόν, what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, S.Aj. 124, El. 251, etc.: and with gen. of 3 pers.,

    τὸ τῆσδε E.Hipp.48

    . But τό τινος is freq. also, a man's word or saying, as

    τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος Hdt.1.86

     ; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, Pl.Tht. 183e ; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, Ar.V. 1432, D.54.7, Theoc.2.76, Herod.5.52, Ev.Luc.2.49.
    3 very freq. with cases governed by Preps.. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, Th.4.13 ; οἱ ἀμφί τινα, οἱ περί τινα, such an one and his followers, v. ἀμφί c.1.3, περί c.1.2 ; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, Th.1.59, al.; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, Id.7.70 ; τὰ ἀπ' Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, Id.8.48 ; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, Id.2.87, etc.
    4 on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc., v. μά IV.
    5 in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (sc. ὁδόν) Pl.Ly. 203a ; ἡ ἐπὶ θανάτῳ (sc. στολή, δέσις), v. θάνατος; κατὰ τὴν ἐμήν (sc. γνώμην), v. ἐμός 11.4 ; ἡ αὔριον (sc. ἡμέρα), v. αὔριον; ἡ Λυδιστί (sc. ἁρμονία) Arist.Pol. 1342b32, etc.: freq. with Advs., which thus take an adj. sense, as ὁ, ἡ, τὸ νῦν;

    ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς Th.1.52

     ; οἱ τότε, οἱ ἔπειτα (sc. ἄνθρωποι), ib.9,10, etc. ; but τό stands abs. with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a Subst., as

    κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο E.Ph. 266

    , cf.[315] (lyr.);

    ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν Id.Or. 1412

    (lyr.): rarely abs. in gen., ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω to go forward, X.An.1.3.1 ;

    τοῦ προσωτάτω δραμεῖν S.Aj. 731

    .
    C as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects ; both in nom. sg. masc. ὅ, as

    κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες Od.2.262

    , cf. 1.300, al. ;

    Ἔρως, ὃ κατ' ὀμμάτων στάζεις πόθον E.Hipp. 526

    (lyr.);

    Ἄδωνις, ὃ κἠν Ἀχέροντι φιλεῖται Theoc.15.86

     ; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, Schwyzer679.12,25 ([place name] Cyprus) ; and in the forms beginning with τ, esp. in Hom. (Od.4.160, al.), Hdt.1.7, al.: also in [dialect] Ion. Poets,

    ἐν τῷ κάθημαι Archil.87.3

    , cf. Semon.7.3, Anacr.86 (prob.), Herod.2.64, al.: freq. in Trag.,

    τῆς S.OC 1258

    , Tr. 381, 728, E.Alc. 883 (anap.);

    τῷ S.Ph.14

     ;

    τήν Id.OC 747

    , Tr.47, El. 1144 ; τό Id.OT 1427 ; τῶν ib. 1379, Ant. 1086.—Never in Com. or [dialect] Att. Prose:—[dialect] Ep. gen. sg.

    τεῦ Il.18.192

    (s.v.l.).
    D CRASIS OF ARTICLE:
    a [dialect] Att. ὁ, ἡ, τό, with [pron. full] ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιον; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθά; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc.; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντος; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([pron. full] ¯ ?ὁX?ὁX), [dialect] Ion. οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (v. ἕτερος), [dialect] Att. fem. ἡτέρα, dat. θητέρᾳ (v. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc., before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (freq. written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Pap.); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί= αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ.
    b other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g., [dialect] Dor. ὡξ from

    ὁ ἐξ Theoc.1.65

    , ὥλαφος from ὁ ἔλαφος ib. 135 ; [dialect] Ion. ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς- SIG57.45 (Milet., v B.C.) ; ὡυτή from

    ἡ αὐτή Heraclit.60

    , etc.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὁ

  • 15 ὁδός

    ὁδός, οῦ, ἡ (Hom.+) gener. an established ‘way’ or ‘course’ such as a road or channel of a river.
    ① a way for traveling or moving from one place to another, way, road, highway, used by pers. or impers. entities: Mt 2:12; 21:8ab; Mk 11:8; Lk 3:5 (Is 40:4 v.l.); 19:36 al.; ἑτέρα ὁδ. Js 2:25. ἡ ὁδ. ἡ Καμπανή=Lat. Via Campana the Campanian Way Hv 4, 1, 2 (s. MDibelius, Hdb. ad loc.; Hülsen, Pauly-W. III 1434); described as ἡ ὁδ. ἡ δημοσία the public highway ibid. (s. δημόσιος 1). τὴν βασιλικήν AcPl Ant 13 (τὴν β. ὁδόν Aa I 237, 4). ἡ ὁδ. ἡ καταβαίνουσα ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Γάζαν Ac 8:26. παρέρχεσθαι διὰ τῆς ὁδ. pass by (a certain place) on the road Mt 8:28 (on διὰ τ. ὁδ. cp. Philo, Abr. 269; ParJer 3:21). πίπτειν εἰς τὴν ὁδ. fall on the road Hv 3, 7, 1a. ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τὴν ὁδ., μένειν ἐν τῇ ὁδ. v 3, 2, 9a. κυλίεσθαι ἐκ τῆς ὁδ. roll off the road 3, 2, 9b and 3, 7, 1b. Of a fig tree ἐπὶ τῆς ὁδοῦ by the roadside Mt 21:19. Of beggars καθῆσθαι παρὰ τὴν ὁδ. sit by the roadside 20:30; Mk 10:46; Lk 18:35 (Stephan. Byz. s.v. Εὔτρησις: κώμη … κεῖται παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν), but along the way also merits attention (cp. παρὰ τὰς ὁδούς Antig. Car. 29). Of seed that is sown πίπτειν παρὰ τὴν ὁδ. fall along the road (Dalman, PJ 22, 1926, 121ff) Mt 13:4; Mk 4:4; Lk 8:5; cp. Mt 13:19; Mk 4:15; Lk 8:12. ἐξέρχεσθαι εἰς τὰς ὁδ. go out into the streets Mt 22:10; Lk 14:23; for διεξόδους τῶν ὁδ. Mt 22:9 s. διέξοδος; καταβαίνειν ἐν τῇ ὁδ. go down the road Lk 10:31. πορεύεσθαι κατὰ τὴν ὁδ. go on along the highway Ac 8:36. AcPl Ant 13, 20 (sc. ὁδόν after AcPlTh 3=Aa I 237, 4). ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ ᾗ ἤρχου (by attraction for ἣν ἤρ.; X., An. 2, 2, 10) 9:17. ἑτοιμάζειν τὴν ὁδ. τινος prepare someone’s way Mt 3:3; Mk 1:3; Lk 3:4 (all after Is 40:3); cp. Lk 1:76 and for the pass. Rv 16:12. Also κατασκευάζειν τὴν ὁδ. τινος Mt 11:10; Mk 1:2; Lk 7:27. εὐθύνειν τὴν ὁδ. τινος J 1:23. κατευθύνειν τὴν ὁδ. τινος 1 Th 3:11 (PsSol 8:6).—W. obj. gen. to indicate direction (Gen 3:24) Mt 10:5 (s. 3a below); Hb 9:8.—The acc. ὁδόν, following the Hebr.דֶּרֶךְ, and contrary to customary Gk. usage (but single cases of ὁδός take on the functions of adverbs or prepositions in the Gk. language as well: cp. Diog. L. 7, 156; Synes., Providence 1, 8 ὁδῷ βαδίζειν=‘go straight forward’; Appian, Hann. 47 §201 ὁδὸν ἐλάσσονα by a shorter [or the shortest] way; Plut., Mor. 371c.—The nearest parallel to the NT usage cited below would be the report of Diog. L. 9, 8 concerning Heraclitus: τὴν μεταβολὴν ὁδὸν ἄνω κάτω γίνεσθαι, if it might be translated: ‘Change [in the universe] is accomplished in an upward and downward direction’.) is used as a prep. toward (Dt 11:30; 3 Km 8:48; 18:43 ὁδὸν τῆς θαλάσσης. Cp. B-D-F §161, 1) ὁδ. θαλάσσης toward the sea Mt 4:15 (Is 8:23 LXX, Aq., Sym.).—LCasson, Travel in the Ancient World ’74; OEANE IV 431–34.
    ② the action of traveling, way, trip, journey, transf. sense of 1 (Hes., Theogon. 754; X., Mem. 3, 13, 5; Herodian 2, 11, 1; JosAs 9:4 al.; Just., D. 85, 5) εἰς (τὴν) ὁδ. for the trip/journey (Jos., Ant. 12, 198) Mt 10:10; Mk 6:8; Lk 9:3; on the way Mk 10:17. ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way (Gen 45:24; Jos., Ant. 6, 55; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 10, 2, end) Mt 15:32; 20:17; Mk 8:3, 27; 9:33f; 10:52; Lk 9:57; 12:58; 24:32; Ac 9:27. τὰ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ what had happened to them on the way Lk 24:35. εἶναι ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ Mt 5:25; Mk 10:32. ἐξ ὁδοῦ from a trip (Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 91 §418; Damasc., Vi. Isid. 203 p. 138, 8 W.; Jos., Vi. 246; 248 ἐκ τ. ὁδοῦ) Lk 11:6. ἔκαμνον ἐκ τῆς ὁδοῦ GJs 15:1. κατὰ τὴν ὁδ. along the way (Arrian, Anab. 1, 26, 5; 3, 19, 3; PKöln VI, 245, 20 καθʼ ὁδόν ‘on my way’; Jos., Ant. 8, 404; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 10, 2) 10:4; Ac 25:3; 26:13. ἀνὰ μέσον τῆς ὁδοῦ halfway GJs 17:3. τ. ὁδὸν αὐτοῦ πορεύεσθαι go on his way Ac 8:39 (cp. X., Cyr. 5, 2, 22; TestAbr B 2 p. 106, 2 [Stone p. 60]). πορεύεσθαι τῇ ὁδῷ 1 Cl 12:4. ὁδὸν ποιεῖν make one’s way (Judg 17:8) Mk 2:23; s. ὁδοποιέω.—σαββάτου ὁδός a Sabbath day’s trip could also belong under 1; it signified the distance an Israelite might travel on the Sabbath, two thousand paces or cubits (=about 800 meters.—Mishnah: ˓Erubin 4, 3; 7; 5, 7; Origen, Princ. 4, 17; Schürer II 472f; 484f; Billerb. II 590–94; Moore, Judaism II 32) Ac 1:12. ἡμέρας ὁδός a day’s trip Lk 2:44 (Diod S 19, 17, 3; Appian, Samn. 1 §5; Polyaenus 7, 21, 1; Lucian, Syr. Dea 9; Procop., Aed. 6, 1, 12; cp. Hdt. 4, 101; X., Cyr. 1, 1, 3 παμπόλλων ἡμερῶν ὁδός; Ael. Aristid. 36, 87 K.=48 p. 473 D.: τριῶν ἡμ. ὁδ.; Gen 30:36; 31:23; Ex 3:18; Jdth 2:21; 1 Macc 5:24; 7:45; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 5 Jac.; Jos., Ant. 15, 293).
    ③ course of behavior, way, way of life, fig. ext. of 1 and 2, but oft. w. the picture prominently in mind (SibOr 3, 233; ὁδὸς τις γίνεται one finds a way (out) Did., Gen. 228, 7).
    ⓐ way εἰς ὁδ. ἐθνῶν μὴ ἀπέλθητε do not go in the way of the Gentiles i.e. do not turn to the Gentiles Mt 10:5 (but s. 1.—JJeremias, Jesu Verheissung für d. Völker, ’56). εὐρύχωρος ἡ ὁδ. ἡ ἀπάγουσα εἰς τὴν ἀπώλειαν 7:13 (Pla., Gorg. 524a τὼ ὁδώ, ἡ μὲν εἰς μακάρων νήσους, ἡ δʼ εἰς Τάρταρον). Also ἡ ὁδ. τῆς ἀπωλείας ApcPt 1:1; ἡ τοῦ μέλανος ὁδ. 20:1. ἡ τοῦ θανάτου ὁδ. (Herm. Wr. 1, 29) D 5:1. Cp. 1:1 (on this Jer 21:8; TestAsh 1:3, 5 ὁδοὶ δύο, καλοῦ κ. κακοῦ; SibOr 8, 399 ὁδοὶ δύο, ζωῆς θανάτου τε; Ael. Aristid. 30 p. 577 D.: δυοῖν ὁδοῖν τὴν μὲν … τὴν δέ.—The two ὁδοί of Heracles: X., Mem. 2, 1, 21ff; Maximus Tyr. 14, 1a; e; k). ὁδ. σκότους 5:4b. Description of the way B 20; D 5:1ff. τεθλιμμένη ἡ ὁδ. ἡ ἀπάγουσα εἰς τὴν ζωήν Mt 7:14 (TestAbr A 2 p. 88, 28 [Stone p. 4]). Also ἡ ὁδ. τῆς ζωῆς D 1:2. ἡ ὁδ. τοῦ φωτός 19:1. Description of the way B 19; D 1–4. ὁδ. εἰρήνης Lk 1:79; Ro 3:17 (Is 59:8; Ps 13:3). ὁδ. ζωῆς Ac 2:28 (Ps 15:11); cp. D 1:2 above. ὁδ. σωτηρίας Ac 16:17. ὁδ. πρόσφατος κ. ζῶσα Hb 10:20. ὁδ. δικαιοσύνης B 1:4; 5:4a (in these two pass. the imagery of ‘way’ is stronger than in Mt 21:32 and 2 Pt 2:21, on the latter two pass. s. below in b). Of love ὁδ. ἡ ἀναφέρουσα εἰς θεόν IEph 9:1 (cp. Orig., C. Cels. 1, 56, 6 [Christ as teacher of the ‘way’]). αὕτη ἡ ὁδ. ἐν ᾗ εὕρομεν τὸ σωτήριον ἡμῶν 1 Cl 36:1.—Christ calls himself ἡ ὁδ. (i.e., to God) J 14:6, cp. 4f (s. Orig., C. Cels. 6, 66, 28; cp. Iren. 1, 15, 2 [Harv. I 149, 6].—Hdb. and Bultmann [p. 466ff—Engl. 603ff w. other lit.]; JPascher, Η ΒΑΣΙΛΙΚΗ ΟΔΟΣ; D. Königsweg. z. Wiedergeb. u. Vergottung b. Philon v. Alex. ’31).
    ⓑ way of life, way of acting, conduct (Did., Gen. 168, 8) (ἡ) ὁδ. (τῆς) δικαιοσύνης (Pr 21:16, 21; Job 24:13); En 99:10; Mt 21:32 (ἐν ὁδῷ δικ. [cp. Pr 8:20] denotes either the way of life practiced by the Baptist [Zahn; OHoltzmann] or the type of conduct he demanded [described in Just., D. 38, 2 as ἡ τοῦ βαπτίσματο ὁδ.; cp. HHoltzmann; BWeiss; JWeiss; EKlostermann; Schniewind]. S. JKleist, CBQ 8, ’46, 192–96); 2 Pt 2:21. τῇ ὁδ. αὐτοῦ ἐπλανήθη he went astray in his path (=‘in his conduct’) 1 Cl 16:6 (Is 53:6). ἐκ πλάνης ὁδοῦ αὐτοῦ from his misguided way of life Js 5:20. ἡ ὁδ. τῆς ἀληθείας (Ps 118:30) vs. 19 v.l. (cp. 2 Pt 2:2 in c below); 1 Cl 35:5. ἀφιέναι τὴν ὁδ. τὴν ἀληθινήν Hv 3, 7, 1. τῇ ὁδ. τοῦ Κάϊν πορεύεσθαι follow the way of Cain Jd 11. ὁδ. δικαίων, ἀσεβῶν 11:7 (Ps 1:6). (ἡ) ὁδ. (ἡ) δικαία (Jos., Ant. 13, 290) 12:4; 2 Cl 5:7. τὸ δίκαιον ὀρθὴν ὁδ. ἔχει the way of righteousness is a straight one Hm 6, 1, 2. τῇ ὀρθῇ ὁδ. πορεύεσθαι ibid.; cp. 6, 1, 4 (Just., D. 8, 2). Opp. ἡ στρεβλὴ ὁδ. the crooked way 6, 1, 3. θέωμεν τὴν ὁδ. τὴν εὐθεῖαν let us run the straight course 2 Cl 7:3; cp. 2 Pt 2:15. Of life in association w. polytheists αὕτη ἡ ὁδ. ἡδυτέρα αὐτοῖς ἐφαίνετο Hs 8, 9, 1. The basic mng. has disappeared to such a degree that one can speak of καρποὶ τῆς ὁδ. 1 Cl 57:6 (Pr 1:31) and ἔργα τῆς πονηρᾶς ὁδ. 4:10.—Pl. ways, of one’s total conduct Ac 14:16; Ro 3:16 (Is 59:7; Ps 13:3a; PsSol 6:2; 10:4 al.; ApcSed 15:5); Js 1:8; Hv 2, 2, 6. Esp. of the ways of God, referring either to the ways that God initiates: ὡς … ἀνεξιχνίαστοι αἱ ὁδ. αὐτοῦ how inscrutable are his ways Ro 11:33; δίκαιαι καὶ ἀληθιναὶ αἱ ὁδ. σου Rv 15:3; αἱ ὁδ. τῆς εὐλογίας the ways of blessing 1 Cl 31:1; or to the ways that humans should take: οὐκ ἔγνωσαν τὰς ὁδ. μου Hb 3:10 (Ps 94:10). διαστρέφειν τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ κυρίου Ac 13:10. διδάσκειν τὰς ὁδ. σου 1 Cl 18:13 (Ps 50:15). Likew. the sing. τὴν ὁδ. τοῦ θεοῦ ἐν ἀληθείᾳ διδάσκειν Mt 22:16; cp. Mk 12:14; Lk 20:21. ἀφιέναι τὴν ὁδ. τοῦ θεοῦ ApcPt 20:34. παρέβησαν ἐκ τῆς ὁδ. 1 Cl 53:2 (Ex 32:8).
    ⓒ of the whole way of life fr. a moral and spiritual viewpoint, the way, teaching in the most comprehensive sense (Lucian, Hermot. 46 ὁδ. of the doctrine of a philosophical school Just., D. 39, 2 ἀπολείποντας τήν ὁδ. τῆς πλάνης; 142, 3 διὰ ταύτης τῆς ὁδοῦ), and specif. of teaching and manner of life relating to Jesus Christ (SMcCasland, JBL 77, ’58, 222–30: Qumran parallels) κατὰ τὴν ὁδ. ἣν λέγουσιν αἵρεσιν according to the Way, which they call a (heterodox) sect Ac 24:14. ἐάν τινας εὕρῃ τῆς ὁδ. ὄντας if he should find people who belonged to the Way 9:2. ὁδ. κυρίου, θεοῦ of teaching relating to Jesus and God’s purpose 18:25f. κακολογεῖν τὴν ὁδ. ἐνώπιον τοῦ πλήθους 19:9. ταύτην τὴν ὁδ. διώκειν persecute this religion 22:4. ἐγένετο τάραχος περὶ τῆς ὁδ. there arose a disturbance concerning the Way 19:23. τὰ περὶ τῆς ὁδ. (the things) concerning the teaching 24:22. ἡ ὁδὸς τ. ἀληθείας of the true Christian teaching (in contrast to that of dissidents vs. 1) 2 Pt 2:2 (OdeSol 11:3). Of the way of love καθʼ ὑπερβολὴν ὁδ. a far better way 1 Cor 12:31. ἡ ὁδ. τῆς δικαιοσύνης ApcPt 7:22; 13:28. Likew. the pl. (En 104:13 μαθεῖν ἐξ αὐτῶν [τ. βίβλων] πάσας τ. ὁδοὺς τῆς ἀληθείας) τὰς ὁδούς μου ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησου my Christian directives (i.e. instructions, teachings) 1 Cor 4:17.—OBecker, D. Bild des Weges u. verwandte Vorstellungen im frühgriech. Denken ’37; FNötscher, Gotteswege u. Menschenwege in d. Bibel u. in Qumran, ’58; ERepo, D. Weg als Selbstbezeichnung des Urchr., ’64 (but s. CBurchard, Der 13te Zeuge, ’70, 43, n. 10; JPathrapankal, Christianity as a ‘Way’ according to the Acts of the Apostles: Les Actes des Apôtres, Traditions, redaction, théologie, ed. JKremer ’79, 533–39 [reflects Is 40:3 and the emphasis on דרך in CD and 1QS: the ‘dynamism of Christianity’ is ‘Way of Life’]).—B. 717; 720. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὁδός

  • 16 πολύς

    πολύς, [dialect] Att. πολλή, πολύ; gen. πολλοῦ, ῆς, ou=; dat. πολλῷ, ῇ, ῷ; acc. πολύν, πολλήν, πολύ:—[dialect] Ion. [full] πολλός Anacr.43.3,
    A

    πολλή, πολλόν Xenoph.9

    , Democr.219, Hp.VM1, Herod.3.19; also in Trag., S.Ant.86, Tr. 1196; acc. πολλόν, πολλήν, πολλόν: Hdt. uses the [dialect] Ion. forms, but codd. have

    πολύν 2.121

    .δ, 3.57, v.l. in 6.125,

    πολύ 2.106

    ,3.38,6.72,7.46, 160 ( πολύ also in Heraclit.114, Democr. 244):—both sets of forms are found in [dialect] Ep., also gen. sg.

    πολέος Il.4.244

    , etc.: nom. pl.

    πολέες 2.417

    , al., once [var] contr.

    πολεῖς 11.708

    ; gen. πολέων (trisyll.) 5.691, (disyll.) 16.655; dat.

    πολέσι 10.262

    ,al.;

    πολέσσι 13.452

    , al.;

    πολέεσσι 9.73

    , Od.5.54, Hes.Op. 119, etc.; acc. πολέας (trisyll.) Il.3.126, etc., (disyll.) 1.559,2.4, Hes.Op. 580 (freq. with v.l. πολεῖς Il.15.66, etc.); in later [dialect] Ep. πολέες is used as fem., Call.Del.28, also

    πολέας Id.Dian.42

    , A.R.3.21; neut.

    πολέα Q.S.1.74

     (v. infr.):—[dialect] Ep. also have [full] πουλύς (once in Hes., Th. 190, also Thgn. 509, sts. fem. in Hom.,

    πουλὺν ἐφ' ὑγρήν Il.10.27

    ,

    ἠέρα πουλύν 5.776

    ), neut.

    πουλύ Od.19.387

    ; these forms are found in codd. of Hp. and Aret. (who uses πολύ, πουλύ and πολλόν in neut.), but not in Hdt.:— Lyr. and Trag. (lyr.) sts. use [dialect] Ep. forms, dat. sg.

    πολεῖ A.Supp. 745

    ; nom. pl.

    πολέες B.10.17

    ; neut.

    πολέα A.Ag. 723

    ;

    πολέων E.Hel. 1332

     (fem., B.5.100); dat. pl.

    πολέσι E.IT 1263

    . [ῠalways.]
    I of Number, many, Il.2.417, etc.; ἐκ πολλῶν, opp. ἐξὀλίγων, Hes.Th. 447; τριηκόντων ἐτέων πόλλ' ἀπολείπων wanting many of thirty years, Id.Op. 696;

    παρῆσάν τινες, καὶ πολλοί γε Pl.Phd. 58d

    ;

    οὐ πολλοί τινες A.Pers. 510

    : with Nouns of multitude,

    πουλὺς ὅμιλος Od.8.109

    ;

    πλῆθος πολλόν Hdt.1.141

    ;

    ἔθνος πολλόν Id.4.22

    ; later πουλὺ.. ἐπ' ἔτος many a year, AP6.235 (Thall.);

    π. ἦν ὁ καταπλέων Plb.15.26.10

    ; of anything often repeated,

    περὶ σέο λόγος ἀπῖκται π. Hdt.1.30

    ;

    πολλὸν ἦν τοῦτο τὸ ἔπος Id.2.2

    , cf. 3.137, etc.;

    πολὺ.. τὸ σὸν ὄνομα διήκει πάντας S.OC 305

    ;

    τούτῳ πολλῷ χρήσεται τῷ λόγῳ

     often,

    D.21.29

    ; τοῦτο ἐπιεικῶς πολὺ νῦν ἐστι is fairly frequent, Luc.Hist.Conscr.15.
    2 of Size, Degree, Intensity, much, mighty, ὄμβρος, νιφετός, Il.10.6;

    π. ὕπνος Od.15.394

    ;

    πῦρ.. π. 10.359

    ; π. ὑμέναιος a loud song, Il.18.493; π. ὀρυμαγδός, ῥοῖζος, etc., 2.810, Od.9.315, etc.; π. ἀνάγκη strong necessity, E.Ph. 1674; π. γέλως, βοή, much or great, S.Aj. 303, 1149; μωρία ib. 745; ὄλβος, αἰδώς, A.Pers. 251, Ag. 948;

    ἀσφάλεια Th.2.11

    ; ἀλογία, εὐήθεια, Pl.Phd. 67e, Phdr. 275c, etc.
    b rarely of a single person, great, mighty,

    μέγας καὶ πολλὸς ἐγένεο Hdt.7.14

    , cf. E.Hipp.1; ὁ π. σοφιστής, στρατηγός, Chor.p.23 B., Id.in Rev.Phil.1.68;

    ὁ πάντα π. Id.p.27

     B.; ὁ πολύς alone, of Hippocrates, Gal.19.530; of Trajan, Lyd.Mag.2.28;

    ῥώμην σώματος πολύς D.H.2.42

    .
    c joined with a Verb, Κύπρις γὰρ οὐ φορητός, ἢν πολλὴ ῥυῇ if she flow with full stream, metaph. from a river, E.Hipp. 443;

    θρασυνομένῳ καὶ πολλῷ ῥέοντι D. 18.136

    ; from the wind, ὡς π. ἔπνει καὶ λαμπρός was blowing strong and fresh, Id.25.57, cf. Ar.Eq. 760, AP11.49 (Even.): generally, with might or force,

    ὅταν ὁ θεὸς.. ἔλθῃ πολύς E.Ba. 300

    ;

    ἢν π. παρῇ Id.Or. 1200

    ;

    π. καὶ τολμηρὸς ἅνθρωπος D.40.53

    : with part. and εἰμί, πολλὸς ἦν λισσόμενος was all entreaties, Hdt.9.91;

    ἦν πολλὸς ὑπὸ παντὸς ἀνδρὸς αἰνεόμενος Id.1.98

    ;

    Ἐτεοκλέης ἂν εἷς π... ὑμνοῖθ' A.Th.6

    ;

    π. ἐνέκειτο λέγων Hdt.7.158

    ;

    π. τοῖς συμβεβηκόσιν ἔγκειται D.18.199

    ; also

    π. ἦν ἐν τοῖσι λόγοισι Hdt.8.59

    ;

    πρὸς ταῖς παρασκευαῖς Plb.5.49.7

    ;

    ἐπὶ τῇ τιμωρίᾳ D.S.14.107

    : without a Prep.,

    π. ἦν τοῖς ἐπαίνοις καὶ ἐπαχθής Aeschin.2.41

    ; π. μὲν γὰρ ὁ Φίλιππος ἔσται will be often mentioned, Id.1.166.
    3 of Value or Worth,

    πολέος δέ οἱ ἄξιος ἔσται Il.23.562

    , cf. Od.8.405;

    πολλοῦ ἄξιος X.An.4.1.28

    , etc.;

    πολλῶν ἄξιος Ar. Pax 918

    ; περὶ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσθαί τι, Lat. magni facere, cf.

    περί A.

     IV; ἐπὶ πολλῷ at a high price, D.8.53;

    ἐπὶ π. ἐρραθυμηκότες Id.1.15

    ; πολύ ἐστί τι it is worth much, of great conscquence, X.Oec.18.7.
    4 of Space, large, wide, π. χώρη, πεδίον, Il.23.520,4.244, etc.; πόντος, πέλαγος, Hes.Op. 635, S.Ph. 635;

    χῶρος πλατὺς καὶ π. Hdt.4.39

    ; λίμνη μεγάλη τε καὶ π. ib. 109;

    π. ἡ Σικελία Th. 7.13

    ;

    π. ἡ Ἑλλάς Pl.Phd. 78a

    , etc.; πολλὸς ἔκειτο he lay outstretched wide, Il.7.156, cf. 11.307; π. κέλευθος a far way, A.Pers. 748 (troch.): without

    ὁδός, πολλὴ μὲν εἰς Ἡράκλειαν.., πολλὴ δὲ εἰς Χρυσόπολιν.. X.An.6.3.16

    : διὰ πολλοῦ, ἐκ πολλοῦ, v. infr. IV.
    5 of Time, long,

    χρόνος S.Aj. 1402

     (anap.), etc.;

    πολὺν χρόνον Il.2.343

    , etc.;

    οὐ π. χρ. S.Ph. 348

    , etc.; so

    πολλοῦ χρόνου Ar.Pl.98

    ;

    χρόνῳ πολλῷ S.Tr. 228

    ; διὰ πολλοῦ (sc. χρόνου) Luc.Nec.15;

    ἐκ πολλοῦ Th.1.58

    , D. 21.41; πρὸ πολλοῦ long before, D.S.14.43;

    οὐ μετὰ πολύ Luc.Tox.54

    ; ἔτι πολλῆς νυκτός while still quite night, Th.8.101; πολλῆς ὥρας late in the day, Plb.5.8.3;

    ἤδη ὥρα πολλή Ev.Marc.6.35

    ;

    ἔτι ἔστιν ἡμέρα πολλή LXX Ge.29.7

    .
    II Special usages:
    1 c. partit.gen., e.g. πολλοὶ Τρώων, for πολλοὶ Τρῶες, Il.18.271, etc.; neut., πολλὸν σαρκός, for πολλὴ σάρξ, Od.19.450: in Prose, the Adj. generally takes the gender of the gen.,

    τὸν πολλὸν τοῦ χρόνου Hdt.1.24

    ; τῆς γῆς οὐ πολλήν Th.6.7;

    τῆς ἀθάρης πολλήν Ar.Pl. 694

    ;

    πολλὴν τῆς χώρας X.Cyr. 3.2.2

    ;

    ὁ π. τοῦ λόγου D.44.6

    ; v. infr. 3.
    2 joined with another Adj.,

    πολλὰ δυστερπῆ κακά A.Ch. 277

    , cf. 585 (lyr.), etc.: more freq. joined to another Adj. by καί, πολέες τε καὶ ἐσθλοί many men and good, Il.6.452, etc.;

    πολέες τε καὶ ἄλκιμοι 21.586

    ;

    πολλὰ καὶ ἐσθλά Od.2.312

    ; παλαιά τε πολλά τε ib. 188;

    ἄκοσμά τε π. τε Il.2.213

    ;

    πολλαί γε.. καὶ ἄλλαι Hes.Th. 363

    ;

    π. τε καὶ κακά Hdt.4.167

    , etc.;

    π. κἀγαθά Ar.Th. 351

     (but

    π. ἀγαθά IG12.76.45

    );

    π. καὶ ἀνόσια Pl.R. 416e

    ;

    π. καὶ μακάρια Id.Plt. 269d

    ;

    π. καὶ πονηρά X.Mem.2.9.6

    ;

    πολλά τε καὶ δεινά Id.An.5.5.8

    ;

    μεγάλα καὶ π. D.36.22

    ; π. καὶ καλοὺς (s.v.l.) κινδύνους, π. καὶ καλὰ παραδείγματα, Din.1.109.
    3 with the Art. (in Hom. without the Art., Il.2.483, 5.334, 22.28), of persons or things well known, Ἑλένα μία τὰς πολλάς, τὰς πάνυ π. ψυχὰς ὀλέσασ' those many lives, A.Ag. 1456 (lyr.), cf. S.OT 845, Th.3.87, Pl.Phd. 88a, Ti. 54a, Act.Ap.26.24: with abstract Nouns,

    τᾶς πολλᾶς ὑγιείας A. Ag. 1001

     (lyr., dub.);

    τὸ πολλόν

     numbers,

    Hdt.1.136

    .
    b οἱ π. the many, i.e. the greater number,

    Ἀθηναῖοι.. ἀπῆλθον οἱ πολλοί Th. 1.126

    , cf. 3.32, etc. (so in sg., ὁ πολλὸς λόγος the prevailing report, Hdt.1.75);

    τοῖς π. κριταῖς S.Aj. 1243

    : with gen., τοῖς π. βροτῶν ib. 682;

    οἱ π. τῶν ἀνθρώπων X.Cyr.8.2.24

    ;

    οἱ πολλοὶ ἅπαντες

     far the most,

    Hp.

    Aër.20 (v.l. μάλιστα for ἅπαντες); for τὰ πολλὰ πάντα, v. infr. 111.1a: hence οἱ πολλοί the people, the commonalty, opp. οἱ μείζω κεκτημένοι, Th.1.6; opp. οἱ κομψότεροι, Pl.R. 505b; οἱ π., = Lat. plebs, D.S.20.36; τῶν πολλῶν εἷς one of the multitude, D.21.96; also

    ὁ π. λεώς Luc.JTr.53

    , cf. Rh.Pr.17;

    ὁ π. ὅμιλος Id.Luct.2

    . Hdn.1.1.1, etc.;

    ὁ π. δῆμος Luc.Apol.15

    ;

    ὁ π. ὄχλος Ph. 2.4

    ; ὁ π. alone, = vulgus, v.l. in D.S.2.29; the ordinary man, Epicur.Fr. 478, Phld.Rh.2.154S.;

    νίμμα ὁ π. λέγει, ἡμεῖς ἀπόνιπτρον λέγομεν Phryn.170

    , cf.369; ὁ ἐμπαθὴς καὶ π. ἄνθρωπος 'l'homme moyen sensuel', Herm.in Phdr.p.146A.; ὁ π. ἄνθρωπος (with pl. Verb) the average man, opp. τὸ ἐξαίρετον, Eun.Hist.p.216 D.
    c τὸ πολύ, c. gen.,

    τῆς στρατιῆς τὸ πολλόν Hdt.8.100

    ;

    τὸ π. τοῦ χρόνου Hp.

    Aër. 20;

    τῶν λογάδων τὸ π. Th.5.73

    ;

    τῶν ὅπλων τὸ π. Pl.Plt. 288b

    ; also

    ὁ στρατὸς ὁ πολλός Hdt.1.102

    ;

    ἡ δύναμις ἡ π. Th.1.24

    ; ὁ π. βίοτος the best part of life, S.El. 185 (lyr.).
    d

    τὰ πολλά

     the most,

    Od.22.273

    , and perh. 2.58, 17.537 (elsewh. in Hom. πολλά, as Subst., means much riches, great possessions, Il.11.684, Od.19.195);

    τὰ π. τοῦ πολέμου Th.2.13

    ; πρὸς τὸ τῶν π. μέγεθος in regard to the size of the average, Arist.Rh. 1363b11.
    4 pl. πολλά very much, too much, πολλὰ πράσσειν, = πολυπραγμονεῖν, E.Supp. 576, Ar.Ra. 228;

    π. ἔπαθεν Pi.O.13.63

    , etc.; π. ἔρξαι τινά to do one much harm, A. Th. 923 (lyr.).
    6 πολύς repeated,

    ἦ πολλὰ πολλοῖς εἰμι διάφορος βροτῶν E.Med. 579

    , cf. A.Supp. 451;

    τὰ μὲν οὖν πολλὰ πολλοῦ χρόνου διηγήσασθαι Pl.R. 615a

    , etc.; πολλοῦ πολύς, v. infr. 111.1b: with Advbs. πολλάκις, πολλαχῇ, etc. (qq. v., cf. 111.1 e).
    III Adverbial usages:
    a neut. πολύ ([dialect] Ion. πολλόν) , πολλά, much,

    πόλλ' ἀεκαζομένη Il.6.458

    , etc.; strengthd.,

    μάλα πολλά 8.22

    , al.;

    πάνυ πολύ Pl.Alc.1.119c

    ;

    πολύ τι Id.R. 484d

    ; esp. of repetition, often, Il.2.798, Od.13.29, Hes.Op. 322; so of earnest commands and entreaties, πολλὰ κελεύων, πόλλ' ἐπέτελλον, πολλὰ λισσομένη, πολλὰ μάλ' εὐχομένω, Il.5.528, 11.782, 5.358, 9.183: with the Art.,

    τὸ πολύ

     for the most part,

    Pl.Prt. 315a

    , etc. (but with numerals, at most, Vett. Val.9.5);

    ὡς τὸ π. X.Mem.1.1.10

    , etc.;

    τὰ πολλά Th.1.13

    , 2.11,87, etc.;

    ὡς τὰ π. Id.5.65

    , etc.;

    τὰ π. πάντα Hdt.1.203

    , 2.35, 5.67.
    b of Degree, far, very much,

    ἀπέφυγε πολλὸν τοὺς διώκοντας Id.6.82

    : also abs. gen. πολλοῦ very,

    θρασὺς εἶ πολλοῦ Ar.Nu. 915

    , cf. Eup.74;

    πολλοῦ δύνασθαι Alciphr.1.9

     (s.v.l.); πολλοῦ πολύς, πολλὴ πολλοῦ, much too much, Ar.Eq. 822,Ra. 1046.
    c of Space, a great way, far,

    οὐ πολλόν Hdt.1.104

    ;

    πολὺ οὐκ ἐξῄεσαν Th.1.15

    , etc.
    d of Time, long,

    ὡς πολλὸν τοῦτο ἐγίνετο Hdt.4.126

    , cf. 6.129.
    e of Probability, ἐὰν πολλὰ πολλῶν τέκῃς, perh. = ἐὰν πολλάκις τέκῃς,POxy. 744.9 (i B.C./i A.D.);

    ἐάν τι πολλὰ πολλάκις πάθω Ar.Ec. 1105

    .
    2 πολύ is freq. joined with Adjs. and Advbs.,
    a with a [comp] Comp. to increase its comp. force, πολὺ μεῖζον, πολλὸν παυρότεροι, Il.1.167, Od.14.17; πολὺ μᾶλλον much more, Il.9.700; πολύ τι μᾶλλον f.l. in D.H. Comp.4 (p.22 U.-R.): with words, esp. Preps., between πολύ and its Adj., π. ἐν πλέονι, π. ἐπὶ δεινοτέρῳ, Th.1.35, Pl.R. 589e;

    πολὺ ἔτι ἐκ λαμπροτέρων Id.Phd. 110c

    ;

    π. σὺν φρονήματι μείζονι X.An.3.1.22

    , cf.3.2.30, Smp.1.4 (but the Prep. freq. comes first,

    ἐκ π. ἐλάττονος And.1.109

    , etc.); so πολλῷ is freq. used with the [comp] Comp., by far, A.Pr. 337, Hdt. 1.134, etc.;

    π. μᾶλλον S.OT 1159

    , Pl.Phd. 80e; οὐ πολλῷ τεῳ ἀσθενέστερον not a great deal weaker, Hdt.1.181, cf. 2.48,67, etc.: πολύ with all words implying comparison, πολὺ πρίν much sooner, Il.9.250;

    π. πρό 4.373

    : with the comp. Verb

    φθάνω, ἦ κε πολὺ φθαίη 13.815

    ; so πολὺ προβέβηκας ἁπάντων, πολὺ προμάχεσθαι ἁπάντων, 6.125, 11.217;

    προὔλαβε πολλῷ Th.7.80

    : with βούλομαι, = prefer,

    ἡμῖν πολὺ βούλεται ἢ Δαναοῖσι νίκην Il.17.331

    , cf. Od.17.404; πολύ γε in answers, after a [comp] Comp. or [comp] Sup., ἀργὸς.. γενήσεται μᾶλλον; Answ.

    πολύ γε Pl.R. 421d

    , cf. 387e, etc.
    b with a [comp] Sup., πολὺ πρώτιστος, πολλὸν ἄριστος, far the first, etc., Il.2.702, 1.91, etc.;

    προθυμία π. τολμηροτάτη Th.1.74

    , etc.;

    πολλόν τι μάλιστα Hdt.1.56

    ;

    π. δή, π. δὴ γυναῖκ' ἀρίσταν E.Alc. 442

     (lyr.), cf. Ar.Av. 539, Archestr.Fr.34.9; also

    πολλῷ πλεῖστοι Hdt.5.92

    .έ, 8.42;

    π. μεγίστους Id.4.82

    .
    c with a Positive, to add force to the Adj.,

    ὦ πολλὰ μὲν τάλαινα, πολλὰ δ' αὖ σοφή A.Ag. 1295

    ; also

    ἐς πόλλ' ἀθλία πέφυκ' ἐγώ E.Ph. 619

     (troch.);

    πολὺ ἀφόρητος Luc.DMeretr. 9.3

    ; cf. πλεῖστος.
    IV with Preps.,
    1 διὰ πολλοῦ at a great interval of Space or Time, v. διά A.1.5, 11.2.
    2 εἰς πολύ for a long time, Plot.2.1.3.
    3 ἐκ πολλοῦ from a great distance, Th.4.32, etc.; for a long time, v. ἐκ 11.1.
    4 ἐπὶ πολύ,
    a over a great space, far,

    οὐκ ἐπὶ πολλόν Hdt.2.32

    ; ἐπὶ π. τῆς θαλάσσης, τῆς χώρας, Th.1.50,4.3, etc.; to a great extent, Id.1.6,18,3.83; cf.

    ποιέω B.11.2

    .
    b for a long time, long, Id.5.16;

    τῆς ἡμέρας ἐπὶ π. Id.7.38

    , cf. 39.
    c

    ὡς ἐπὶ π.

     very generally,

    Id.1.12

     (v.l.), Archyt. ap. Stob.3.1.195;

    ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ π.

     for the most part,

    Th.2.13

    , Pl.Plt. 294e, etc.;

    μὴ καθ' ἓν ἕκαστον, ἀλλ' ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ π. Isoc.4.154

    ;

    τό γ' ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ π. Id.8.35

    .
    5 παρὰ πολύ by far, v. παρά C.111.5.
    6 περὶ πολλοῦ, v. supr. 1.3.
    7 πρὸ πολλοῦ far before,

    τῆς πόλεως D.H.9.35

    ; also of Time, οὐ πρὸ π. not long before, Id.5.62.
    8 σὺν πολλῷ in no small degree, only too much or too well, Hld.2.8,9.20, 10.9 (cf. CR41.53).
    V for [comp] Comp. πλείων, πλέων, [comp] Sup. πλεῖστος, v. sub vocc. (Cf. Skt. purú-, Goth. filu 'much'.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > πολύς

  • 17 ἀμφί

    ἀμφί, Prep. with gen., dat., acc.: (cf. Skt.
    A abhitas 'on both sides', Lat. ambi-):—radic. sense, on both sides; chiefly Poet. and [dialect] Ion. Prose, replaced by περί in later Gk.
    A C. GEN. (Poet., Hdt., X.):
    I causal, about, for the sake of, ἀ. πίδακος μάχεσθαι fight for the possession of a spring, Il.16.285;

    ἀ. γυναικός Pi.P.9.105

    , A.Ag.62;

    ἀ. λέκτρων E.Andr. 123

    : like πρός, in entreaties, πρὸς Ζηνός.. Φοίβου τ' ἀ. for Phoebus' sake, A.R.2.216.
    2 about, concerning, once in Hom., ἀμφ' Ἄρεος φιλότητος ἀείδειν sing of love, Od.8.267;

    ἀμφὶ τιμῆς h.Merc. 172

     (cf. c. 4); once in Hdt., ἀμφὶ κρίσιος (as v.l. for κρίσι)

    μνηστήρων τοσαῦτα ἐγένετο 6.131

    ; more freq. in poets,

    ἀ. δαιμόνων Pi.O.1.35

    , cf. A.Th. 1017, E.Supp. 642, etc.; prob. l. in S.Ph. 554.
    II of Place, about, around, post-Hom.,

    ἀ. ταύτης τῆς πόλιος Hdt.8.104

    ;

    τὸν ἀ. Λίμνας τρόχον E.Hipp. 1133

    .
    B C. DAT. (Poet., [dialect] Ion. and later Prose):
    I of Place, on both sides of,

    ἀμφ' ὀχέεσσι Il.5.723

    ; ἀ. κεφαλῇ, ὤμοισιν, στήθεσσι, ποσσί, about the head, etc., ib.24.163, 3.328, Od.16.174, Il.13.36;

    ἄ. δέρᾳ Sapph.Supp.23.16

    ; ἀμφί οἱ around him, Il.12.396; μοι ἀμφ' αὐτῷ around me, 9.470; like wise

    ἀμφὶ περὶ στήθεσσι Od.11.609

    :—all round, κρέα ἀμφ' ὀβελοῖσι μεμύκει round, i.e. upon, spits, ib.12.395;

    πεπαρμένη ἀμφ' ὀνύχεσσι Hes.Op. 250

    .
    2 more generally, at, by, ἀ. πύλῃσι μάχεσθαι at the gates, Il.12.175; ἀμφὶ [κόρυθι] διατρυφέν smashed on the helmet, 3.362; ἀ. πυρί on the fire, 18.344; ἀμφ' ἐμοί clinging to me, Od.11.423; esp. of falling over one, Il.4.493; of a guardian, over,

    φύλακα ἀ. σοι λείψω S.Aj. 562

    ;

    ἀ. γούνασι πίπτειν E.Alc. 947

    .
    II of Time, ἁλίῳ ἀ. ἑνί in compass of one day, Pi. O.13.37.
    III generally, of connexion or association, without distinct notion of place, ἀ. νεκροῖσιν as concerning the dead, Il.7.408; freq. in Pi., ὅσσα δ' ἀμφ' ἀέθλοις as far as concerns games, N.2.17; ἐπ' ἔργοισιν ἀ. τε βουλαῖς in deeds and counsels, Id.P.5.119; in virtue of,

    ἀμφὶ σοφίᾳ 1.12

    ;

    ἐμᾷ ἀ. μαχανᾷ 8.34

    ;

    ἀμφ' ἀρετᾷ 1.80

    , cf. O.8.42;

    σέο ἀμφὶ τρόπῳ N.1.29

    ; ἀ. ἰατορίᾳ in respect of healing, B.1.39.
    IV causal, about, for the sake of,

    ἀμφ' Ἑλένῃ μάχεσθαι Il.3.70

    ; ἀ. γυναικὶ ἄλγεα πάσχειν ib. 157, cf. Luc.D Deor.20.14;

    ἀ. τοῖσδε καλχαίνων τέκνοις E.Heracl.40

    , cf. Rh. 457 (lyr.);

    ἀ. δώλῳ μωλίειν Leg.Gort.1.17

    ; concerning, Od.1.48;

    εἰπὼν ἀμφ' Ὀδυσῆϊ 14.364

    ;

    ἀρνεύμενον ἀ. βόεσσι h.Merc. 390

    ;

    ἀ. Τειρεσίαο βουλαῖς Pi.I.7(6).8

    ;

    ἕξετ' ἀμφ' ἐμοὶ τροφήν S.OC 1614

    , cf. El. 1144;

    ἔρις ἀ. μουσικῇ Hdt. 6.129

    ;

    ἀ. σοι A.Ag. 890

    ; ἀ. τῷ θανάτῳ αὐτῆς λόγος λέγεται about her death it is reported, Hdt.3.32, cf. S.Aj. 303;

    ἀ. βοῶν ἀγέλαις δόμον αὔξειν B.9.44

    .
    2 of impulses, ἀ. τάρβει, ἀ. φόβῳ for very fear, A.Ch. 547, E.Or. 825;

    ἀ. θυμῷ S.Fr. 565

    ;

    ἀμφ' ὀδύνῃ A.R.2.96

    .
    V like ἐπί, added to,

    πόνος ἀ. πόνῳ Simon.39

    .
    C C. ACC., most freq. in Prose (twice only in Th.):
    I of Place, about, around, mostly with a sense of motion,

    ἀ. μιν φᾶρος βάλον Il.24.588

    , cf. Od.10.365;

    ἀ. βωμίαν ἔπτηξε παστάδα E.HF 984

    .
    2 generally, by, on, ἀμφ' ἅλα by the sea, Il.1.409; ἀ. ῥέεθρα somewhere by the banks, 2.461; ἀ. περὶ κρήνην somewhere about the fountain, 2.305; ἀ. ἄστυ all about in the city, 11.706; Τάρταρον ἀ. μέγαν somewhere in Tartarus, h.Ap. 336, cf. A.Pr. 1029;

    ἀ. Εὔβοιαν B.9.34

    ;

    ἀ. Θρῄκην E.Andr. 215

    ; ἀ. ψάμαθον somewhere on the sand, S.Aj. 1064; ἀ. βωμόν at the altar, E.IT 705;

    περὶ πίδακας ἀ. Theoc. 7.142

    ; of motion, to the neighbourhood of,

    ἦλθες ἀ. Δωδώνην A.Pr. 830

    .
    3 of persons grouped about one, οἱ ἀ. Πρίαμον Priam and his train, Il.3.146, cf. 2.417, 445; οἱ ἀ. Ξέρξεα his army, Hdt.8.25; but οἱ ἀ. Κορινθίους, οἱ ἀ. Μεγαρέας καὶ Φλειασίους the Corinthians, Megarians, etc., and those next them, Id.9.69: hence [dialect] Att., οἱ ἀ. Πρωταγόραν the school of Protagoras or even Protagoras himself, Pl. Tht. 170c; οἱ ἀ. Εὐθύφρονα Euthyphro's friends, Cra. 399e, cf. Th.8.65; of a single person, perh. Pl.Hp.Ma. 281c; so in later Prose, as Luc.VH2.18.
    4 τὰ ἀ. τι that which concerns a thing,

    τὰ ἀ. τὸ ἄριστον Th.7.40

    ; τὰ ἀ. τὴν δίαιταν domestic arrangements, X.Cyr.8.2.6.
    5 causal, about, for the sake of, κλαίειν ἀ. τινα weep about or for one, Il.18.339; μνήσασθαι ἀ. τινα make mention of one, h.Hom. 7.1, cf. Terp.2, Ar.Nu. 595;

    κελαδέοντι φᾶμαι ἀ. Κινύραν Pi.P.2.15

    , cf. I.7(6).9, A.Th. 843;

    ἀ. νιν γοώμενος S.Tr. 937

    .
    6 ἀ. τι ἔχειν to be occupied about a thing,

    ἀ. λιτάν' ἕξομεν A.Th. 101

    ;

    ἀ. δεῖπνον εἶχεν X.Cyr.5.5.44

    , cf. 5.2.26;

    εἶναι ἀμφί τι 7.1.1

    ;

    ἀ. τὰν δαῖσιν Leg.Gort.5.46

    .
    II of Time, throughout, for, τὸν λοιπὸν ἀ. βίοτον, τὸν ὅλον ἀ. χρόνον, Pi.O.1.97, 2.30; about, at the time of, during,

    ἀ. Πλειάδων δύσιν A.Ag. 826

    ;

    ἀ. τὸν χειμῶνα X.Cyr.8.6.22

    , etc.
    2 of Number,

    ἀ. τὰς δώδεκα μυριάδας

     about

    120

    , 000, ib.1.2.15.
    D POSITION. In poets ἀμφί sts. follows its case,

    οἱ δέ μιν ἀμφί Od.23.46

    , cf. 10.218, B.17.53;

    φρένας ἀ. Hes.Th. 554

    , Mimn.1.7; but never suffers anastrophe, Hdn.Gr.1.480.
    E WITHOUT CASE, as Adv., about, around, on both or all sides, freq. in [dialect] Ep.,

    ῥῆξεν δέ οἱ ἀ. χιτῶνα Il.13.439

    ; ἀ. δὲ λειμών around is meadow, Od.6.292; so

    ἀ. περί Il.21.10

    , etc.
    I on both sides, ἀμφίστομος, ἀμφίαλος.
    2 on all sides,

    ἀμφιβάλλω 1.3

    , ἀμφιλαμβάνω, ἀμφιλαφής.
    II causal, for the sake of, ἀμφιμάχομαι, ἀμφιτρομέω.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἀμφί

  • 18 πρῶτος

    πρῶτος, η, ον (Hom.+; loanw. in rabb.).
    ① pert. to being first in a sequence, inclusive of time, set (number), or space, first of several, but also when only two persons or things are involved (=πρότερος; exx. in Hdb. on J 1:15; Rdm.2 71f; Thackeray 183; s. also Mlt. 79; 245; B-D-F §62; Rob. 516; 662; and s. Mt 21:31 v.l.).
    ⓐ of time first, earliest, earlier
    α. as adj. ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν Phil 1:5; cp. Ac 20:18 (on the absence of the art. [also Phil 1:5 v.l.] s. B-D-F §256; Rob. 793). ἡ πρώτη ἀπολογία 2 Ti 4:16 (MMeinertz, Worauf bezieht sich die πρώτη ἀπολογία 2 Ti 4:16?: Biblica 4, 1923, 390–94). ἡ πρ. διαθήκη Hb 9:15. τὰ πρῶτα ἔργα Rv 2:5. ἡ ἀνάστασις ἡ πρώτη 20:5f. ἡ πρώτη ὅρασις Hv 3, 10, 3; 3, 11, 2; 4. ἡ ἐκκλησία ἡ πρ. 2 Cl 14:1.—Subst. τὰ πρ. … τὰ ἔσχατα (Job 8:7): γίνεται τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων Mt 12:45; cp. Lk 11:26; 2 Pt 2:20; Hv 1, 4, 2. οἱ πρῶτοι (those who came earlier, as Artem. 2, 9 p. 93, 19 those who appeared earlier) Mt 20:10; cp. vs. 8. ἀπέστειλεν ἄλλους δούλους πλείονας τῶν πρώτων 21:36. Cp. 27:64. πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν the first to rise from the dead Ac 26:23. ὁ πρῶτος the first one J 5:4; 1 Cor 14:30. On the self-designation of the Risen Lord ὁ πρ. καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος Rv 1:17; 2:8; 22:13; s. ἔσχατος 2b (πρ. of God: Is 44:6; 48:12).—As a predicate adj., where an adv. can be used in English (ParJer 1:8 εἰ μὴ ἐγὼ πρῶτος ἀνοίξω τὰς πύλας; B-D-F §243; Rob. 657), as the first one = first ἦλθεν πρῶτος he was the first one to come = he came first J 20:4; cp. vs. 8. πρῶτος Μωϋσῆς λέγει Ro 10:19. Ἀβραὰμ πρῶτος περιτομὴν δούς Abraham was the first to practice circumcision B 9:7. οἱ ἄγγελοι οἱ πρῶτοι κτισθέντες the angels who were created first Hv 3, 4, 1; Hs 5, 5, 3.—1 Ti 2:13; 1J 4:19; AcPlCor 2:9.—ἐν ἐμοὶ πρώτῳ in me as the first 1 Ti 1:16.—Used w. a gen. of comparison (Ocelus Luc. 3 ἐκεῖνο πρῶτον τοῦ παντός ἐστιν=prior to the All; Manetho 1, 329; Athen. 14, 28 p. 630c codd.) πρῶτός μου ἦν he was earlier than I = before me J 1:15, 30 (PGM 13, 543 σοῦ πρῶτός εἰμι.—Also Ep. 12 of Apollonius of Tyana: Philostrat. I p. 348, 30 τὸ τῇ τάξει δεύτερον οὐδέποτε τῇ φύσει πρῶτον). So perh. also ἐμὲ πρῶτον ὑμῶν μεμίσηκεν 15:18 (s. β below) and πάντων πρώτη ἐκτίσθη Hv 2, 4, 1.—As a rule the later element is of the same general nature as the one that precedes it. But it can also be someth. quite different, even its exact opposite: τὴν πρώτην πίστιν ἠθέτησαν 1 Ti 5:12. τὴν ἀγάπην σου τὴν πρώτην ἀφῆκες Rv 2:4.—Used elliptically ἡ πρώτη (i.e. ἡμέρα sim. Polyb. 5, 19, 1; 18, 27, 2 τῇ πρώτῃ) τῶν ἀζύμων Mt 26:17. πρώτῃ σαββάτου on the first day of the week Mk 16:9. In some of the passages mentioned above the idea of sequence could be predom.
    β. the neuter πρῶτον as adv., of time first, in the first place, before, earlier, to begin with (Peripl. Eryth. 4; Chariton 8, 2, 4; ApcEsdr 3:11; Just., D. 2, 4) πρῶτον πάντων first of all Hv 5:5a. ἐπίτρεψόν μοι πρῶτον ἀπελθεῖν καὶ θάψαι let me first go and bury Mt 8:21. συλλέξατε πρῶτον τὰ ζιζάνια gather the weeds first 13:30. Cp. 17:10, 11 v.l.; Mk 7:27; 9:11f; 13:10; Lk 9:59, 61; 12:1 ( first Jesus speaks to his disciples, and only then [vs. 15] to the people. If one prefers to take πρ. w. what follows, as is poss., it has mng. 2a); 14:28, 31; J 7:51; 18:13; Ac 26:20; Ro 15:24 al. in NT; B 15:7; Hv 3, 1, 8; 3, 6, 7; 3, 8, 11; 5:5b. τότε πρῶτον then for the first time Ac 11:26 D. πρῶτον … καὶ τότε first … and then (Sir 11:7; Jos., Ant. 13, 187) Mt 5:24; 7:5; 12:29; Mk 3:27; Lk 6:42; IEph 7:2. τότε is correlative w. πρῶτον without καί J 2:10 v.l. Likew. πρῶτον … εἶτα (εἶτεν) first … then (Just., D. 33, 2 al.; s. εἶτα 1) Mk 4:28; 1 Ti 3:10; B 6:17. πρῶτον … ἔπειτα (ἔπειτα 2) 1 Cor 15:46; 1 Th 4:16. πρῶτον … μετὰ ταῦτα Mk 16:9, s. vs. 12. πρῶτον … εἶτα … μετὰ ταῦτα 1 Cl 23:4; 2 Cl 11:3 (in both cases the same prophetic saying of unknown origin). πρῶτον … ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ Ac 7:12.—Pleonastically πρῶτον πρὸ τοῦ ἀρίστου Lk 11:38.—W. gen. (Chariton 5, 4, 9 cod. πρῶτον τ. λόγων=before it comes to words) ἐμὲ πρῶτον ὑμῶν μεμίσηκεν it hated me before ( it hated) you J 15:18 (but s. 1aα).—W. the art. τὸ πρῶτον (Hom. et al.; Jos., Ant. 8, 402; 14, 205) the first time J 10:40; 19:39; at first (Diod S 1, 85, 2; Jos., Ant. 2, 340) 12:16; 2 Cl 9:5. τὰ πρῶτα (Hom. et al.; Appian, Syr. 15 §64; Ps.-Phoc. 8) the first time, at first MPol 8:2.
    ⓑ of number or sequence (the area within which this sense is valid cannot be marked off w. certainty from the area 1aα)
    α. as adj. Mt 21:28; 22:25; Mk 12:20; Lk 14:18; 16:5; 19:16; 20:29; J 19:32; Ac 12:10; 13:33 v.l.; Rv 4:7; 8:7; 21:19; Hs 9, 1, 5. τὸ πρῶτον … τὸ δεύτερον (Alex. Aphr., An. p. 28, 9 Br.) Hb 10:9. On πρώτης τῆς μερίδος Μακεδονίας πόλις Ac 16:12 s. μερίς 1 and RAscough, NTS 44, ’98, 93–103.—Since πρῶτος can stand for πρότερος (s. 1 at beg.; also Mlt-Turner 32), it by no means follows from τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον Ac 1:1 that the writer of Luke and of Ac must have planned to write a third book (Zahn, NKZ 28, 1917, 373ff, Comm. 1919, 16ff holds that he planned to write a third volume; against this view s. EGoodspeed, Introd. to the NT ’37, 189; Haenchen, et al.—Athenaeus 15, 701c mentions the first of Clearchus’ two books on proverbs with the words ἐν τῷ προτέρῳ περὶ παροιμιῶν, but 10, 457c with ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ περὶ παροιμιῶν. Diod S 1, 42, 1 the first half of a two-part work is called ἡ πρώτη βίβλος and 3, 1, 1 mentions a division into πρώτη and δευτέρα βίβ. In 13, 103, 3 the designation for the first of two works varies between ἡ πρώτη σύνταξις and ἡ προτέρα ς. See Haenchen on Ac 1:1).—πρῶτος is also used without any thought that the series must continue: τὸν πρῶτον ἰχθύν the very first fish Mt 17:27. αὕτη ἀπογραφὴ πρώτη ἐγένετο Lk 2:2, likewise, does not look forward in the direction of additional censuses, but back to a time when there were none at all (Ael. Aristid. 13 p. 227 D. παράκλησις αὕτη [=challenge to a sea-fight] πρώτη ἐγένετο; for interpolation theory s. JWinandy, RB 104, ’97, 372–77; cp. BPearson, CBQ, ’99, 262--82).—τὰ τείχη τὰ πρῶτα Hs 8, 6, 6 does not contrast the ‘first walls’ w. other walls; rather it distinguishes the only walls in the picture (Hs 8, 7, 3; 8, 8, 3) as one edifice, from the tower as the other edifice.
    β. adv., the neuter πρῶτον of sequence in enumerations (not always clearly distinguished fr. sense 1aβ) first πρῶτον ἀποστόλους, δεύτερον προφήτας, τρίτον … 1 Cor 12:28 (Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 20 II, 10ff [II A.D.] τὸ πρ. … τὸ δεύτερον … τὸ τρίτον. Without the art. 480, 12ff [II A.D.]; Diod S 36, 7, 3; Tat. 40, 1). See Hb 7:2; Js 3:17.—Not infrequently Paul begins w. πρῶτον μέν without continuing the series, at least in form (B-D-F §447, 4; Rob. 1152. For πρ. without continuation s. Plat., Ep. 7, 337b, Plut., Mor. 87b; Jos., Ant. 1, 182; Ath. 27, 1 πρῶτα μέν) Ro 1:8; 3:2; 1 Cor 11:18. S. also 2 Cl 3:1.
    ⓒ of space outer, anterior σκηνὴ ἡ πρώτη the outer tent, i.e. the holy place Hb 9:2; cp. vss. 6, 8.
    ② pert. to prominence, first, foremost, most important, most prominent
    ⓐ adj.
    α. of things (Ocellus [II B.C.] 56 Harder [1926] πρώτη κ. μεγίστη φυλακή; Ael. Aristid. 23, 43 K.=42 p. 783 D.: πόλεις; Ezk 27:22; PsSol 17:43; χρυσίον τὸ πρῶτον τίμιον; JosAs 15:10) ἡ μεγάλη καὶ πρώτη ἐντολή Mt 22:38; cp. Mk 12:29. ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων vs. 28 (OLehmann, TU 73, ’59, 557–61 [rabb.]; CBurchard, ZNW 61, ’70, cites JosAs 15:10; 18:5). Without superl. force ἐντολὴ πρώτη ἐν ἐπαγγελίᾳ a commandment of great importance, with a promise attached Eph 6:2 (the usual transl. ‘first commandment w. a promise’ [NRSV, REB et al.] loses sight of the fact that Ex 20:4–6=Dt 5:8–10 has an implied promise of the same kind as the one in Ex 20:12=Dt 5:16. πρ. here is best taken in the same sense as in Mk 12:29 above). στολὴν τὴν πρώτην the special robe Lk 15:22 (JosAs 15:10).—ἐν πρώτοις among the first = most important things, i.e. as of first importance 1 Cor 15:3 (Pla., Pol. 522c ὸ̔ καὶ παντὶ ἐν πρώτοις ἀνάγκη μανθάνειν; Epict., Ench. 20; Mitt-Wilck I/2, 14 II, 9 ἐν πρώτοις ἐρωτῶ σε; Josh 9:2d).
    β. of persons (Dio Chrys. 19 [36], 35 πρ. καὶ μέγιστος θεός; TestAbr B 4 p. 108, 18 [Stone p. 64]; ApcSed 5:2; Jos., Ant. 15, 398; Just., A I, 60, 5 al. τὸν πρῶτον θεόν) ὸ̔ς ἂν θέλῃ ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι πρῶτος whoever wishes to be the first among you Mt 20:27; Mk 10:44; cp. 9:35. πρῶτος Σίμων Mt 10:2 is not meant to indicate the position of Simon in the list, since no other numbers follow, but to single him out as the most prominent of the twelve. W. gen. ὧν (=τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν) πρῶτός εἰμι 1 Ti 1:15. Pl. (οἱ) πρῶτοι in contrast to (οἱ) ἔσχατοι Mt 19:30; 20:16; Mk 9:35; 10:31; Lk 13:30; Ox 654, 25f (cp. GTh 4; sim. Sallust. 9 p. 16, 21f τοῖς ἐσχάτοις … τοῖς πρώτοις; s. ἔσχατος 2).—αἱ πρώται prominent women (in the phrase γυναικῶν τε τῶν πρώτων οὐκ ὀλίγαι) Ac 17:4 (s. New Docs 1, 72). οἱ πρῶτοι the most prominent men, the leading men w. gen. of place (Jos., Ant. 7, 230 τῆς χώρας) οἱ πρ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας Mk 6:21; cp. Ac 13:50 (in phrasing sim. to πολλὰς μὲν γυναῖκας εὐγενεῖς καὶ τῶν πρώτων ἀνδρῶν ἤισχυναν=‘they dishonored many well-born women as well as men of high station’ Theopomp.: 115 Fgm. 121 Jac. p. 563, 33f), or of a group (Strabo 13, 2, 3 οἱ πρ. τῶν φίλων; Jos., Ant. 20, 180) οἱ πρ. τοῦ λαοῦ (Jos., Ant. 11, 141) Lk 19:47; cp. Ac 25:2; 28:17. On ὁ πρῶτος τῆς νήσου vs. 7 (πρῶτος Μελιταίων IGR I, 512=IG XIV, 601; cp. CB I/2, 642 no. 535 ὁ πρῶτος ἐν τῇ πόλει; p. 660 no. 616; SEG XLI, 1345, 14f; cp. CIL X, 7495, 1; s. Hemer, Acts 153, n. 152; Warnecke, Romfahrt 119ff) s. Πόπλιος.
    ⓑ adv. πρῶτον of degree in the first place, above all, especially (Jos., Ant. 10, 213) ζητεῖτε πρῶτον τὴν βασιλείαν Mt 6:33. Ἰουδαίῳ τε πρῶτον καὶ Ἕλληνι Ro 1:16; cp. 2:9f.—Ac 3:26; 2 Pt 1:20; 3:3. Of the Macedonian Christians ἑαυτοὺς ἔδωκαν πρῶτον τῷ κυρίῳ καὶ ἡμῖν they gave themselves first of all to the Lord, and (then) to us 2 Cor 8:5. παρακαλῶ πρῶτον πάντων first of all I urge 1 Ti 2:1.—B. 939. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πρῶτος

  • 19 ἕως

    ἕως (Hom.+)
    ① to denote the end of a period of time, till, until.
    ⓐ as conjunction
    α. w. the aor. ind. (Lysias 25, 26; Ps.-Demosth. 47, 58; Wsd 10:14; 1 Macc 10:50; Jdth 10:18; En 13:7; 102:10; PsSol 2:26; 4:10; SibOr 5, 528; Ar. 12, 2) ἕως ἐστάθη until it stood still Mt 2:9. ἕως ἦλθεν ὁ κατακλυσμός until the flood came 24:39.—Ac 19:10 D.
    β. w. the aor. subj. and, as the rule requires (s. AFuchs, D. Temporalsätze mit d. Konj. ‘bis’ u. ‘so lange als.’ 1902), ἄν (X., An. 5, 1, 11; SIG 966, 11; 1207, 10; PPetr II, 40a, 28; POxy 1124, 7; Gen 24:14; 49:10; Ex 33:22; Lev 22:4 and oft. LXX; TestAbr B 7 p. 112, 2 [Stone p. 72]; TestJob 21:2; ParJer 2:3; ApcMos 26 p. 14, 7 Tdf.; Jos., Ant. 13, 400; Just., A I, 45, 1), to denote that the commencement of an event is dependent on circumstances: ἕως ἂν εἴπω σοι until I tell you Mt 2:13.—5:18 (AHoneyman, NTS 1, ’54/55, 141f), 26 (cp. SIG 731, 16ff ἕως ἂν ἀποδῷ); 10:23; 22:44 (Ps 109:1); Mk 6:10; 9:1; 12:36 (Ps 109:1); Lk 20:43 (Ps 109:1); 21:32; Ac 2:35 (Ps 109:1); 1 Cor 4:5; Hb 1:13; B 12:10 (the two last Ps 109:1).—Without ἄν (Soph., Aj. 555, Phil. 764; Polyb. 35, 2, 4; SIG 976, 79; UPZ 18, 10 [II B.C.]; PGrenf II, 38, 16 [I B.C.]; POxy 531, 6; 1125, 15; 1159, 21; Sir 35:17; Tob 14:5 BA; En 10:12, 17; TestSol 15:10; ParJer 5:14; GrBar 11:2; SibOr 5, 217; Just. D. 39, 6): Mt 10:23 v.l.; 18:30; Mk 14:32; Lk 15:4 and 22:34 (both v.l. ἕως οὗ); 2 Th 2:7; Js 5:7; Hb 10:13; Rv 6:11.
    γ. w. the pres. ind. (cp. Plut., Lycurg. 29, 3) ἕως ἔρχομαι until I come J 21:22f; 1 Ti 4:13; Hs 5, 2, 2; 9, 10, 5f; cp. 9, 11, 1.
    δ. w. the fut. ind. (cp. PHolm 26, 7; Jdth 10:15) in a text-critically doubtful pass. (B-D-F §382, 2; Rob. 971f; 976) ἕως ἥξει ὅτε εἴπητε (ἥξει ὅτε is lacking as v.l.) until (the time) comes when you say Lk 13:35.
    ⓑ used as prep. (appears first at the end of the IV cent. B.C. [Schwyzer II 550]) until, up to (Aristot. et al.; ins, pap, LXX; pseudepigr., also SibOr 5, 57; 118)
    α. w. gen. of a noun or an equivalent expr. (SIG 588, 64 [196 B.C.] ἕ. τοῦ τ. συνθήκης χρόνου; OGI 90, 16 ἕ. τοῦ πρώτου ἔτους; BGU 1128, 8 [14 B.C.]; oft. LXX; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 23 [Stone p. 54]) ἕ. τῆς ἡμέρας (Jdth 12:14; 1 Esdr 4:55; 1 Macc 13:39) Mt 27:64; Lk 1:80. ἕ. τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης (Jdth 1:15) Mt 26:29; Mk 14:25. ἕ. τ. ἡμ. ταύτης (4 Km 17:23; 1 Macc 8:10; 13:30; 1 Esdr 8:73; Bar 1:13; ApcMos 13 p. 7, 1 Tdf.) 1 Cl 11:2. ἕ. ὥρας ἐνάτης Mk 15:33; Lk 23:44. ἕ. τῆς πεντηκοστῆς 1 Cor 16:8. ἕ. τῆς σήμερον (sc. ἡμέρας) Mt 27:8 (Just., D. 134, 5). ἕ. τέλους until the end 1 Cor 1:8 (JosAs 12:3); ἕ. αἰῶνος forever (1 Ch 17:16; Sir 24:9; 44:13; Jdth 13:19; 1 Esdr 8:82; PsSol 18:11; TestJob 34:4) Hv 2, 3, 3. Of someone’s age or a period of life ἕ. ἐτῶν ὀγδοήκοντα τεσσάρων until the age of 84, prob.= until she was now 84 years old (so Goodsp., Probs. 79–81) Lk 2:37 (cp. Jos., Ant. 5, 181). Used w. proper names (Polyb. 2, 41, 5; Diod S 1, 50, 6) ἕ. Ἰωάννου up to the time of John Mt 11:13. ἕ. Σαμουήλ Ac 13:20. In such cases, as well as in others, ἕ. often looks back to a preceding ἀπό: from … to (Bar 1:19; 1 Esdr 8:73; Sir 40:1; 1 Macc 16:2; 3 Macc 6:38 al.; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 18 Jac.): ἀπὸ Ἀβραὰμ ἕ. Δαυίδ Mt 1:17a. ἀπὸ τ. βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου ἕ. τῆς ἡμέρας Ac 1:22. ἀπὸ τ. ἕκτης ὥρας ἕ. ὥρας ἐνάτης Mt 27:45 (cp. SIG 736, 109 [92 B.C.] ἀπὸ τετάρτας ὥρας ἕ. ἑβδόμας; 1 Esdr 9:41). ἀπὸ πρωὶ̈ ἕ. ἑσπέρας Ac 28:23 (cp. Jos., Ant. 6, 364).—ἕ. τοῦ νῦν until now (Ps.-Lucian, Halc. 4; SIG 705, 44f [112 B.C.]; UPZ 122 [157 B.C.]; Gen 15:16; 18:12; Num 14:19; 1 Macc 2:33) after ἀπʼ ἀρχῆς Mt 24:21; Mk 13:19 (cp. BGU 1197, 8 [4 B.C.] ἕως τ. νῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐννεακαιδεκάτου ἔτους Καίσαρος; Ezk 4:14). ἀπὸ Δαυὶδ ἕ. τ. μετοικεσίας Βαβυλῶνος to the Babylonian exile Mt 1:17b.—As here, a historical event forms the boundary (cp. 1 Esdr 5:71; ParJer 3:11) in ἕ. τ. τελευτῆς Ἡρῴδου 2:15.—W. the articular inf. (on the acc. with it s. B-D-F §406, 3) ἕ. τοῦ ἐλθεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς Καισάρειαν until he came to Caesarea Ac 8:40 (s. SIG 588, 93f; Gen 24:33; 28:15; 1 Macc 3:33; 5:19; Polyb., Joseph. [B-D-F §403]); but s. also 3a below.
    β. w. gen. of the relative pron. (οὗ or ὅτου) in the neut.
    א. ἕ. οὗ until (Hdt. 2, 143; Plut. et al.; LXX; En; TestAbr; TestJob 24:4; in local mng. SIG 495, 101) w. aor. ind. (Judg 3:30; 4:24 B; 4 Km 17:20; Tob 1:21; 2:4, 10; Jdth 10:10; 15:5; JosAs 10:2, 19; Jos., Ant. 10, 134) Mt 1:25; 13:33; Lk 13:21; Ac 21:26. W. aor. subj. (BGU 1209, 8 [23 B.C.]; PRyl 229, 14 [38 A.D.]; Judg 5:7 B; Ps 71:7; Jdth 6:5, 8; TestAbr B 2 p. 107, 3 [Stone p. 62]; ParJer 9:3; GrBar 13:5; ApcMos 31 p. 17, 10 Tdf.) Mt 18:34; Lk 15:4 v.l., 8; 22:18; 24:49; Ac 25:21; 2 Pt 1:19. After neg.=until, before Mt 17:9; J 13:38; Ac 23:12, 14, 21.
    ב. ἕ. ὅτου until w. aor. ind. (Diod S 19, 108, 3; 3 Km 10:7; 11:16; Da 2:34; 7:4) J 9:18. W. aor. subj. (POxy 1061, 16 [22 B.C.]; 1 Km 22:3; 2 Esdr 14:5) Lk 12:50; 13:8; 15:8 v.l.; 22:16, 18 v.l.
    γ. w. adv. of time (JosAs 10:17 ἕ. πρωί̈; Ath. 22, 6 ἕ. νῦν) ἕ. ἄρτι until now (s. ἄρτι 3), Mt 11:12; J 2:10; 5:17; 16:24; 1J 2:9; 1 Cor 4:13; 8:7; 15:6. ἕ. σήμερον (Sir 47:7) 2 Cor 3:15. ἕ. πότε; how long? (Ps 12:2, 3; 2 Km 2:26; 1 Macc 6:22; ApcSed 12:1f) Mt 17:17ab; Mk 9:19ab; Lk 9:41; J 10:24; Rv 6:10.
    ② to denote contemporaneousness, as long as, while
    ⓐ conj. w. ind. (Hom.+; Jdth 5:17) in our lit. only the pres. (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 53 §218 ἕως χειμάζουσιν and ibid. ἕως Πομπήιος ἡγεῖται=while Pompey imagines; Jos., Bell. 7, 347; Just., D. 4, 4 ἕ. ἐν τῷ σώματί ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή) ἕ. ἡμέρα ἐστίν while it is day J 9:4 (v.l. ὡς. On this interchange s. LRadermacher, Philol. 60, 1901, 495f; B-D-F §455, 3); 12:35f v.l.; ἕ. αὐτὸς ἀπολύει τ. ὄχλον while he himself dismissed the crowd Mk 6:45. ἕ. ὑπάγουσιν while they were on their way Mt 25:10 D; ἕ. ἔτι ἔχομεν while we still have 2 Cl 16:1 (cp. Pla., Phd. 89c ἕ. ἔτι φῶς ἐστιν, Parmen. 135d ἕ. ἔτι νέος εἶ; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 32 §127 ἕως ἔτι δύνασαι; PEleph 14, 24 [223 B.C.]; Sir 33:21 ἕως ἔτι ζῇς).
    ⓑ conj. w. subjunctive (PTebt 6, 42 [140 B.C.] ἕως … μένωσι; Dio Chrys. 27 [44], 5 ἕως ἂν … φέρῃ=‘as long as’; Appian, Numid. 4 §2) Mk 14:32; Lk 17:8.
    ⓒ in a few cases ἕως also has this sense when functioning as prep. with the gen. of the rel. pronoun in the neut. while ἕ. οὗ (Jos., Ant. 3, 279 [ἔχουσι]) w. subj. Mt 14:22; 26:36 (but s. Burton, MT §325 and Zwaan §314).—ἕ. ὅτου (SSol 1:12) w. ind. Mt 5:25.
    ③ marker of limit reached, as far as, to, funct. as prep.
    ⓐ w. gen. of place as far as, to (Polyb. 3, 76, 2; Diod S 1, 27, 5; SIG 588, 32 [196 B.C.] ἕ. θαλάσσης; 1231, 12 ἀπὸ … ἕως; PTebt 33, 5 [112 B.C.]; LXX; En 21:1; 22:6; PsSol 15:10; TestAbr A 5 p. 82, 12f [Stone p. 12]; TestJob 20:6; GrBar 2:5; 11:8; JosAs 16:14; Jos., Bell. 1, 512; Mel., HE 4, 26, 14 ἕ. τοῦ τόπου …, ἔνθα) ἕ. Φοινίκης Ac 11:19. ἕ. Ἀντιοχείας vs. 22; ἕ. Βηθλεέμ Lk 2:15. ἕ. οὐρανοῦ, ᾅδου Mt 11:23; Lk 10:15 (ApcEsdr 4:32 p. 29, 8 Tdf.). ἕ. τῆς αὐλῆς Mt 26:58; cp. Lk 4:29. ἕ. ἐσχάτου τ. γῆς (Is 48:20; 62:11; 1 Macc 3:9; PsSol 1:4) Ac 1:8. ἕ. τρίτου οὐρανοῦ 2 Cor 12:2 (ApcSed 2:4). ἀπὸ … ἕ.: ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν ἕ. δυσμῶν Mt 24:27. ἀπʼ ἄκρων οὐρανῶν ἕ. ἄκρων αὐτῶν vs. 31 (cp. Dt 30:4). ἀπʼ ἄκρου γῆς ἕ. ἄκρου οὐρανοῦ Mk 13:27 (cp. Jdth 11:21).—Also w. gen. of a pers., who is in a certain place (Aelian, VH 3, 18 ἕ. Ὑπερβορέων; 4 Km 4:22; 1 Macc 3:26) ἦλθον ἕ. αὐτοῦ Lk 4:42. διελθεῖν ἕ. ἡμῶν Ac 9:38. Prob. Ac 8:40 also belongs here (s. above 1bα end); then a pass. like Gen 10:19 would be comparable.
    ⓑ w. adv. of place (LXX) ἕ. ἄνω (2 Ch 26:8) to the brim J 2:7. ἕ. ἔσω right into Mk 14:54. ἕ. κάτω (Ezk 1:27; 8:2 looking back to ἀπό) ἀπʼ ἄνωθεν ἕ. κάτω fr. top to bottom Mt 27:51; Mk 15:38 (cp. ἀπὸ ἔσω ἕω ἔξω TestSol 18:15 P). ἕ. ὧδε (Gen 22:5; 2 Km 20:16; 3 Km 18:45; Ar. 17, 1) ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τ. Γαλιλαίας ἕ. ὧδε Lk 23:5.
    ⓒ w. a prep. or another adv. ἕ. πρός (Polyb. 3, 82, 6; 12, 17, 4; Gen 38:1; Ezk 48:1) ἕ. πρὸς Βηθανίαν as far as B. Lk 24:50 (for the v.l. ἕ. εἰς Β. cp. Polyb. 1, 11, 14; Diod S 1, 27, 5; Aelian, VH 12, 22; Dt 31:24; 4 Km 2:6; PsSol 2:5; Jos., Ant. 16, 90). ἕ. καὶ εἰς even into Ac 26:11. ἕ. ἔξω τῆς πόλεως 21:5. ἕ. ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν Ac 17:14 (cp. 1 Macc 5:29; 3 Macc 7:18 A; PsSol 17:12; ἕ. ἐπὶ πολύ TestSol 7:2).
    ④ marker of order in a series, up to ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τῶν ἐσχάτων ἕ. πρώτων Mt 20:8. ὁ δεύτερος καὶ ὁ τρίτος ἕ. τῶν ἑπτά 22:26. ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕ. μεγάλου small and great (Bar 1:4; 1 Macc 5:45; Jdth 13:4) Ac 8:10; Hb 8:11 (Jer 38:34).—J 8:9 v.l.
    ⑤ marker of degree and measure, denoting the upper limit, to the point of ἕ. ἑπτάκις (4 Km 4:35; cp. TestSol 5:8 ἕ. ἑπτά; ApcSed 16:4 ἕ. εἴκοσι) as many as seven times Mt 18:21f; cp. vs. 22. ἕ. ἡμίσους τῆς βασιλείας μου (Esth 5:3; 7:2) Mk 6:23. οὐκ ἔστιν ἕ. ἑνός (cp. PTebt 56, 7 [II B.C.] οὐκ ἔχομεν ἕ. τῆς τροφῆς τῶν κτηνῶν ἡμῶν=‘we do not even have enough to feed our cattle’; Leontios, Vi. Joh. [ed. HGelzer 1893] 66, 21ff οὐ … ἕως ἑνὸς νομίσματος=‘not even a single coin’; cp. PRossGeorg III, 3, 22 ἕως δραχμῶν ἕκατον) there is not even one Ro 3:12 (Ps 13:3). ἐᾶτε ἕ. τούτου stop! No more of this Lk 22:51 (ἕ. τούτου=‘to this point’ Aristot., HA 9, 46; Polyb. 9, 36, 1; cp. 2 Km 7:18). ἕ. θανάτου unto death (Antig. Car. 16; Sir 34:12; 51:6; 4 Macc 14:19; JosAs 29:3): contend (Sir 4:28; cp. OGI 266, 29 [III B.C.] μαχοῦμαι ἕως ζωῆς καὶ θανάτου) 1 Cl 5:2. περίλυπός ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου ἕ. θανάτου Mt 26:38; Mk 14:34 (cp. Jon 4:9 σφόδρα λελύπημαι ἐγὼ ἕ. θανάτου).—DELG s.v. 2 ἕω. EDNT. New Docs 4, 154. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἕως

  • 20 ὁμολογέω

    ὁμολογέω (ὁμόλογος ‘of one mind’) impf. ὡμολόγουν; fut. ὁμολογήσω; 1 aor. ὡμολόγησα. Pass.: aor. 3 sg. ὡμολογήθη (Just.); pf. ὡμολόγηται (Just.) (Soph., Hdt.+)
    ① to commit oneself to do someth. for someone, promise, assure (Hdt., Pla. et al.; IGR IV, 542, 6f [Phryg.] εὐχὴν …, ἣν ὡμολόγησεν ἐν Ῥώμη; Jos., Ant. 6, 40 ‘consent’) ἐπαγγελίας ἧς (by attr. of the rel. for ἥν) ὡμολόγησεν ὁ θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ promise that God had made to Abraham Ac 7:17; μεθʼ ὅρκου ὁμ. w. aor. inf. foll. (B-D-F §350; Rob. 1031f) promise with an oath Mt 14:7. Solemnly promise, vow ὁ … ὁμολογήσας μὴ γῆμαι ἄγαμος διαμενέτω Agr 18.
    ② to share a common view or be of common mind about a matter, agree (Hdt. 2, 81 of similarity in cultic rites; Pla., Sym. 202b ὁμολογεῖταί γε παρὰ πάντων μέγας θεὸς εἶναι=there is general agreement that [Love] is a great god; prob. Cleanthes in his definition of τὸ ἀγαθόν: Coll. Alex. p. 229, no. 3, 7; 4 Macc 13:5 reach a conclusion together; pap; Sext. Emp., Adv. Eth. 218 agreement on a subject; Iren. 1, 26, 2 [Harv. I 212, 5] οἱ … Ἐβιωναῖοι ὁμ. μὲν τον κόσμον ὑπὸ τοῦ ὄντως θεοῦ γεγονέναι; Theoph. Ant. 2, 4 [p. 102, 10]) ὁμολογοῦσιν τὰ ἀμφότερα they agree (with one another) on all of them Ac 23:8 (but s. 3a below). This meaning readily shades into
    ③ to concede that something is factual or true, grant, admit, confess (Just., D. 80, 1 admission of someth. in an argument; sim. 110, 1)
    ⓐ gener., to admit the truth of someth. (Pla., Prot. 317b ὁμολογῶ σοφιστὴς εἶναι; Jos., Ant. 3, 322 an admission of factuality by enemies; Just., D. 2, 5 ὡμολόγησα μὴ εἰδέναι admission of ignorance) agree, admit καθάπερ καὶ αὐτὸς ὡμολόγησας Dg 2:1. ὁμολογήσαντες ὅτι ξένοι εἰσίν admitting that they were (only) foreigners Hb 11:13. ὁμολογοῦμεν χάριν μὴ εἰληφέναι we admit that we have not received grace IMg 8:1. For Ac 23:8 s. 2 above.
    ⓑ w. a judicial connotation: make a confession, confess abs. MPol 6:1; 9:2. τί τινι: ὁμολογῶ δὲ τοῦτό σοι, ὅτι Ac 24:14. Foll. by acc. and inf. ὡμολόγησεν ἑαυτὸν Χριστιανὸν εἶναι MPol 12:1 (cp. w. inf. foll.: Just., A II, 13, 2 Χριστιανὸς εὑρεθῆναι … ὁμολογῶ; Theoph. Ant. 2, 8 [p. 118, 7] ὁμ. αὐτὰ τὰ πλάνα πνεύματα εἶναι δαίμονες). Cp. John the Baptist’s action in reply to questioning by the authorities καὶ ὡμολόγησεν καὶ οὐκ ἠρνήσατο καὶ ὡμολόγησεν ὅτι (dir. disc. follows) J 1:20 (cp. Plut., Mor. 509e in interrogation; the contrast ὁμ. and ἀρνεῖσθαι as Thu. 6, 60, 3; Phalaris, Ep. 147, 3 ὁμολογοῦμεν κ. οὐκ ἀρνησόμεθα; Aelian, NA 2, 43; Jos., Ant. 6, 151; cp. MPol 9:2 and many of the passages given below).
    ⓒ w. focus on admission of wrongdoing (X., An. 1, 6, 7; Ps.-Aristot., Mirabilia 152 ὁμολογοῦντες ἃ ἐπιώρκησαν; Arrian, Anab. 7, 29, 2 [s. ἴασις 2]; Jos., Ant. 6, 151) ἐὰν ὁμολογῶμεν τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν if we confess our sins 1J 1:9 (cp. Appian, Liby. 79 §369 ὁμολογοῦντες ἁμαρτεῖν; Sir 4:26; ApcSed 13:3 [abs.]; ὁμ. τὸ ἁμάρτημα Did., Gen. 93, 6; ins fr. Sardis: ὁμολογῶ τ[ὸ| ἁμάρτημ]α Μηνί=I confess my sin to Men, s. FSteinleitner, Die Beicht 1913, p. 46 no. 20, 4f=ILydiaKP p. 15, no. 25). S. ἐξομολογέω 2a.
    ④ to acknowledge someth., ordinarily in public, acknowledge, claim, profess, praise
    ⓐ of a public declaration as such (Herodian. 4, 4, 5 [fr. Steinleitner, p. 109, s. 3c] expression of thanks) ὁμολογήσω αὐτοῖς ὅτι (w. dir. disc. foll.) I will say to them plainly Mt 7:23. W. inf. foll. (X., Mem. 2, 3, 9; Jos., Ant. 9, 254) θεὸν ὁμολογοῦσιν εἰδέναι they claim to know God Tit 1:16 (opp. ἀρνεῖσθαι, s. 3b).
    ⓑ of profession of allegiance (ὁμολογῶ εἶναι χριστιανός Theoph. Ant. 1, 1 [p. 58, 11])—Esp. of confessing Christ, or the teaching of his community/church; w. double acc. (B-D-F §157, 2; 416, 3; Rob. 480.—Jos., Ant. 5, 52; Just., A II, 5, 1 εἰ θεὸν ὡμολογοῦμεν βοηθόν, D. 35, 2 Ἰησοῦν ὁμολογεῖν καὶ κύριον καὶ χριστόν) ἐὰν ὁμολογήσῃς κύριον Ἰησοῦν if you confess Jesus as Lord Ro 10:9 (cp. τὸν Δία ὁμ. θεόν Orig., C. Cels. 5, 46, 7). αὐτὸν ὁμ. Χριστόν confess that he is the Messiah J 9:22. ὁμ. αὐτὸν σαρκοφόρον ISm 5:2. ὁμ. Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἐν σαρκὶ ἐληλυθότα acknowledge that Jesus Christ has come in the flesh 1J 4:2; cp. 2J 7. W. acc. and inf. (Isocr., Or. 4, 100, 61d; Aelian, VH 1, 27; Orig., C. Cels. 1, 41, 9) ὁμ. Ἰησοῦν Χρ. ἐν σαρκὶ ἐληλυθέναι Pol 7:1a; 1J 4:2 v.l. ὁμ. τὴν εὐχαριστίαν σάρκα εἶναι τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χρ. ISm 7:1. W. ὅτι foll. (Isocr., Or. 11, 5, 222d, but w. mng. 2; Just., D. 39, 6) ὁμ. ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἐστιν ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ 1J 4:15. ὁμ. ὅτι κύριον ἔχετε Hs 9, 28, 7 (opp. ἀρν.). W. a single acc. of the pers. whom one confesses, or whom one declares to be someth. that is revealed by the context (Just., D. 35, 1, 2 Ἰησοῦν … ὁμολογεῖν; Did., Gen. 176, 13 ὁ γὰρ ὁμολογῶν τὸν θεὸν ἐν Χριστῷ τοῦτο ποιεῖ; Theoph. Ant. 3, 9 [p. 222, 13] θεὸν ὁμ.): ὁμ. τὸν υἱόν 1J 2:23 (opp. ἀρν. as Mel., P. 73, 537 ἀπαρνήσω τὸν ὁμολογήσαντά σε). μὴ ὁμ. τὸν Ἰησοῦν 4:3 (s. λύω 4, end). Cp. 2 Cl 3:2a. τινὰ ἔν τινι someone by someth. ἐν τοῖς ἔργοις 4:3; cp. 3:4. ἐὰν ὁμολογήσωμεν διʼ οὗ ἐσώθημεν if we confess him through whom we were saved 3:3. The acc. (αὐτόν) is supplied fr. the context J 12:42; cp. Hs 9, 28, 4.—W. acc. of thing ὁμ. τὸ μαρτύριον τοῦ σταυροῦ Pol 7:1b. ὁμ. τὴν καλὴν ὁμολογίαν 1 Ti 6:12 (ὁμ. ὁμολογίαν=‘make a promise’: Pla., Crito 52a; Jer 51:25; but = ‘bear testimony to a conviction’: Philo, Mut. Nom. 57, Abr. 203).—Instead of acc. of pers. we may have ἔν τινι confess someone, an Aramaism (s. Mlt-H. 463f; B-D-F §220, 2; EbNestle, ZNW 7,1906, 279f; 8, 1907, 241; 9, 1908, 253; FBurkitt, Earliest Sources for the Life of Jesus 1910, 19f). ὅστις ὁμολογήσει ἐν ἐμοὶ ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων whoever confesses me before people Mt 10:32a; sim. Lk 12:8a. But 2 Cl 3:2 uses the acc. when it quotes this saying (s. above.—In these last three pass. opp. ἀρν.). Jesus’ acknowledgment of the believer on judgment day complements this confession: ἐν αὐτῷ Mt 10:32b; Lk 12:8b. αὐτόν 2 Cl 3:2b (opp. ἀρν. in all these pass.—GBornkamm, D. Wort Jesu vom Bekennen [Mt 10:32]: Pastoraltheologie 34, ’39, 108–18). τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ Rv 3:5.—Abs. pass. στόματι ὁμολογεῖται with the mouth confession is made Ro 10:10.
    ⓒ praise w. dat. ( Dio Chrys. 10 [11], 147; B-D-F §187, 4; Rob. 541. In the LXX ἐξομολογεῖσθαι τῷ θεῷ. S. ἐξομολογέω 4.) καρπὸς χειλέων ὁμολογούντων τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ the fruit of lips that praise his name Hb 13:15.—B. 1267. DELG s.v. ὁμό. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὁμολογέω

Страницы
  • 1
  • 2

См. также в других словарях:

  • Every Single Day (song) — Infobox Single Name = Every Single Day Artist = Rob Mills from Album = Up All Night B side = Released = 2004 Format = CD single, digital download Recorded = 2004 Genre = Pop, Rock Length = Label = Sony BMG Australia Writer = Producer =… …   Wikipedia

  • Every Single Day — Infobox Album Name = Every Single Day Type = album Artist = Luni Coleone Released = June 5, 2007 Recorded = 2007 Genre = Hip Hop Length = Label = Always Hustlin Records, Jus Family Records Producer = Luni Coleone, Cool Nutz , Shane Judge , Tyson… …   Wikipedia

  • Day of Light — Single by KMFDM B side Beach Released February 1, 2010 Format …   Wikipedia

  • Day — (d[=a]), n. [OE. day, dai, dei, AS. d[ae]g; akin to OS., D., Dan., & Sw. dag, G. tag, Icel. dagr, Goth. dags; cf. Skr. dah (for dhagh ?) to burn. [root]69. Cf. {Dawn}.] 1. The time of light, or interval between one night and the next; the time… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • Day after day — Day Day (d[=a]), n. [OE. day, dai, dei, AS. d[ae]g; akin to OS., D., Dan., & Sw. dag, G. tag, Icel. dagr, Goth. dags; cf. Skr. dah (for dhagh ?) to burn. [root]69. Cf. {Dawn}.] 1. The time of light, or interval between one night and the next; the …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • Day blindness — Day Day (d[=a]), n. [OE. day, dai, dei, AS. d[ae]g; akin to OS., D., Dan., & Sw. dag, G. tag, Icel. dagr, Goth. dags; cf. Skr. dah (for dhagh ?) to burn. [root]69. Cf. {Dawn}.] 1. The time of light, or interval between one night and the next; the …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • Day by day — Day Day (d[=a]), n. [OE. day, dai, dei, AS. d[ae]g; akin to OS., D., Dan., & Sw. dag, G. tag, Icel. dagr, Goth. dags; cf. Skr. dah (for dhagh ?) to burn. [root]69. Cf. {Dawn}.] 1. The time of light, or interval between one night and the next; the …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • Day in court — Day Day (d[=a]), n. [OE. day, dai, dei, AS. d[ae]g; akin to OS., D., Dan., & Sw. dag, G. tag, Icel. dagr, Goth. dags; cf. Skr. dah (for dhagh ?) to burn. [root]69. Cf. {Dawn}.] 1. The time of light, or interval between one night and the next; the …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • Day owl — Day Day (d[=a]), n. [OE. day, dai, dei, AS. d[ae]g; akin to OS., D., Dan., & Sw. dag, G. tag, Icel. dagr, Goth. dags; cf. Skr. dah (for dhagh ?) to burn. [root]69. Cf. {Dawn}.] 1. The time of light, or interval between one night and the next; the …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • Day rule — Day Day (d[=a]), n. [OE. day, dai, dei, AS. d[ae]g; akin to OS., D., Dan., & Sw. dag, G. tag, Icel. dagr, Goth. dags; cf. Skr. dah (for dhagh ?) to burn. [root]69. Cf. {Dawn}.] 1. The time of light, or interval between one night and the next; the …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • Day school — Day Day (d[=a]), n. [OE. day, dai, dei, AS. d[ae]g; akin to OS., D., Dan., & Sw. dag, G. tag, Icel. dagr, Goth. dags; cf. Skr. dah (for dhagh ?) to burn. [root]69. Cf. {Dawn}.] 1. The time of light, or interval between one night and the next; the …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»